L E A R N L I N C

ADVANCED GUIDE
v e r s i o n 4 . 5

LearnLinc Corporation
385 Jordan Road, Troy, NY 12180-7601 USA
phone: +1 (518) 286-7000
fax: +1 (518) 286-2439
email: info@[Link]
web address: [Link]

Copyright 1994-2000 LearnLinc Corporation.

LearnLinc is a trademark of LearnLinc Corporation.
All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.

Notice
Disclaimer of Warranty
LearnLinc Corporation makes no representations or warranties, either express or implied, by or with respect to anything in this
manual, and shall not be liable for any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or for any indirect,
special, or consequential damages.
Copyright Notice
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book, LearnLinc Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors
or omissions. This publication and features described herein are subject to change without notice.
Copyright 2000 LearnLinc Corporation. All rights reserved. The program and information contained herein are licensed only
pursuant to a license agreement that contains use, reverse engineering, disclosure and other restrictions.
Permission to print
Customer is hereby authorized to print and copy the documentation contained on the enclosed media for use solely within its
enterprise, provided it reproduces the preceding copyright notice on the front of each copy or partial copy. Customer is not
authorized to print and copy and disseminate the documentation outside its enterprise.
Customer's failure to comply with these terms terminates this authorization and, in such case, customer shall promptly destroy the
machine-readable documentation, any copies thereof, and any media containing such documentation.
Trademarks
LearnLinc and the LearnLinc logos are registered trademarks of LearnLinc Corporation. All other products are trademarks of their
respective companies.
LearnLinc Corporation
LearnLinc has recently become part of a new total-solution e-learning company
385 Jordan Road
called Mentergy, Inc. LearnLinc joins Allen Communication and Gilat
Troy, NY 12180
Communications, Ltd. in this new organization, which remains committed to
phone: +1 518.286.7000
customer-focused, e-learning success. Mentergy will continue to offer
LearnLinc virtual classroom software, in addition to a full range of e-learning
fax: +1 518.286.2439
products and services for courseware development, consulting, self-paced and
info@[Link]
live delivery systems, and hosted e-learning services.
[Link]

LearnLinc Advanced Guide

Contents
1.

About this Guide

Who Should Read this Guide ................................................................................................................................................. 1
How this Guide is Organized................................................................................................................................................. 1
How the Chapters Are Organized ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Additional Materials ................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Conventions in this Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
How to Get Help and Submit Suggestions............................................................................................................................ 4
Registration and Update Information..................................................................................................................................... 4

2.

Getting Started
What is LearnLinc?................................................................................................................................................................... 7
About the Software ................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Client/Server Architecture .................................................................................................................................................. 7
Server Components ............................................................................................................................................................ 8
Interface Components ........................................................................................................................................................ 9
System Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................ 16
LearnLinc Server ............................................................................................................................................................... 16
Bandwidth......................................................................................................................................................................... 18
ClientLearnLinc Classroom Software ............................................................................................................................. 19
Third Party Software......................................................................................................................................................... 25
Overview: Creating a LearnLinc Environment..................................................................................................................... 26
Assemble your Team........................................................................................................................................................ 26
Plan your Environment .................................................................................................................................................... 28
v

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Install the Server Software and your License Keys......................................................................................................... 29

Install the Classroom Software ........................................................................................................................................ 30
Test the Environment ....................................................................................................................................................... 30
Add Users.......................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Create Content .................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Schedule Courses and Classes ......................................................................................................................................... 30
Add Content to your Courses and Classes...................................................................................................................... 30
Rehearse the Class............................................................................................................................................................ 31
Make the LearnLinc Virtual Campus Available to Students............................................................................................ 31
Overview: Using LearnLinc .................................................................................................................................................. 32
Log-in to the Virtual Campus........................................................................................................................................... 32
Access Online Help for the Virtual Campus ................................................................................................................... 32
Register for a Course ........................................................................................................................................................ 32
Join a Class ....................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Access Online Help for the Classroom ........................................................................................................................... 33
Communicate with others in the Classroom................................................................................................................... 33
Leave the Class ................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Log-out of the Virtual Campus ........................................................................................................................................ 33

Administrative Tasks
3.

Getting Ready for LearnLinc

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................... 38
Key Concepts ........................................................................................................................................................................ 38

vi

A Checklist for Deploying LearnLinc............................................................................................................................... 38

Concurrent User License Model....................................................................................................................................... 39
Client/Server Architecture ................................................................................................................................................ 40
LearnLinc Bandwidth Use ................................................................................................................................................ 40
Firewall Considerations .................................................................................................................................................... 41
Ensure That all Necessary Hardware and Software Is in Place for LearnLinc .............................................................. 42
Next Steps.............................................................................................................................................................................. 42

4.

Installing LearnLinc
What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................... 43
Key Concepts ........................................................................................................................................................................ 44
LearnLinc Installation Checklist ....................................................................................................................................... 44
Other Software that Must Be Installed on the LearnLinc Server Computer .................................................................. 45
Components That Make Up the LearnLinc Server.......................................................................................................... 45
Utilities for Administering the LearnLinc Server ............................................................................................................. 45
Importing and Exporting Name Service Information ..................................................................................................... 47
Server Activity Logs .......................................................................................................................................................... 47
Multiple Servers ................................................................................................................................................................ 49
Components Installed With the LearnLinc Classroom Software .................................................................................... 49
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................... 50
Getting the Server Computer Ready for the LearnLinc Server Software ....................................................................... 50
Installing the Server Software .......................................................................................................................................... 51
Enabling Your Server Licenses ........................................................................................................................................ 52
Password Protecting the Server Information Page ......................................................................................................... 54
Logging Server Activity .................................................................................................................................................... 56
Changing the Location of Your Virtual Campus............................................................................................................. 57
vii

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Updating the Domain Name of Your LearnLinc Server ................................................................................................. 60

Installing the Administration Tool ................................................................................................................................... 62
Exporting Information from the LearnLinc Name Service Database ............................................................................. 63
Importing Information from a LearnLinc Name Service Capsule File ........................................................................... 66
Installing the Classroom Software on a Users Computer .............................................................................................. 68
Allowing Your Users Download and Install the Classroom Software ........................................................................... 69
Configuring the Classroom Software to Work with Web Proxies and Firewalls .......................................................... 70
Next Steps.............................................................................................................................................................................. 71

5.

Testing the LearnLinc Environment

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................... 73
Key Concepts ........................................................................................................................................................................ 74
Required Elements for Testing......................................................................................................................................... 74
Multiple Sites .................................................................................................................................................................... 74
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................... 74
Check Your Licences........................................................................................................................................................ 75
Log-in as an Administrator............................................................................................................................................... 76
Change the System Administrator Account Password.................................................................................................... 78
Log-in Again as Sample Instructor................................................................................................................................... 83
Instructor: Join a Class in the Sample Course................................................................................................................. 84
Student: Join the Same Class on Another LearnLinc Computer..................................................................................... 86
Instructor: Talk to the Class ............................................................................................................................................. 88
Student: Raise Hand ......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Instructor: Pass the Floor ................................................................................................................................................. 89
Student: Talk to the Class ................................................................................................................................................ 90

viii

Instructor: Take the Floor ................................................................................................................................................ 91

Instructor: Launch the Synchronized Web Browser and Navigate to a URL ................................................................ 91
Instructor: Use AppShare ................................................................................................................................................. 93
Multiple Site Testing......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Next Steps.............................................................................................................................................................................. 96

6.

Customizing LearnLinc
What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................... 98
Key Concepts ........................................................................................................................................................................ 98
Why Customize? ............................................................................................................................................................... 98
Streaming Video ............................................................................................................................................................... 98
Areas of LearnLinc That Can Be Localized ..................................................................................................................... 99
Features That Can Be Customized in the Virtual Campus ............................................................................................. 99
A Suggested Process for Developing and Implementing Virtual Campus Customizations ........................................ 100
Features That Can Be Customized in the Virtual Classroom ....................................................................................... 100
Distributing Customizations to the Virtual Classroom.................................................................................................. 100
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 101
Adding Streaming Video to Your LearnLinc Server...................................................................................................... 101
Removing Access to Virtual Campus Functions ........................................................................................................... 102
Modifying the Virtual Campus Download Page ........................................................................................................... 104
Localizing the Virtual Campus ....................................................................................................................................... 109
Making Changes to the Text in the Virtual Campus .................................................................................................... 110
Changing Virtual Campus Graphics .............................................................................................................................. 112
Enabling Instructors and Students to Show their Pictures in the LearnLinc Palette ................................................... 118
Changing the Default Instructor and Student Pictures in the LearnLinc Palette ......................................................... 119

ix

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Changing the Virtual Classroom Desktop Background Bitmap................................................................................... 120

Changing the Default Page that Displays when the Synchronized Web Browser Launches..................................... 120
Changing the Default Feedback Answers for all Your LearnLinc Users ..................................................................... 121
Creating a Custom Installation for the LearnLinc Classroom Software........................................................................ 123
To Learn More..................................................................................................................................................................... 124
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 124

7.

Managing Users
What You Need to Know Before Reading this Chapter ................................................................................................... 125
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 126
What Is a LearnLinc User? .............................................................................................................................................. 126
What Is an Authority Level? ........................................................................................................................................... 126
What Is a Log-in Group? ................................................................................................................................................ 127
Administration Options .................................................................................................................................................. 128
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 129
Creating a Log-in Group ................................................................................................................................................ 129
Creating a User ............................................................................................................................................................... 133
Deleting a Log-in Group or User................................................................................................................................... 136
Adding, Editing, and Deleting Authority Levels ........................................................................................................... 138
Adding a Large Number of Users .................................................................................................................................. 144
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 147

Creating LearnLinc Courses, Classes, and Content

8.

Converting your Content for LearnLinc

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 151
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 152
How is LearnLinc Content Different from other Types of Instructional Content? ...................................................... 152
Your Content Conversion Options ................................................................................................................................ 152
Which Conversion Option is Right for You?................................................................................................................. 154
Where to Store your Content?........................................................................................................................................ 157
Making Content Available to Students .......................................................................................................................... 157
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 158
Uploading a PowerPoint File......................................................................................................................................... 159
Deleting a PowerPoint Presentation That has Been Uploaded to the Server ............................................................. 165
Modifying the PowerPoint Upload Default Settings..................................................................................................... 169
Uploading Web Files to the LearnLinc Server .............................................................................................................. 171
Converting a PowerPoint file to a ToolBook Book...................................................................................................... 172
Adding a LearnLinc Navigator to your ToolBook Book .............................................................................................. 175
Distributing Toolbook/Authorware Books or Director Movies ................................................................................... 177
To Learn More..................................................................................................................................................................... 183
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 183

9.

Creating Courses
What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 185
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 186
What Is the Virtual Campus?.......................................................................................................................................... 186

xi

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Where Is the Virtual Campus?........................................................................................................................................ 189

What Is a Course? ........................................................................................................................................................... 189
What Happens When a Student Registers for a Course?.............................................................................................. 190
Folders ............................................................................................................................................................................ 191
Course Contents ............................................................................................................................................................. 191
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 192
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 193
Creating a Folder in the Course Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 193
Adding a Course to the Course Catalog........................................................................................................................ 196
Registering Instructors for a Course .............................................................................................................................. 199
Registering Students for a Course.................................................................................................................................. 204
Adding Resources to a Course....................................................................................................................................... 209
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 212

10. Scheduling Classes

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 213
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 214
What Is the Virtual Classroom? ...................................................................................................................................... 214
Floor Control .................................................................................................................................................................. 215
Audio and Video Conferencing ..................................................................................................................................... 215
Bandwidth....................................................................................................................................................................... 217
Streaming Video ............................................................................................................................................................. 220
Assistant Instructors........................................................................................................................................................ 220
Classroom Security ......................................................................................................................................................... 220
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 220
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 221
xii

Adding a Class to a Course Contents List ..................................................................................................................... 221

Selecting Assistant Instructors for the Class .................................................................................................................. 227
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 231

11. Working with Resources

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 233
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 234
What Is a Resource? ....................................................................................................................................................... 234
Can I Hide Selected Resources from Students?............................................................................................................. 236
Who Can Add a Resource to a Course or Class? .......................................................................................................... 237
What if the Same Resource Is Used in Multiple Courses or Classes? .......................................................................... 237
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 237
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 238
Adding a Resource to a Course Contents List............................................................................................................... 238
Adding a Resource to a Class Agenda or Autostart List ............................................................................................... 243
Making a Resource Private............................................................................................................................................. 254
Editing a Resource.......................................................................................................................................................... 256
Sorting Items in a Course Contents or Class Agenda List ............................................................................................ 260
Removing a Resource from a Course Contents, Class Agenda, or Autostart List........................................................ 262
Adding an Application to the Application Selection List ............................................................................................. 264
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 267

xiii

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Teaching LearnLinc Classes

12. Visiting the Virtual Campus
What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 272
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 272
Authority Levels and the Virtual Campus ..................................................................................................................... 272
The student view............................................................................................................................................................ 273
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 274
Finding Your Virtual Campus ........................................................................................................................................ 274
Logging-in to Your Virtual Campus............................................................................................................................... 275
Locating Information About Another User.................................................................................................................... 278
Editing Your User Profile and Password....................................................................................................................... 281
Registering for and Dropping Courses.......................................................................................................................... 285
To Learn More..................................................................................................................................................................... 287
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 287

13. Working With Courses

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 289
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 290
Who Can Manage Courses?............................................................................................................................................ 290
Classes............................................................................................................................................................................. 290
People ............................................................................................................................................................................. 291
Threaded Discussion ...................................................................................................................................................... 292
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 293
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 294

xiv

Accessing Course Information ....................................................................................................................................... 294

Opening Course Resources............................................................................................................................................ 297
Finding Out Who Is Taking a Course ........................................................................................................................... 299
Communicating with the Class ...................................................................................................................................... 301
To Learn More..................................................................................................................................................................... 304
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 304

14. Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 305
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 306
About the Classroom Software ...................................................................................................................................... 306
Choosing Between the Typical, Advanced, and Custom Installations ............................................................... 306
The Downloading Process ............................................................................................................................................. 307
Displaying your Information in the LearnLinc Palette.................................................................................................. 307
Web Proxies.................................................................................................................................................................... 308
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 309
Downloading and Installing the Classroom Software .................................................................................................. 309
Reconfiguring your Classroom Software after Installation ........................................................................................... 314
Making your Picture Display in the LearnLinc Palette ................................................................................................. 315
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 315

15. Teaching a Class

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter ............................................................................................. 318
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 318
LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet................................................................................... 318
The LearnLinc Palette ..................................................................................................................................................... 321
xv

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The Difference Between Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Audio ................................................................................... 324

Hand Raising................................................................................................................................................................... 325
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 325
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 328
Joining a Class ................................................................................................................................................................ 329
Making Sure the Class Can Hear You ........................................................................................................................... 333
Talking to the Class ........................................................................................................................................................ 334
Seeing Who Is in Your Class ......................................................................................................................................... 335
Responding to Hand Raises ........................................................................................................................................... 336
Passing the Floor to a Student ....................................................................................................................................... 337
Working Privately While You Have the Floor .............................................................................................................. 337
Dismissing a Student from Class.................................................................................................................................... 338
Leaving a Class ............................................................................................................................................................... 338
To Learn More..................................................................................................................................................................... 339
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 339

16. Recording Classes

Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 342
How Do I Get the Classroom Recorder and Player? .................................................................................................... 342
What Is the Classroom Recorder? .................................................................................................................................. 342
What is a Dedicated Recording Computer? .................................................................................................................. 343
Who Can Record Classes? .............................................................................................................................................. 343
What Is the Difference Between Saving and Uploading a Recorded Class? ............................................................... 343
What Is the Classroom Player?....................................................................................................................................... 344
How Big Are the Recorded Classroom Files?................................................................................................................ 344
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 345
xvi

Recording a Class ........................................................................................................................................................... 345

Pausing or Stopping the Recorder................................................................................................................................. 347
Uploading a Recorded Class.......................................................................................................................................... 348
Saving a Recorded Class to Upload Later ..................................................................................................................... 351
Uploading a Saved File .................................................................................................................................................. 353
Playing a Recorded Class ............................................................................................................................................... 354
Downloading a Recorded File ....................................................................................................................................... 356
Playing a Downloaded File............................................................................................................................................ 361
Setting the Recorder Options......................................................................................................................................... 363

17. Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 365
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 366
What Is Text Chat?.......................................................................................................................................................... 366
Private Messages............................................................................................................................................................. 367
Restricted Text Chat ....................................................................................................................................................... 367
Network Status Monitor Messages................................................................................................................................. 367
Assistant Instructors and Text Chat ............................................................................................................................... 368
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 368
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 369
Sending a Message to the Class..................................................................................................................................... 369
Changing the Font Size in the Text Chat Window ....................................................................................................... 370
Undocking the Text Chat Window................................................................................................................................ 370
Sending Private Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 371
Restricting Text Chat to yourself, your Assistants and the Current Floor Holder ....................................................... 371

xvii

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 372

18. Using Multimedia Content During Class

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 373
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 374
What Is Multimedia Content? ......................................................................................................................................... 374
Types of Multimedia Content that Can Be Synchronized ............................................................................................ 374
Synchronization .............................................................................................................................................................. 374
ToolBook, Authorware, and Director............................................................................................................................ 375
Audio and Video Clips ................................................................................................................................................... 375
What if My Multimedia Content Contains Audio or Video Clips and My Class Uses Conferencing? ........................ 376
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 376
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 377
Suspending Conferencing to Run an Audio or Video Clip .......................................................................................... 377
Launching a Synchronized Multimedia Book, Director Movie, Audio Clip, or Video Clip for the Class .................. 378
Working With ToolBook Synchronized Multimedia Books ......................................................................................... 380
Closing Synchronized Multimedia Books for the Class................................................................................................ 381
Closing Audio and Video Clips ..................................................................................................................................... 381
To Learn More..................................................................................................................................................................... 382
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 382

19. Synchronizing Web Content

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter ............................................................................................. 383
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 384
What Is the Synchronized Web Browser? ..................................................................................................................... 384
When Should I Use the Synchronized Web Browser? ................................................................................................. 385
xviii

What Does it Synchronize? ............................................................................................................................................ 385

The Difference between HTML and Other Web Presentation Technologies.............................................................. 385
The Difference Between the Internet and an Intranet ................................................................................................. 386
Differing Connection Speeds Among Students Affects Synchronization..................................................................... 387
Supported Browsers ....................................................................................................................................................... 388
Synchronizing Navigation in Frames............................................................................................................................. 388
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 388
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 389
Launching the Synchronized Web Browser.................................................................................................................. 389
Closing the Synchronized Web Browser for Yourself or the Class ............................................................................. 390
To Learn More..................................................................................................................................................................... 391
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 391

20. Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 393
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 394
What Is the Whiteboard?................................................................................................................................................ 394
Who Can Use the Whiteboard?...................................................................................................................................... 395
Storing Files on your Computer for Use in a LearnLinc Class ..................................................................................... 395
Whiteboard Synchronization.......................................................................................................................................... 396
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 396
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 397
Using the Whiteboard on your Own............................................................................................................................. 398
Saving Whiteboard Files................................................................................................................................................. 399
Printing Whiteboard Files .............................................................................................................................................. 400
Launching the Whiteboard for the Class....................................................................................................................... 401
xix

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Launching a Whiteboard File from the Agenda............................................................................................................ 401

Launching a Whiteboard File from the Library............................................................................................................. 402
Opening your Whiteboard Files for the Class .............................................................................................................. 403
Updating the Whiteboard for Others ............................................................................................................................ 404
Using the Shared Pointer ............................................................................................................................................... 404
Adding Text .................................................................................................................................................................... 404
Drawing Lines, Ellipses, Rectangles, and Freehand Shapes......................................................................................... 406
Changing the Line Weight, Line Color, and Fill Color ................................................................................................. 407
Importing a Picture......................................................................................................................................................... 407
Grabbing a Screen Shot and Placing it on the Whiteboard ......................................................................................... 409
Closing the Whiteboard for the Class............................................................................................................................ 409
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 411

21. Sharing Applications With the Class

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 414
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 414
What Is Application Sharing? ......................................................................................................................................... 414
What Applications Can I Share?..................................................................................................................................... 415
AppShare......................................................................................................................................................................... 415
AppView ......................................................................................................................................................................... 415
Deciding Between AppShare and AppView................................................................................................................. 416
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 416
Detailed Directions for AppShare.................................................................................................................................. 417
Sharing Your Applications With the Class .................................................................................................................... 417
Selecting Other Applications to Share With the Class.................................................................................................. 420

xx

Allowing a Student to Share his or her Applications ................................................................................................... 422

Updating Students AppShare Windows ....................................................................................................................... 424
Closing AppShare ........................................................................................................................................................... 425
Using AppShare in an Open Discussion Class ............................................................................................................. 425
Taking Control of AppShare in an Open Discussion Class ......................................................................................... 428
Detailed Directions for AppView ....................................................................................................................................... 430
Launching AppView ....................................................................................................................................................... 430
Showing a Different Application to the Class ............................................................................................................... 432
Closing AppView............................................................................................................................................................ 433
Setting AppView to Split-Screen View .......................................................................................................................... 434
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 438

22. Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter ............................................................................................. 439
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 440
What Is Feedback?.......................................................................................................................................................... 440
What Are My Answer Options?...................................................................................................................................... 441
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 441
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 442
Asking Your Students to Use Feedback to Respond to a Question ............................................................................ 442
Changing the Answer Set............................................................................................................................................... 442
Sharing the Feedback Summary Results with the Class ............................................................................................... 443
Clearing Feedback Answers........................................................................................................................................... 443
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 444

xxi

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

23. Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 446
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 446
What Is Q&A? ................................................................................................................................................................. 446
When Should I Use Q&A?.............................................................................................................................................. 448
Who Can Ask Questions With Q&A? ............................................................................................................................ 448
Storing Files on your Local Computer to Use in a LearnLinc Class............................................................................. 448
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 449
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 450
Making a Question List Before Class............................................................................................................................. 450
Removing a Question from the List............................................................................................................................... 452
Saving Question Sets ...................................................................................................................................................... 452
Merging Question Sets ................................................................................................................................................... 453
Launching Q&A for the Class ........................................................................................................................................ 455
Adding Questions on-the-fly During Class ................................................................................................................... 456
Asking a Question .......................................................................................................................................................... 457
Viewing the Answers ..................................................................................................................................................... 458
Viewing the Answer Statistics in Summary Form ......................................................................................................... 458
Viewing the Answer Details........................................................................................................................................... 458
Sharing the Answer Statistics with the Class................................................................................................................. 459
Closing Q&A for the Class ............................................................................................................................................. 459
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 460

xxii

24. Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 461
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 462
What Is Glimpse?............................................................................................................................................................ 462
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 463
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 464
Launching Glimpse......................................................................................................................................................... 464
Viewing a Students Desktop ......................................................................................................................................... 465
Refreshing the student list.............................................................................................................................................. 465
Closing Glimpse ............................................................................................................................................................. 465
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 466

25. Creating Breakout Groups

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter .................................................................................................. 467
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 468
What Is a Breakout Group?............................................................................................................................................ 468
How Does Open Discussion Work? .............................................................................................................................. 468
What Do Students See in a Breakout Group?............................................................................................................... 468
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 470
Creating Breakout Groups ............................................................................................................................................. 470
Sending Latecomers to Groups...................................................................................................................................... 474
Joining Breakout Groups ............................................................................................................................................... 475
Helping your Students Work Effectively in Breakout Groups ..................................................................................... 476

xxiii

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Assisting the Instructor During Class

26. Assisting the Instructor During Class
What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter ............................................................................................. 481
Key Concepts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 482
The Role of Assistant Instructor..................................................................................................................................... 482
The Student View ........................................................................................................................................................... 482
Detailed Directions ............................................................................................................................................................. 483
Responding to Private Text Chat Messages .................................................................................................................. 483
Monitoring Hand Raises and Feedback Responses ...................................................................................................... 484
Launching Applications and Resources for the Class ................................................................................................... 485
Next Steps............................................................................................................................................................................ 485

Glossary, Appendices, and Index

Glossary .............................................................................................................................................................................. 489
Appendix A: Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................... 509
Appendix B: Name Service Capsule Definitions .............................................................................................................. 551
Appendix C: Configuring LearnLinc to Work With SQL Server ...................................................................................... 571
Index................................................................................................................................................................................... 575

xxiv

1
About this Guide
This guide provides advanced information about the LearnLinc environment and tools.
Specifically, it addresses concepts and tasks associated with the setup, installation, use, and
maintenance of the LearnLinc environment.

Who Should Read this Guide

The LearnLinc Advanced Guide is intended for LearnLinc administrators, authors, and
instructors. The LearnLinc documentation set assumes you have a working knowledge of the
Microsoft Windows operating system and its conventions, and basic web browsing skills. For
administrators, the documentation assumes a basic understanding of networking and related
issues. Wherever possible, the documentation refers you to additional resources on topics
outside the scope of this guide.
Please refer students to the LearnLinc Student Guide, which contains student information about
using the Virtual Campus and participating in LearnLinc classes.

How this Guide is Organized

The LearnLinc Advanced Guide is organized into several sections.
This chapter, and the following chapter, Getting Started, provide important information
regarding this guide and the LearnLinc environment. Please review both chapters before
reading the remaining sections and using LearnLinc.
Chapters 3-7, Administrative Tasks, provide information regarding LearnLinc setup and
installation, testing, customization, and managing user accounts.

1 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Chapters 8-11, Creating LearnLinc Curses, Classes, and Content, provide information about
creating and distributing synchronized multimedia content, creating courses and resources,
making them available to users, and scheduling LearnLinc classes. For a complete guide to
creating synchronized content, please see the LearnLinc Authoring Guide, which is included
on the LearnLinc Authoring Kit CD.
Chapters 12-25, Teaching LearnLinc Classes, provide information about visiting the Virtual
Campus, working with courses, preparing to join your first class, teaching a class, and using the
LearnLinc classroom tools.
Chapter 26, Assisting the Instructor During Class, provides information about taking on the role
of assistant instructor in a LearnLinc class.
The remainder of the guide provides a glossary, appendices covering troubleshooting
information, name service capsule definitions, and a complete index.

How the Chapters Are Organized

The chapters in the main body of this guide are organized to provide information in a
consistent and logical order.
The chapter introduction includes a one to two sentence statement of the chapters subject,
a list of tasks to be learned in the chapter, a series of questions that will be answered by the
content of the chapter, and a pre-requisite list of information you should know before
reading the chapter.
Key Concepts includes a series of related concepts that are necessary to your
understanding of the chapter topic. Notes and definitions are in the margins next to the
concept to which they relate.
Detailed Directions includes step-by-step instructions, with screen shots, of each task that
is related to the chapters topic. In addition, most tasks have a Quick Steps section in the
margin of the page for experienced users who need a quick overview of the procedure.
Finally, Next Steps provides guidance for where to go next in the manual, and with
LearnLinc by referring you to other useful chapters in the guide.

Additional Materials
In

addition to the LearnLinc Advanced Guide, your LearnLinc package contains the:
LearnLinc Student Guide
Installation Guide
Quick Start Guides
Upgrade document
License Agreement
License Key Fax-Back Form
LearnLinc Authoring Guide (included on the LearnLinc Authoring Kit CD)

Conventions in this Guide

The following textual and graphic conventions are used throughout this guide.

Textual Conventions
Web page titles, web link text, window titles, error messages, and dialog names appear in
quotes.
Button names appear in plain text with an Initial capital letter.
Keyboard keys appear in <brackets>.
Book, section, and chapter titles appear in italics.
Variable input, text that you will replace with your own information, appear in italics.
Actual input, text that you should enter exactly as shown, appears in Courier New.
Graphic Conventions
All chapters use a two column layout. The outside column, the column closest to the page
edge, contains notes, definitions, and Quick Steps. The inside column, the column closer to
the binding, contains body text, warnings, and screen shots.

Notes are indicated by a check mark and appear in the outside margin of the page, next
to the topic to which they relate. An example appears next to this text.
Definitions are indicated by an arrow and appear in the outside margin of the page,
next to the topic to which they relate. An example appears next to this text.

This is a note. Notes contain

useful, but non-essential information about the topic next

to which they appear.

This is a definition. Definitions

describe LearnLinc or LearnLinc related terms that are
used in the topic next which
they appear.

1 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Warnings are indicated by a circled arrow and rules above and below the warning text.
Warnings appear directly below the text to which they relate. An example follows.
This is a warning. Warnings contain essential information that you should
consider before completing the tasks with which they are associated.
Unless otherwise noted, information in the following screen shots is for example only. In
some cases, partial screen shots may be used, which represent part of a larger interface
element, rather than the entire interface. Partial screen shots are represented by jagged,
tear off edges.

How to Get Help and Submit Suggestions

In addition to the Advanced and Student guides, you can find concept and task information
online in the Virtual Campus online help system, Virtual Campus Quick Tutorial, LearnLinc
palette online help system, and help systems for the classroom tools.
If this guide and the other resources provided in your LearnLinc package do not provide the
information you need please contact your LearnLinc administrator for further assistance. He or
she may be able to resolve your issue.
If you are the LearnLinc administrator and you cannot resolve the issue, you can consult the
LearnLinc support web site or contact LearnLinc Customer Service. Access to the support web
site and to Customer Service are provided on a contract basisyour organization must have a
current support agreement and an assigned contact who is authorized to access the support
web site and work with LearnLinc Customer Service.
If you would like to submit a suggestion for future releases of LearnLinc or report a bug in the
software, please complete the Wish List or Bug Report forms on the Customer Service
Support Site at [Link]

Registration and Update Information

Your LearnLinc package has a unique serial number that can be found on the LearnLinc Server
CD jewel case, and on the inside cover of this guide. You will need this serial number to obtain
your LearnLinc server licensesplease record the number in a secure location.

The LearnLinc documentation set and help systems are updated with each release of the
LearnLinc product. If you have a current support agreement, you will receive the updated
product documentation with your upgrade package. For most upgrades, new hard cover
manuals are distributed, however LearnLinc Corporation reserves the right to distribute online
documentation update packages as well.

1 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Getting Started 2

2
Getting Started
This chapter explains the LearnLinc environment and provides an overview of the LearnLinc
system requirements, software architecture, and the tasks for creating and using the LearnLinc
environment.

What is LearnLinc?
LearnLinc is an online learning environment that your organization can use to train students
who are in your offices and at a distance, including those at other offices or locations, those
who telecommute from home or while traveling, and those who contract with your
organization to receive training.
LearnLinc is a complete learning environment that supports both self-paced and live, interactive
learning. In addition, the LearnLinc environment supports content creation or conversion, and
system management. LearnLinc has several components, including the Virtual Campus web site,
the Virtual Classroom software, and several administrative tools.
Detailed descriptions of all these components, and the tasks associated with them, follow.

About the Software

The LearnLinc software can be divided into two main pieces: the server and the client, each of
which is made up of several individual elements.

A client/server architecture is

Client/Server Architecture
LearnLinc relies on a client/server architecture to enable students and an instructor to meet and
collaborate in the Virtual Classroom. When users join a class, they are connecting to the
LearnLinc server. Based on information from the Virtual Campus, the server determines which

one in which computers connect to each other through a

central server computer,
rather than connecting directly
to one another.

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

class the user wants to join and connects the users client software to a communication channel
for that class. All the class information is sent to the students and instructor on that channel.
You can think of a communication channel in terms of a TV channel. Just as everyone who
tunes their TV to a certain channel sees the same TV program at the same time, everyone who
joins the same class receives the same data at the same time. In the same way that your TV has
multiple channels LearnLinc has multiple channels, so that multiple classes can take place at
one time without interfering with one another.
To join a LearnLinc class, each user must have the LearnLinc classroom software (the client)
installed on his or her computer, and must be able to connect to the LearnLinc server. The
components of both the server and the client are described in detail in the following sections.

Server Components
The LearnLinc server provides several functions for LearnLinc users, including storing LearnLinc
information, making LearnLinc information available to users, and connecting LearnLinc users
in virtual classrooms.
To accomplish these functions, the LearnLinc server relies on the:
Name Service
Classroom Service
File Service
Name Service
The Name Service is a database that stores all LearnLinc information, including LearnLinc user,
course, class, and resource information. In addition, the Name Service also stores system
information that is not visible to most LearnLinc users. The Name Service is a Microsoft Access
database. If your organization uses SQL Server, contact LearnLinc Customer Service to learn
about your options for using LearnLinc with SQL Server instead.
LearnLinc students and instructors access Name Service information when they view
information in the LearnLinc Virtual Campus web site, and in the LearnLinc Virtual
Classroom.
LearnLinc authors manage the Name Service by adding, editing, and deleting resources and
courses in the Virtual Campus.
LearnLinc administrators manage the Name Service by performing editing tasks in the
Virtual Campus, and by using the LearnLinc Administration tool.
8

Getting Started 2

Classroom Service
The Classroom Service connects two or more LearnLinc users in a Virtual Classroom by sharing
and synchronizing information among them in real time. This information includes hand
raising, application and content use, and audio or video conferencing information.
The Virtual Classroom is displayed to users in the form of the LearnLinc palette, which displays
all classroom information, and provides users with access to interactive classroom tools.
File Service
The File Service enables LearnLinc users to display their pictures in the LearnLinc palette. If the
users picture has been uploaded to the LearnLinc server, it will be displayed when he or she
takes the floor during a LearnLinc class.
Interface Components
LearnLinc has several interface components that users work with to view or edit information,
participate in LearnLinc classes, and manage the LearnLinc environment. These interfaces are:
Virtual Campus Web Site
LearnLinc Palette
Whiteboard
Q&A
AppShare and AppView
Glimpse
Classroom Recorder and Player
Administration Tool
Server Information Page
Troubleshooting Page
Server Configuration Control Panel

When a user takes the floor

in a LearnLinc class, he or she
is the floor holder. The floor
holder is the student,
instructor, or assistant who is
currently on air during a
LearnLinc class. The floor
holder can be heard and/or
seen if conferencing is in use,
and can launch and
synchronize applications for

Virtual Campus Web Site

The LearnLinc Virtual Campus is a web site that your organization hosts on its own server.
The Virtual Campus provides students and instructors with easy access to LearnLinc courses,
classes, resources, and contact information for other users. In addition, the Virtual Campus
provides users with links to their classes, so that they can enter a virtual classroom. In addition,

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

LearnLinc instructors, authors, and administrators can use the Virtual Campus to manage
LearnLinc information by editing courses, classes, resources, and users.

LearnLinc Palette
The LearnLinc palette is the main interface element in a LearnLinc class. The palette displays
the most commonly used tools, including conferencing (audio or video), the class list, the
agenda, feedback, and text chat.
These tools enable students and instructors to interact with one another in real time. For
example, when a student raises his or her hand, the instructor sees a hand raise notification
immediately. Similarly, when anyone in the class sends out a text chat message, the rest of the

10

Getting Started 2

class sees the message right away, and can respond to it. The instructors palette is slightly
different from the student palette. Diagrams of each palette follow.

Instructors Palette

11

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Students Palette

Generally, the differences between the student and instructor palettes concern the amount of
information displayed to the user. Instructors see some additional information that students
either cannot see, or can only see if the instructor chooses to show it to them.

12

Getting Started 2

Whiteboard
Whiteboard is a collaboration tool that students and the instructor can use to share simple
drawings, text, imported pictures, and screen captures. For more information about
whiteboard, please see Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard on page 393.
Q&A
Q&A is a multiple choice question and answer tool. The instructor, or the current floor holder,
can use Q&A to ask a series of multiple choice questions and see the class response instantly.
For more information about Q&A, please see Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice
Questions on page 445.
AppShare and AppView
AppShare and Appview enable the instructor to show an application on his or her computer to
the rest of the class. For both tools, the students in the class do not have to have the shared
application installed on their computers.
AppShare enables instructors to share their actions on one or several applications with the
class, allow a selected student to use the shared applications, and allow students to share their
applications with the class.
AppView enables instructors to use an application on his or her computer, and show his or her
actions to the class. Students do not have to have the application installed on their computers.
Students cannot use the instructors application, nor can they share their own applications with
AppView. For more information on either AppShare or AppView, please see Sharing
Applications With the Class on page 413.
Glimpse
Instructors can use Glimpse to take a screen capture of any students desktop during class.
Glimpse is only available to instructors, and students are not aware that their desktops have
been glimpsed. For more information on Glimpse, please see Viewing a Student Desktop With
Glimpse on page 461.
Classroom Recorder and Player
The LearnLinc Classroom Recorder is an application that records a class on a student computer.
The Classroom Recorder captures all classroom activity, including audio, video, text chat, and
any actions on the classroom workspace. The recorder also uploads the recorded file and adds

13

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

it to your course resource list. Students who miss class can play the recorded class from the
contents list or you can run the recording during class to recap a lesson.
The LearnLinc Classroom Player is an application you or your students launch to play the
recorded class files. The player lets you choose whether you want to stream the recorded file
from the server to your computer, or download the file so that you can play it later. Streaming
is useful when you want to play the recorded class during an active class. Downloading is
useful when students want to play a file on their own at a later time.
For more information on the Classroom Recorder and the Classroom Player, please see
Recording Classes on page 341.

Administration Tool
In addition to the Virtual Campus, administrators have several other tools to manage and
troubleshoot LearnLinc. The Administration tool can be used to manage all LearnLinc system
information, and can only be used by administrators.
The Administration tool displays information about all LearnLinc courses, classes, resources,
users, and authority levels, and enables an administrator to add, edit, or delete any of these
items. Note that most administrative tasks can also be performed in the Virtual Campus.
The Administration tool is installed with the LearnLinc server. It can be installed on other
computers from either the LearnLinc Server CD, or the Virtual Campus download page. You
must be logged-in as an administrator to download the Administration tool from the Virtual
Campus. For more information on using the Administration tool, please see Installing
LearnLinc on page 43 and Managing Users on page 125.
Server Information Page
The Server Information page provides you with information about the status of the LearnLinc
server, any active classrooms, and your installed LearnLinc licences.
The Server Information page can be accessed from your web browser at [Link]
[Link]/ServerInfo, where servername is the name of your LearnLinc server.
Do not enter .htm at the end of the URL for the ServerInfo page.

14

Getting Started 2

Troubleshooting Page
The troubleshooting page provides you with configuration information for the server, and tests
your connection to the LearnLinc server.
You can use the troubleshooting page to gather information about any client computers
connection to the LearnLinc server by asking the user at the computer to go the
troubleshooting page and send you the information it displays. The URL for the
troubleshooting page is tap//ServerInfo/virtualdirectory/[Link], where ServerInfo
is the name of your LearnLinc server and virtualdirectory is the name of the folder in which the
Virtual Campus is stored. For example, tap//[Link]/learnlinc/
[Link].
Server Configuration Control Panel
The server configuration control panel enables you to configure server information, including:
setting a UDP audio port for audio conferences (optional)
specifying a server log file and viewing the current log
changing the LearnLinc server address
changing the Virtual Campus location.
For more information on the Server configuration control panel, please see Installing
LearnLinc on page 43.

15

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

System Requirements
The following requirements are divided into several categories. For the LearnLinc server, system
requirements are based on the number of concurrent users who will be using the server. For
bandwidth, system requirements are based on the conferencing option in use, multiplied by the
number of users in the class. For the LearnLinc client (the LearnLinc classroom software),
system requirements are based on the conferencing option in use.

LearnLinc Server
Windows NT (for up to 25 concurrent users)
Intel Pentium 200 or faster CPU
64 MB RAM
Windows NT Server 4.0 with Service Pack 3
150 MB hard disk space
Network interface card (supporting TCP/IP)
MS IIS version 4.0
MS PowerPoint 97 or higher *
Windows NT (for 25-150 concurrent users)
Intel Pentium II 300 MHz or faster
128 MB RAM
Windows NT Server 4.0 with Service Pack 3
150 MB hard disk space
MS IIS version 4.0
MS PowerPoint 97 or higher *
High performance network interface card such as a PCI Fast Ethernet card
* Required to enable uploading of PowerPoint files to the LearnLinc Server. PowerPoint 2000 is
recommended.

16

Getting Started 2

Windows 2000 (for up to 25 concurrent users)

Pentium II 300 processor or faster
128 MB RAM
Windows 2000 Server
150 MB hard disk space
Network interface card (supporting TCP/IP)
MS IIS version 5.0
MS PowerPoint 97 or higher *
Windows 2000 (for 25 - 150 concurrent users)
Pentium II 400
256 MB RAM
Windows 2000 Server
150 MB hard disk space
Network interface card (supporting TCP/IP)
MS IIS version 5.0
MS PowerPoint 97 or higher *
* Required to enable uploading of PowerPoint files to the LearnLinc Server. PowerPoint 2000 is
recommended.

17

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Bandwidth
The following table illustrates the average amount of bandwidth required on a network per
concurrent client for each LearnLinc conferencing option. Your network should be designed to
accommodate peak bandwith conditions.
Conferencing Options

Average network bandwidth

Data only

20 Kbps per student

Unicast audio conferencing and data

28 Kbps per student (16 data + 12 audio)

Multicast audio conferencing and data

12 Kbps per class for audio plus 16 Kbps per student for
data

Indeo Multicast video conferencing and data

340 Kbps per class for video plus 16 Kbps per student
for data

H.323 Multicast Video

172 Kbps per class for Video plus 16 Kbps per student
for data

Unicast streaming video and data

37 kbps per student (22 data + 15 streaming video)

Multicast streaming video and data

15 per class for streaming video and 22 Kbps per

student for data

Note that the numbers in the previous table are averages only. At times LearnLinc uses much less
bandwidth, and at other times it will attempt to use more.

18

Getting Started 2

ClientLearnLinc Classroom Software

Locate the requirements for the conferencing option your organization is using. Note that the
requirements listed on the following pages are minimum requirements. Computers with faster
CPUs and more RAM will provide better performance in LearnLinc classes. If you may be using
more than one conferencing option, make sure your system meets the higher requirements
Data Only
Windows 95 or 98
Intel Pentium 75
24 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with 20
kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

Windows 2000
Intel Pentium 200
64 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with 20
kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

Windows NT 4.0
workstation with sp 3
Intel Pentium 133
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with 20
kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

19

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Unicast Audio Conferencing

Windows 95 or 98
Intel Pentium 133 *
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with at
least 28.8 kbps
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
16 bit Sound Blastercompatible sound card with
support for DirectX6; full
duplex recommended
Microphone and headphones
Monitor supporting 800x600,
16 bit color or higher

Windows 2000
Intel Pentium II 300
96 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with at
least 28.8 kbps
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Microphone and headphones
Monitor supporting 800x600,
16 bit color or higher

Windows NT 4.0
workstation with sp 3
Intel Pentium 166*
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with at
least 28.8kbps
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Microphone and headphones
Monitor supporting 800x600,
16 bit color or higher

* In unicast audio conferencing classes that use the Low bandwidth setting, users must have Intel
Pentium II 233 processors or higher to achieve lower bandwidths while retaining audio quality.

20

Getting Started 2

Multicast Audio Conferencing (for intranet or LAN only)

Windows 95 or 98
Intel Pentium 133
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP multicast connection
with 30 kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Microphone and
headphones
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

Windows 2000
Intel Pentium 300
96 MB RAM
TCP/IP multicast connection
with 30 kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Microphone and
headphones
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

Windows NT 4.0
workstation with sp 3
Intel Pentium 166
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP multicast connection
with 30 kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Microphone and
headphones
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

21

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Multicast Video Conferencing (Using ProShare 150 or ProShare 200)

Windows 95 or 98
Intel Pentium 90
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP multicast connection
with 512 kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Intel Proshare 150 or 200
Microphone and
headphones
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

22

Windows 2000

Windows NT 4.0
workstation with sp 3

Not Available

Not Available

Getting Started 2

Multicast Video Conferencing (Using Intel ProShare Video 500*)

Windows 95 or 98
Intel Pentium II 266 with
MMX
32 MB RAM
TCP/ IP multicast connection
with 240 kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Intel ProShare 500
Microphone and
headphones
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

Windows 2000

Windows NT 4.0
workstation with sp 3

Not Available

Not Available

* Note that all participants in the class must have ProShare 500 to achieve lower bandwith.

23

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Streaming Video (multicast or unicast)*

Windows 95 or 98
Intel Pentium 166
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with 35
kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

Windows 2000
Intel Pentium II 300
96 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with 35
kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

Windows NT 4.0
workstation with sp 3
Intel Pentium 166
32 MB RAM
TCP/IP connection with 35
kbps or more
Supported browser (see
Third-Party Software on
page 25)
Sound card with support for
DirectX6; full duplex
recommended
Monitor supporting
800x600, 16 bit color or
higher

* Can be used with data only, unicast, or multicast audio conferencing, or multicast video
conferencing
Instructor must have second computer to capture video and run streaming video encoder.
Consult your streaming video server documentation for specific requirements.

24

Getting Started 2

Third Party Software

The LearnLinc classroom software also uses several third-party software programs to enable
synchronized multimedia content in the Virtual Classroom. The table below outlines the
software programs, their uses, and whether they are included in the LearnLinc installation.
LearnLinc includes all the software necessary to begin classes right away.
This list includes additional software you may want to use.

Third-party software

For use with

Installed?

Microsoft NetShow Server 3.0

Streaming Video capture

No

Real Video Server 4.0

Streaming Video capture

No

Windows Media Player 6.0 and 6.4

Streaming Video capture

No

Asymetrix ToolBook 7.1 run-time

Synchronized ToolBook content

playback

Yes, in Advanced
installation option

Asymetrix ToolBook 6.0, 6.1, 6.5, 7.0

(full version or run-time)

Synchronized ToolBook content

playback

No

Asymetrix ToolBook 6.0, 6.1, 6.5, 7.0

(full version)

Synchronized ToolBook content

development

No

Macromedia Authorware 3.5, 4.0, 5.0

Synchronized Authorware content

development

No

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 and

5.01

Synchronized web browser

No. Included on CDs

for separate installation

Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01w/sp1 Synchronized web browser

or sp2

No

Netscape Navigator 4.05, 4.08

Synchronized web browser

No

Netscape Communicator 4.7x

Synchronized web browser

No

Macromedia Director 7.0

Synchronized Director content

development

No

25

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Overview: Creating a LearnLinc Environment

This overview provides a brief look at the process for creating your own LearnLinc
environment. It is not a comprehensive guidethat can be found later in this manual. Use the
overview to get a general idea of what is involved in planning and implementing a LearnLinc
environment.

Assemble your Team

Before you begin, decide who you will need help from to make your LearnLinc installation
successful. Smaller organizations can use LearnLinc right out of the box. For larger
organizations, we recommend that you assemble a team that fills all the following roles. In
some cases, one person may play more than one role, or one role may be divided among
several team members.
Project Manager
IS Support Person
LearnLinc administrator
Content author
Instructor
Project Manager
The project manager is the coordinator for your LearnLinc rollout. He or she will not only
coordinate with the people on your LearnLinc team, but with others in the company as
necessary. The Project Manger is responsible for acquiring all necessary hardware and software,
ensuring that proper support is available from your organizations network manager and IS
staff, and reporting to others in management who are concerned with the LearnLinc rollout.
In addition, the Project Manager may be responsible for managing the budget and schedule of
the LearnLinc rollout and pilot program. Many organizations choose to begin using LearnLinc
as a pilotto introduce the system to others in the organization, to provide a staged, more
comfortable, transition for the training department, and to ensure that they are ready to roll out
LearnLinc to the entire organization.
IS Support Person
If you are rolling out LearnLinc on an existing corporate network, which almost all LearnLinc
teams are, you will need support from your IS department. An IS support person can help you
to assess your hardware needs and procure the necessary equipment, install and maintain that
26

Getting Started 2

equipment, determine your network bandwidth needs and ensure that your network can
support them, and troubleshoot installations. While you may not need full time support from
your IS department throughout the roll out, we recommend that you have one individual
assigned to the project, who can be available as needed.

LearnLinc Administrator
The LearnLinc administrator is responsible for creating and maintaining all LearnLinc
information, including users, test courses and classes, and resources. Your LearnLinc
administrator should be adept at learning new software and capable of managing a large
amount of information, but he or she does not have to be a training specialist. If, however, the
LearnLinc administrator will be responsible for teaching others how to manage LearnLinc
information, make sure that he or she is able and willing to transfer his or her knowledge to
others later.
Content Author
The content author is responsible not only for developing content to use in your LearnLinc
classes, but for determining which types of content best suit your organizations training needs
as well. The content author should be familiar with one or more of the following authoring
tools:
PowerPoint
HTML
Macromedia Authorware
Macromedia Director
Asymetrix ToolBook
In addition, the content author should be very familiar with the type of training you are
planning to do with LearnLinc. Once you have installed LearnLinc, the content author should
spend time evaluating each of the LearnLinc classroom tools, determining which are best suited
to your training needs, and developing content for your pilot classes. The content author will
likely work closely with the instructor in determining which tools and content types will work
best in class.
Instructor
The LearnLinc instructor should be someone who is currently a trainer at your organization. If
you choose to use a course that is currently being taught in traditional classes, the instructor for
27

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

that course might be an ideal candidate for your team. The instructor should be comfortable
using a computer and learning new softwarethough he or she does not have to be an
advanced computer user. Once you have installed LearnLinc, the instructor should spend time
in a LearnLinc class, evaluating the tools, determining which he or she would be comfortable
using in class, and working with the content author to convert any existing content to an online
format that the instructor is comfortable using.

Plan your Environment

Before you install LearnLinc, make sure that your environment is ready. The following list
covers the main areas of concern:
Network
Using the bandwidth guidelines in the System Requirements (outlined earlier in this chapter),
work with your IS support person to ensure that your network can support LearnLinc.
Specifically, you need to make sure that your student and instructor computers can connect to
the LearnLinc server, and that there will be enough bandwidth available for them to send and
receive data from the LearnLinc server. In addition, determine if your organization uses a
farewell, and decide if you want to use HTTP tunneling, or open a port on your farewell. For
more information about farewell ports and HTTP tunneling, please see takes the floor, Getting
Ready for LearnLinc.
Hardware and Software
Using the server and client guidelines in the System Requirements (outlined earlier in this
chapter), work with your IS support person to ensure that you have all the necessary hardware
and software in place for LearnLinc.
Schedule
Develop a schedule for your roll out. Include time to order and install any necessary hardware
or software, and time for testing and experimenting with the system. Share your schedule with
other departments who will be impacted by it (for example IS) so that you can count on them
for resources when you need them. Of course, share the schedule with your LearnLinc team as
well.
Include time and tasks for internal marketing on the schedule as wellto ensure that others are
aware of your program and will be available to participate in your pilot classes.

28

Getting Started 2

Choose a Pilot Class

Work with your content author and instructor to evaluate your current courses even before you
install LearnLinc, to determine which ones are good candidates for conversion to online
courses. Some criteria to consider include: length and format of class, ease of conversion for
hard copy materials, and the amount of hands-on activities in class.
Online classes differ from traditional classes in several ways, one of which is the amount of
time you can expect to hold students attention during class. Generally speaking, online classes
should be shorter than traditional classes, and have more breaks to allow students to stretch,
rest their eyes, and then refocus on the content. In addition, classes that require frequent
interaction from students are more likely to hold students attention. As a very general
guideline, look for a class that can be taught in sessions that are about 45 to 60 minutes long,
with student interactions every 10 minutes. Adjust these times to suit your training needs.
Consider the ease with which existing content can be converted as well. If your content author
has significant experience with a CBT tool such as Authoring, or HTML tagging, you may be
able to convert very complex content for your class. If, however, your content author will be
learning to use new content tools as well as LearnLinc, look for content that can be easily
converted. For example, Proponent presentations can be converted to HTML or Talbot using
one of the LearnLinc content conversion tools.
Consider the amount of hands-on activity in a class as well. Classes that require students to
build or take apart machinery, for example, might require you to develop complex simulations
or shoot video footage of those actions. While effective, these types of content may be time
consuming or expensive to develop. Consider your schedule and resources before choosing a
hands-on class for your pilot.
Install the Server Software and your License Keys
Follow the instructions outlined in the LearnLinc Installation Guide to install the server. Be sure
to fill out the LearnLinc Server Key tax back form to receive your license keys. Once your
LearnLinc server software is installed and your keys are enabled, you should be able to log-in
to the LearnLinc Virtual Campus from any computer, using the default LearnLinc administrator
account. See the LearnLinc Installation Guide or takes the floor, Installing LearnLinc#, for the
default administrator account information and password.
The Virtual Campus contains several sample users, a sample course, and several sample classes.
You can use these samples to explore the Virtual Campus interface, and to test the Virtual
Campus and the Virtual Classroom.
29

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Install the Classroom Software

Install the classroom, or client, software on two computers. Use these computers to connect
two of your team members in a LearnLinc classroom so that they can test your LearnLinc
environment. Install LearnLinc on additional computers to enable your content author and
instructor to explore the Virtual Classroom tools.
Test the Environment
Follow the test plan described in takes the floor of this guide to test your limited installation.
Test your LearnLinc server-client connection on a small number of computers to work out any
hardware or software issues before you attempt a pilot or roulette.
Add Users
Once you have tested your limited installation successfully, create instructor, author, and
administrator accounts as needed for your team. If you are creating accounts for your pilot
students, create those as well and record the account information so that you can distribute it to
your pilot students later.
Create Content
Even as you are testing your limited installation, your content author can evaluate and start
developing the content for your pilot class. Refer to Chapter 8 in this guide, and the LearnLinc
Authoring Kit for more information concerning authoring content for LearnLinc classes.
Schedule Courses and Classes
Once your testing is complete, your LearnLinc administrator can create your pilot course and
classes in the LearnLinc Virtual Campus. By logging-in as an administrator, he or she can add a
new course to the course catalog, and create classes in that course. Be sure to schedule your
LearnLinc team instructor to teach the pilot classes, and assign another member of the team to
act as an assistant instructor for the class. The assistant instructor can help students who are
having problems, and help the instructor to manage the class.
Add Content to your Courses and Classes
Once the content author has completed the content conversion, or created new content, he or
she can add the content as resources to the course contents list and class agenda as necessary.
To do so, he or she can log-in to the Virtual Campus using an account that has author
permissions.
30

Getting Started 2

Rehearse the Class

Once all the elements are in place, ask your instructor to rehearse the class several times, until
he or she is comfortable teaching in the LearnLinc environment. Make sure that other members
of the LearnLinc team practice as wellas assistants and as instructor, in case your instructor is
unavailable.
Make the LearnLinc Virtual Campus Available to Students
Once the course, classes, and content are available in the Virtual Classroom, and your team
believes that they are ready to teach the class, make the Virtual Campus available to your
students. To do so, publicize the address of the Virtual Campus, and provide instructions to
your pilot students for accessing the Virtual Campus, downloading and installing the classroom
software, and joining the class. Be sure to clearly state the date and time of the class.
Set time aside to test with your students once they have installed the classroom software. A
quick test with each student to ensure that they can join a class, and that their audio or video
conferences is working properly will ensure that your first class is successful.
We have included two documents on both the LearnLinc Server and Client Cads in the docs
folder, to assist you in publicizing your class. Installing the LearnLinc client from the web
([Link]) provides instructions for downloading and installing the classroom software. Your
first LearnLinc class ([Link]) provides students with instructions for joining their first class.
You can modify these documents for your organization and distribute them to your students to
ensure that they are ready for class.

31

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Overview: Using LearnLinc

This overview provides a brief look at the process for taking a LearnLinc class. Use this
overview to get a general idea of what is involved in using LearnLinc as a student.

Log-in to the Virtual Campus

Your LearnLinc experience always begins by logging-in to the LearnLinc Virtual Campus web
site. When you go to the site, you can log-in, create a new account, or just browse the course
catalog. Once you log-in, you can access courses, classes, resources, and the user information.
Access Online Help for the Virtual Campus
Before you begin using the Virtual Campus, take the Quick Tutorial by clicking the Quick
Tutorial link on the left side of the site.
While you are in the Virtual Campus, you can access online help at any time. To launch a
comprehensive set of help pages that describe concepts and tasks related to the Virtual
Campus, click Help on the top menu bar. When you are on your home page, the course
catalog page, or the directory page, youll also see links to related help topics.
Register for a Course
To use a courses resources or join its classes, you must register for it. You can register for any
course in the course catalog by clicking Register next to its name. You can drop a course from
your course list by clicking Unregister next to its name.
Your LearnLinc administrator or instructor may register you for additional courses. When you
log-in, you see a list of all the courses for which you are registered on your home page.
Join a Class
When you are ready to join a LearnLinc class, locate it in the Virtual Campus by finding its
course, and clicking the course name. The courses contents list displays, including any classes
that are part of that course. To join a class, click join next to its name. Your web browser
minimizes, and the LearnLinc palette displays, with tools that you can use to communicate with
the rest of the class.

32

Getting Started 2

Access Online Help for the Classroom

You can access online help for the classroom at any time by selecting Help > Help Topics, from
the LearnLinc palette menu bar. The online help contains concept and task information for
participating in LearnLinc classes.
Communicate with others in the Classroom
While you are in class, you can see the actions of the current floor holder and hear or see them
if conferences is in use. If the floor holder launches an application, or a multimedia book, it
opens on your computer as well. As the floor holder uses the application or book, you see his
or her actions on your copy as well. If the floor is passed to you, your On Air indicator
displays, and your actions are visible to the class. If you use a LearnLinc application or content,
your actions are shared with others. For example, if you navigate to a web site in the
synchronized web browser, the class follows you there. In addition, if your class uses
conferences, everyone can hear or see you. When you are done, you can pass the floor back to
your instructor so that he or she can continue with class.
Leave the Class
When class is over, you can leave by selecting File > Exit, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.
Once you have exited the class, the LearnLinc palette and most of the applications and content
that were opened during class will close. However, some applications, such as the whiteboard,
will remain open so that you can save your work, or continue working on the current
document.
Log-out of the Virtual Campus
When you have finished working in the Virtual Campus, you can log-out by selecting Logout
from the top menu bar in the Virtual Campus. If you have been inactive in the Virtual Campus
for more than 15 minutes, your account will be logged-out automatically to prevent others from
using your account.

33

2 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

34

Administrative Tasks
The Administrative tasks section of this guide contains concepts and tasks that are important
to LearnLinc administrators. If you are a LearnLinc administrator, or you perform any of the
following administrative tasks for LearnLinc, please read this section.
Chapter 3

Getting Ready for LearnLinc

page 37

Chapter 4

Installing LearnLinc

page 43

Chapter 5

Testing the LearnLinc Environment

page 73

Chapter 6

Customizing LearnLinc

page 97

Chapter 7

Managing Users

page 125

35

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

36

Getting Ready for LearnLinc 3

3
Getting Ready for LearnLinc
This chapter describes the information and equipment you need and the tasks you should
perform to prepare for LearnLinc.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Determine how many licences your organization has purchased for the LearnLinc classroom
Determine which conferencing options your organization has purchased
Advise others about bandwidth availability for LearnLinc
Determine which, if any, firewall ports you should open for LearnLinc
Ensure that all necessary server hardware and software is in place for LearnLinc
Ensure that all necessary client hardware and software is in place for LearnLinc
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is the procedure for deploying LearnLinc?
2. How are LearnLinc licenses used?
3. How do LearnLinc users connect to one another?
4. What conferencing options does LearnLinc have?
5. How much traffic does LearnLinc create on your organizations network?
6. How does LearnLinc work if I have more than one site?
7. Does learnlinc work through firewalls?

37

3 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following:
computer networking
bandwidth
firewalls and proxy servers
basic computer hardware and software
LearnLinc system requirements.
For a complete listing of the LearnLinc system requirements, please see System Requirements
on page 16 of this guide. For more information on the other topics in the previous list, consult
current networking literature and your product documentation.

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are prepared to implement LearnLinc in your
organization. Specifically, you need to know about:
Concurrent User License Model
Client/Server Architecture
LearnLinc Bandwidth Use
Firewall Considerations
In addition, review the following checklist to ensure your deployment efforts are complete.

A Checklist for Deploying LearnLinc

Use the following list as a general guide to your LearnLinc implementation.
Assemble a team to implement LearnLinc. We suggest a Project Manager, IS Support Person,
LearnLinc administrator, Content author, and Instructor.(Chapter 2, page 26)
Ensure that your server and client computers meet the LearnLinc system requirements.
(Chapter 2, page 16)
Choose a pilot class to convert from your existing training curriculum.(Chapter 2, page 30)
Complete and return your LearnLinc License Key fax-back form at least one business day
before you plan to install your LearnLinc server. The License Key fax back form can be
found in your LearnLinc product package.
Install the LearnLinc server and supporting software. (Chapter 4, page 43)
38

Getting Ready for LearnLinc 3

Enable your LearnLinc license keys. (Chapter 4, page 52)

Install the LearnLinc classroom software on at least two client computers. (Chapter 4,
page 68).
Test the LearnLinc Virtual Campus and LearnLinc Virtual Classroom. (Chapter 5, page 73)
Convert the content from that class to an online format. (Chapter 8, page 151)
Create a course, class, and resources in the Virtual Campus for your pilot course. (Courses
see Chapter 9, page 185) (Classes see Chapter 10, page 213) (Resources see Chapter 11,
page 37)
Make the Virtual Campus available to your pilot students and instructor by giving them the
its web address. (Chapter 2, page 31)
Distribute the documents Your first LearnLinc class ([Link]) and Installing the
LearnLinc classroom software ([Link]) to your pilot students. (Both documents can be
found on the LearnLinc Server and Client CDs) (Chapter 2, page 31)
Test with each pilot student to ensure their classroom software has been installed
successfully, and they can connect to the LearnLinc server.
Rehearse the pilot class with your team. Ensure that at least two members of the team can
conduct the class.
Conduct your first online class. (Chapter 15, page 37)

Concurrent User License Model

When your organization purchased LearnLinc, they purchased a certain number of concurrent
licences. The number of concurrent licenses is the total number of users who can be in
LearnLinc classes at one time. There are several different types of LearnLinc licences. Data
Only licences cover the basic virtual classroom. These licences allow you to join a class, use
the whiteboard and all other classroom tools except conferencing. Internet Audio, Multicast
Audio, Indeo Multicast Video, H.323 Multicast Video, and Streaming Video licences control how
you communicate with the classby enabling you to use either audio or video conferencing
during class. Your organization may have purchased licences for one or more types of
conferencing.
Conferencing licences are also concurrent, but are independent of data only licences. For
example, if you have 100 data only licences, and 50 Internet audio conferencing licences, you
can have 100 users attending classes at the same time, but only 50 of them can use Internet
audio conferencing. Generally, all the users in one class will use the same conferencing type.
In this example, you might have one class of 50 users that uses Internet audio conferencing.
39

3 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The remaining 50 might use another LearnLinc conferencing option, or a third party solution
such as phone bridging.
The person in your organization who purchases LearnLinc determines how many data and
conferencing licenses you have.
If you have not installed the LearnLinc server, check with that person, or find the invoice
that was shipped with your LearnLinc package.
If you have installed the LearnLinc server and license keys, you can check the number of
licences purchased, the number in use, and the number of classrooms in use by pointing
your web browser to [Link] (no quotes), where
servername is the name of your LearnLinc server.

Bandwidth is a measure of the

amount of data transmitted or
received per unit of time, usually measured in seconds.
Bandwidth is proportional to
the complexity of the data
that is being transmitted. For
example, it takes more bandwidth to download a photograph in one second than it
takes to download a page of
text in one second. Large
sound or video files require
even more bandwidth to
download.

40

Client/Server Architecture
LearnLinc uses a client/server architecture to connect users in virtual classrooms. In a client/
server architecture, many computers in different locations (clients) can share information
through a central computer (the server). The clients never send data directly to one another,
they always send it to the server, which then forwards it to its intended recipients.
For your LearnLinc environment to work, all of your client computers must be able to reach
your server computer. You can achieve this by connecting both the LearnLinc server and
LearnLinc client computers to your LAN or intranet. Alternately, you can connect the server and
clients to the Internet.
LearnLinc Bandwidth Use
When two or more users are in a LearnLinc class, they use a certain amount of bandwidth to
connect to the server, and send data back and forth across it. If they are on your intranet, they
are using some of the available bandwidth on your network. If they are on the Internet, they
are using some of the bandwidth on your organizations Internet connection, or the available
bandwidth through a modem connection.
You must ensure that however your users connect to your LearnLinc server, they have enough
bandwidth to participate in class. You can do so by working with your IS department to
determine how much bandwidth is available on your network for LearnLinc traffic, or if your
organizations Internet connection is large enough to accommodate an average number of
LearnLinc users in class, along with other Internet traffic. If your users are connecting to the

Getting Ready for LearnLinc 3

Internet via modem, you can ensure that they connect at an average speed as outlined in the
LearnLinc system requirements.
If you have a set amount of bandwidth available on your network for LearnLinc classes, let
everyone who will have the ability to schedule classes know about that limit. Determine how
many users you can have in classes in a given time period, based on available bandwidth and
licences, and make everyone aware of the maximum number of users to avoid scheduling
classes when there will not be enough bandwidth, or enough licences, available to ensure
reliable class participation for everyone.
For detailed information on bandwidth use during class, please see Bandwidth on page 217.

Firewall Considerations
LearnLinc 4.5 does not require any changes to your firewall settings. However, if you are using
Internet audio, you may wish to open one UDP port on your firewall to improve LearnLincs
bandwidth usage, depending on the type of proxy server than you are using.
If you are not using a proxy server, or you have a winsock proxy you do not need to open
any firewall ports to achieve optimal bandwidth usage. You can expect to use
approximately 8.5 kbps per client for audio data.
If you are using a proxy server that supports keep alive, you do not need to open any
firewall ports to achieve acceptable bandwidth usage. You can expect to use approximately
11.8 kbps per client for audio data. To determine whether or not your proxy server
supports keep alive visit your LearnLinc Server troubleshooting page at [Link]
virtualdirectory/[Link], where servername is the name of your LearnLinc
server and virtualdirectory is the name of the virtual directory in which your Virtual
Campus is stored.
If you are using a proxy server that does not have a winsock proxy or keep alive, you will
use bandwidth much more efficiently if you open one outbound UDP port on your firewall.
If you do not open the port, you can expect to use approximately 19 kbps per client for
audio data. If you open the UDP port, you can expect to use 12 kbps per client for audio
data.
If you decide to open a UDP port on your firewall for audio data, we recommend opening port
11730. This is the default port that all clients are configured to use for UDP traffic. If you
choose to use another port, you must instruct all your users to configure their classroom
software to use that port. For detailed directions on configuring the classroom software, please
see Configuring the Classroom Software to Work with Web Proxies and Firewalls on page 70.

Keep alive enables a client

computer to maintain a TCP
connection to the server computer for an entire class, rather
than having to re-establish a
TCP connection every time it
sends data. Using keep alive is
more bandwidth efficient, but
is not available on all proxy
servers. Consult your proxy
server documentation for
more information.

41

3 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Ensure That all Necessary Hardware and Software Is in Place for LearnLinc
In some organizations, hardware and software purchase requisitions and orders may take
several weeks. Review the LearnLinc system requirements as soon as possible to ensure that
you have, or can acquire, all the necessary hardware and software for the LearnLinc server and
all the client computers on schedule.

Next Steps
Once youve gathered all the necessary people, equipment, and information you are ready to
proceed with a test installation. To install the LearnLinc server and client software, and test your
installation, please see:
Chapter 4, Installing LearnLinc
Chapter 5, Testing the LearnLinc Environment

42

Installing LearnLinc 4

4
Installing LearnLinc
This chapter explains the issues, decisions, and tasks involved in installing LearnLinc in your
organization.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Install the LearnLinc server software
Configure the LearnLinc server
Enable your server licenses
Install the administration tool on a remote computer
Export and import LearnLinc Name Service information
Install the classroom software on a users computer
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What components are installed with the LearnLinc server?
2. What tools are available for administering the LearnLinc server?
3. What components are installed with the LearnLinc client?
4. What are the benefits of doing a small test installation?
5. How can I support students who install the client themselves?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
LearnLinc software. For more information, please see About the Software on page 7 of this
guide.

43

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review these concepts to ensure that you are installing the LearnLinc environment properly.
Specifically, you need to know:
Other Software that Must Be Installed on the LearnLinc Server Computer
Components That Make Up the LearnLinc Server
Utilities for Administering the LearnLinc Server
Importing and Exporting Name Service Information
Multiple Servers
Components Installed With the LearnLinc Classroom Software
In addition, review the following checklist to ensure that your installation is successful.

LearnLinc Installation Checklist

To install LearnLinc successfully, complete the following tasks, in order:
Determine which conferencing option or options your organization has purchased. The
person who purchased LearnLinc for your organization should have this information, or
access to the purchase order or invoice for your LearnLinc purchase.
Ensure that your system meets all the LearnLinc hardware, software, and bandwidth
requirements for that conferencing option. See System Requirements on page 16, for
more information.
Fax the License Key Fax-Back Form to LearnLinc Corporation to receive your LearnLinc
licenses.
It is very important that you fax back the License Key Fax-Back Form.
If you do not, you will not be able to install the software. The form is
included in your LearnLinc package.

44

Install any necessary third party software on the LearnLinc server computer.
Install the LearnLinc server software.
Configure the LearnLinc server.
Enable your LearnLinc server license keys.
Install the Administration tool on the administrators computer, if desired.
Determine which version of the LearnLinc classroom software to distribute to your users,
and modify the Virtual Campus download page accordingly.

Installing LearnLinc 4

Provide your users with instructions for entering the Virtual Campus, downloading the
client software, and joining a class.

Other Software that Must Be Installed on the LearnLinc Server Computer

Before you install the LearnLinc server, you must make sure the server computer has the
following software installed on it:
Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 3 and Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack (includes Internet
Information Server 4.0)
Or
Microsoft 2000 Server
Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 (or PowerPoint 97-version 8.0.0.5507 or higher).
Important! Be sure to enable web page authoring at the server level. Refer to your
Microsoft documentation for more information.
If you plan to use the PowerPoint upload feature, we recommend
that you install PowerPoint 2000. PowerPoint 2000 produces higher
quality graphics during the upload process then previous versions of
PowerPoint.
Components That Make Up the LearnLinc Server
The LearnLinc server consists of several components, including the Name Service, Classroom
Service, File Service, and the Virtual Campus web site. The Name Service database stores all
LearnLinc information. The Classroom Service connects users in the Virtual Classroom. The File
Service stores user pictures, and displays them during LearnLinc classes. The Virtual Campus
web site provides users with access to LearnLinc information and LearnLinc classes.
Utilities for Administering the LearnLinc Server
In addition to the server components outlined in the previous section, there are several
LearnLinc administration utilities that are installed with the LearnLinc server.
Administration Tool
The Administration tool can be used to manage the LearnLinc Name Service database. While
almost all administration tasks can be performed in the Virtual Campus, the Administration tool
is available for your use as well. Use the Administration tool to create large numbers of new
45

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

users, and edit the advanced properties for LearnLinc courses, resources, users, and system
information. You must be an administrator to use the Administration tool.

Server Configuration Control Panel

The Server configuration control panel enables you to manage general server information, as
well as configuration information for the Virtual Campus. During the LearnLinc server
installation, you set most of the server configuration options. You can change those options or
set additional options at any time using the control panel.
Server Information Page
The Server information page provides you with information about the status of the LearnLinc
server, the active classrooms, and the installed LearnLinc licences. The Server Information page
can be accessed from any web browser at [Link] where
servername is the name of your LearnLinc server. If your Virtual Campus is stored in a virtual
directory, such as LearnLinc, do not include the name of the directory in the ServerInfo URL.
By default, the Server information page is not password protected. If you choose to password
protect this page, only users who have valid Windows NT accounts on the servers domain can
access the Server information page. When they navigate to the page, they will be prompted to
enter their NT user name and passwords. All other users will receive an error when they
attempt to navigate to the page.
Troubleshooting Page
The troubleshooting page provides you with configuration information for the server, and tests
both the server and client connections to the server. The troubleshooting page can be accessed
from any web browser at [Link] where
servername is the name of your LearnLinc server and virtualdirectory is the name of the virtual
directory in which your Virtual Campus is stored.
Specifically, the troubleshooting page lists information about the LearnLinc Server, the Virtual
Campus web server, ODBC info, and links to server classroom and licensing information. In
addition, by navigating to the troubleshooting page, you can see test information for the
LearnLinc database, the PowerPoint upload utility, and the client connection to the server.
Finally, you can view the results of the client test for audio connectivity, proxy settings, and
client install path and version information.

46

Installing LearnLinc 4

Importing and Exporting Name Service Information

If you wish to back up your Name Service database, or transfer data between two or more
LearnLinc Name Services, you can use the Administration tools import and export functions to
do so. The import and export functions enable to you to export a single capsule of information,
all the capsules within a selected folder, or an entire Name Service.
When you export Name Service information it is stored in a LearnLinc Capsule File (.lcp). This
file stores information only it does not store associated resource files such as ToolBook books
or video clip files. In addition to the LearnLinc capsule file, a packing list file ([Link]) is
generated each time you export capsules from a name service. This file lists all the associated
resource files that you must gather if you wish to import the capsule file on another LearnLinc
server. When you send exported information to another LearnLinc administrator be sure to
include:
the LearnLinc capsule file
the packing list file
any associated resource files
In addition, note that some user information is not exported when you choose to export
persona capsules. Users registration information is not exported, to ensure that errors are not
created when a users persona capsule is imported to another Name Service that does not have
the same classes stored on it. You must re-create user registrations on the server once you
import the users.
Server Activity Logs
By logging your server activity, you can:
track the server activity to aid in troubleshooting
track class duration and student attendance
Use the Server Configuration control panel to specify the location and file name of the server
log file. If you check Classroom log, additional log files will be created in the same folder as
the general log file to track the class duration and student attendance. The following sections
outline the information contained in each log file.

47

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Server Log File

The server log file tracks events on the LearnLinc server, and classroom start and end events.
The following diagrams outline the information provided in two common events, server start
up and class start up.
Server start up

Class start up

Classroom Log File

The classroom log file tracks server activity, classroom activity, and student activity. For the
server and classroom activities it logs the beginning time, end time, and duration. For student
activities, it logs the server on which each student joins and leaves a class, and the duration of
their time in class. The following diagram outlines the join class event.
User joins class

48

Installing LearnLinc 4

Multiple Servers
It is possible to maintain LearnLinc Name Service data on more than one server by exporting
and importing the data between servers on a regular basis.
Alternately, you may choose to store your Name Service data on a SQL Server, which supports
database replications across multiple servers. Refer to Appendix C for information on how to
configure SQL Server version 7.0 to work with LearnLinc.
Components Installed With the LearnLinc Classroom Software
There are three different download options for the LearnLinc classroom software.
The Typical option installs the LearnLinc core components, audio and video conferencing,
the Classroom Player, Microsoft Streaming Media Player, and OpSession for AppShare.
The AdvancedMultimedia Options Pack option installs all the typical options, plus support
for synchronized multimedia content and the Classroom Recorder.
The Custom option enables you to choose the components you wish to install.
If you install the software from the LearnLinc Client CD, you can still choose any of the options
described in the previous list.
You may choose to standardize on one installation option, and remove the other options from
the download page in the Virtual Campus. Alternately, you may choose to create a custom
installation that you distribute to your students on CD or via a network drive.

49

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for installing the LearnLinc
environment, specifically:
Getting the Server Computer Ready for the LearnLinc Server Software
Installing the Server Software
Enabling Your Server Licenses
Password Protecting the Server Information Page
Logging Server Activity
Changing the Location of Your Virtual Campus
Updating the Domain Name of Your LearnLinc Server
Installing the Administration Tool
Exporting Information from the LearnLinc Name Service Database
Importing Information from a LearnLinc Name Service Capsule File
Installing the Classroom Software on a Users Computer
Allowing Your Users Download and Install the Classroom Software
Configuring the Classroom Software to Work with Web Proxies and Firewalls

Getting the Server Computer Ready for the LearnLinc Server Software
Install the Windows NT Server and Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack, or Windows 2000 Server,
on the server computer. Refer to your Microsoft documentation for complete installation
directions.
Install PowerPoint 97 or Powerpoint 2000 from the Microsoft Office software suite on the
server computer. Important! Be sure to enable web page authoring at the server level.
Refer to the Microsoft Office documentation for complete installation directions. If you will
be using QuickLinc to upload PowerPoint files to the server, we recommend installing
PowerPoint 2000.

50

Installing LearnLinc 4

Installing the Server Software

1. Log-in to the Windows NT or Windows 2000 Server as an administrator.
2. Insert the LearnLinc Server CD in your servers CD drive.
The Server Installation Options screen displays.
3. Click Install LearnLinc Server.
A warning dialog displays, informing you that the your web server must be stopped to
continue with the installation.
4. Click Yes to stop the web server.
The Welcome screen displays.
5. Click Next.
The Software License Agreement screen displays.
6. Click Yes to accept the license agreement.
The User information screen displays.
7. Enter your name, company, and LearnLinc serial number.
You can find your LearnLinc serial number on the back of the LearnLinc Server jewel case,
and on the inside front cover of the LearnLinc Advanced Guide.
The Choose Destination Location screen displays.
8. Click Browse to select a different location, or click Next to continue.
The Enter Server Information screen displays.
9. Enter the address and port for the server you are working on.
The address is the sever name, for example, [Link], or the IP Address of
the server.
The port is the firewall port through which the server components will send and receive
LearnLinc data. By default the port is 80, which is the HTTP port (the web port).

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Windows NT
or 2000 Server as an
administrator.
2. Insert the LearnLinc Server
CD in the servers CD drive.
3. Click Install LearnLinc
Server.
4. Follow the on-screen
instructions

Most organizations have port 80 open already, to enable Internet or

intranet traffic. If you change the port to a different number, you will
have to open that port number on your firewall for LearnLinc to work
properly.
The Enter Virtual Directory screen displays.
10. If desired, enter a virtual directory name for the LearnLinc Virtual Campus and click Next.
The virtual directory is the directory in which all HTML and other related files for the
Virtual Campus are stored. Your users will enter this directory name after the address of the

51

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

LearnLinc server to access the Virtual Campus. For example, if your server is
[Link] and the Virtual Campus virtual directory is learnlinc, your users
would enter [Link] in their web browsers to access the
Virtual Campus.
Do not leave the virtual directory field blank unless you wish to install
the Virtual Campus to the root directory. Doing so redirects users who
navigate to the server to the LearnLinc Virtual Campus.
The Administrative Account screen displays. By default, a local administrative account is
displayed on screen.
11. Use the displayed account, or enter information for a different administrator account for
this server, and click Next.
You must enter the information for a local administrator account for the server. The
LearnLinc installer must have administrator permissions to add information to the servers
registry and add files to your server.
12. Review the information in the Start Copying Files screen, and click Next to begin the
installation.
13. When the Setup Complete screen displays, select Yes, I want to restart my computer
now. and click Finish to restart.
Quick Steps
1. Return the LearnLinc Server
Key Fax-Back Form.
2. Copy each Registry file (.reg)
to the server hard drive.
3. Double-click on each file to
update the registry.
4. Reboot the server.

52

Enabling Your Server Licenses

You may have one or several license keys to enable, depending on the conferencing options
you have purchased.
1. Return the LearnLinc Server Key Fax-Back Form to LearnLinc Customer Service to get your
license keys. You can expect a response within one business day.
If you opt to receive your license keys via e-mail, copy each Registry file (.reg) to a
temporary directory on the server hard drive. Double-click each file to update the
registry automatically.
If you opt to receive your license keys on diskette via postal mail, insert the diskette in
the servers floppy drive. Double-click each Registry file on the disk to automatically
update the registry.
2. Reboot the server to enable all licenses.

Installing LearnLinc 4

Checking Your Server Licenses

1. Launch a web browser on the server, or another computer.
2. Navigate to [Link] where servername is the name of your
LearnLinc server.
If you are using a virtual directory for the Virtual Campus, do not include
it in the servername portion of the URL. Also, do not append .htm
after ServerInfo.
The LearnLinc Server Information page displays.

3.

Quick Steps
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Navigate to http://
servername/ll/[Link]/
ServerInfo.
3. Scroll down to the entry
Classroom Service
Licences to see how many
of your licences are enabled,
and in use.

Scroll down to the entry Classroom Service Licences.

Your licences are listed by conferencing type. You can see the total for each type, the
number currently in use, and the expiration date for each license type.

53

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Run..., from
the Windows taskbar.
2. Type regedit and click
OK.
3. Select
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
> SOFTWARE > LearnLinc
> LearnLincServer > 4.0 >
Main.
4. Double-click on the entry
ProtectedServerInfo.
5. Change the 0 to 1 and
click OK.
6. Select File > Exit, to close
the registry.

54

Password Protecting the Server Information Page

1. Select Start > Run..., from the Windows taskbar.
The Run dialog displays.

2.

Type regedit in the Open field and click OK.

Double-click on the entry ProtectedServerInfo.
The Registry Editor displays.

3.

Select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SOFTWARE > LearnLinc > LearnLincServer > 4.0 > Main,
in the left pane of the window.
The keys and strings stored in the Main folder display in the right pane.

Installing LearnLinc 4

4.

Double-click on the entry ProtectedServerInfo.

The Edit DWORD Value dialog displays.

5.
6.

Change the 0 in the Value Data field to 1 and click OK.

Select Registry > Exit, from the menu bar to close the Registry Editor.
Only users who have valid Windows NT accounts on the servers domain can access the
Server information page. When they navigate to the page, they will be prompted to enter
their NT user name and passwords. All other users will receive an error when they attempt
to navigate to the page.

55

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc Server > Server
Configuration.
2. Enter the path and file name
for the log file.
3. Click OK to save your
changes.

Logging Server Activity

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc Server> Server Configuration, from the Windows
taskbar.
The Server configuration control panel displays, with the General tab selected. By
default, the log file is enabled.

2.

56

Click Browse to select a different log file, or enter a new path and file name in the
Logging file name field. If you enter a new file name, the file will be created the next
time the server is active.
Leave the Logging filename filed blank to turn off logging.
Check Enable ICS-compatible log to log classroom start and end times and students
time in class as well.
Click OK to save your changes.

Installing LearnLinc 4

Changing the Location of Your Virtual Campus

To change the location of your Virtual Campus, you must create a new virtual directory, and
then update the server configuration control panel.
Create a New Virtual Directory
1. Log-in to your LearnLinc server as an administrator.
2. Create a new folder on the server and copy the entire contents of the LLWEB folder (and
all sub folders) to the new folder.
3. Select Start > Programs > Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack > Microsoft Internet Information
Server > Internet Service Manager.
The Microsoft Management Console displays.
4. Double-click the Internet Information Server folder to display its contents.
5. Double-click your LearnLinc server name to display a list of the services it is running.
6. Double-click the Default Web Site item to display all the virtual directories located on that
server. The current virtual directory for the LearnLinc Virtual Campus displays, as well as
some other directories.
7. Right click on the Default Web Site folder, and select New > Virtual Directory, from the
shortcut menu.
The New Virtual Directory wizard displays.
Follow the on screen directions.
8. When prompted, fill in an Alias for the virtual directory and click Next.
An alias is a name, such as learnlinc (no quotes) for the virtual directory.
9. Click Browse and browse to the new folder you created in step 2.
10. Click Next.
11. Select Allow Read Access, Allow Script Access and Allow Execute Access. Do not
select the other items.
12. Click Finish to complete the creation of the virtual directory.

Quick Steps
1. Create a new virtual
directory.
2. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc Server > Server
Configuration.
3. Click the Virtual Campus
tab.
4. Enter the name of the new
virtual directory.
5. Click OK.

57

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Update the Virtual Campus Configuration

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc Server > Server Configuration.
The Server configuration control panel displays, with the General tab selected.

58

Installing LearnLinc 4

2.

Click the Virtual Campus tab.

The Virtual Campus configuration options display.

3.

In the Virtual Campus Location section, enter the name of the new virtual directory you
created earlier.
Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

4.

59

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Follow your servers
documentation for
directions on changing the
server domain name.
2. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc Server > Server
Configuration.
3. Click the Virtual Campus
tab.
4. Enter the new server
addresses in the LearnLinc
Server Addresses section.
5. Click OK.

60

Updating the Domain Name of Your LearnLinc Server

1. Consult your Microsoft Server documentation for directions on changing a servers name
and domain.
2. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc Server > Server Configuration.
The Server configuration control panel displays, with the General tab selected.

Installing LearnLinc 4

3.

Click the Virtual Campus tab.

The Virtual Campus configuration options display.

4.

Enter the new server address in the LearnLinc Server Address field.
If your server components and Virtual Campus are installed on the same server, check
Use same address for both servers. Otherwise,
Enter the Virtual Campus server address in the Virtual Campus Address field.
Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

5.

61

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Insert the LearnLinc Server
CD in the computers CD
drive.
2. Click Install Administration
Tool.
3. Follow the on-screen
instructions.

62

Installing the Administration Tool

The Administration tool is automatically installed on the server during the LearnLinc server
installation. To reinstall it on the server, run the LearnLinc server installation, not the
Administration tool installation.
If you attempt to run the Administration tool installation on your server
you will be prompted to use the LearnLinc Server installation instead.
To install the Administration tool on another computer, follow the directions in this section.
1. Insert the LearnLinc Server CD in your computers CD drive.
The Server installation option screen displays.
2. Click Install Administration Tool.
The Welcome screen displays.
3. Click Next.
The Software License Agreement screen displays.
4. Click Yes to accept the agreement.
The Choose Destination Location screen displays.
5. Click Browse to select a different location, or Next to continue.
The default installation location for the Administration tool is C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincAdmin.
6. Review the information in the Start Copying Files dialog, and click Next to begin the
installation.
7. When the Setup Complete dialog displays, click Finish.

Installing LearnLinc 4

Exporting Information from the LearnLinc Name Service Database

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Administration Tool, from the Windows taskbar.

The Administration tool launches on your computer.

63

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

3.

4.
5.

Enter your account information.

You must have administrator authority to use the Administration tool.
The default administrator account information is:
Log-in ID: Administrator
Group: System
Password: Administrator
Enter your server name.
Your server name is the domain name or IP address for your LearnLinc server computer.
For example, [Link]. Do not include the virtual directory for your
LearnLinc Virtual Campus.
If you are using a web proxy server to connect to the Internet, check Use Proxy and
enter the server name and port of your web proxy server.
Click Log-in.
The Administration tool displays.

To export the entire Name Service, continue with the next section, Exporting an entire
Name Service.
To export selected information from the Name Service, continue with Exporting
Selected Information from a Name Service on page 65.

64

Installing LearnLinc 4

Exporting an Entire Name Service

1. Select File > Export, from the menu bar.
The Exporting dialog displays.
2. Click the folder icon to enter a new path and file name in the Filename field.
The capsule file must have the extension .lcp. If you wish to replace or add to an existing
capsule file, enter its path and file name.
3. Select Entire database and click OK.
4. Click OK again to export the Name Service.
If you selected an existing capsule file in step 2, choose either:
Overwrite, to replace the information in the export file, or
Append, to add the current Name Service information to the capsule file.
The capsule file and a packing list file are created in the location you selected in step 2.
5. Open the packing list file ([Link]) to see a list of all the related resource files that you
must distribute with the export file.
6. Provide the capsule file (.lcp), packing list file ([Link]), and all related resource files to
the administrator that needs to import your Name Service.
Exporting Selected Information from a Name Service
1. Highlight the folder or the individual capsule you want to export.
2. Select File > Export from the menu bar.
The exporting dialog displays.
3. Click the folder icon to enter a path and file name in the Filename field.
The capsule file must have the extension .lcp.
4. Select Selected capsules to copy folder or capsule you highlighted in step 1.
The dotted name of the folder or capsule displays in the Selected capsules text field.
5. Click OK to export the capsule or capsules.
If you selected an existing capsule file in step 4, choose either:
Overwrite, to replace the information in the export file, or
Append, to add the current Name Service information to the export file.
The capsule file and a packing list file are created in the location you selected in step 3.
6. Open the packing list file ([Link]) to see a list of any related resource files that you
must distribute with the export file.
7. Provide the capsule file (.lcp), packing list file ([Link]), and any related resource files
to the administrator that needs to import your Name Service information.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Administration
tool.
2. Select File > Export.
3. Click the folder icon to enter
a path and file name.
4. Select Entire database and
click OK.
5. Click OK again.
6. Distribute the capsule file,
packing list file, and related
resource files.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Administration
tool.
2. Highlight a folder or a
capsule.
3. Select File > Export.
4. Click the folder icon to enter
a path and file name.
5. Select Selected capsules
and click OK.
6. Select Overwrite or
Append if prompted.
7. Distribute the capsule file,
the packing list file, and any
related resource files.

65

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Importing Information from a LearnLinc Name Service Capsule File

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Administration Tool, from the Windows taskbar.

1. Log-in to the LearnLinc

Administration tool.
2. Select File > Import.
3. Click the folder icon to
select a capsule file (.lcp).
4. Select either Keep the
originals in the Name
Service or Replace the
originals.
5. Click OK.
The Administration tool launches on your computer.

66

Installing LearnLinc 4

2.

3.

4.
5.

6.
7.

Enter your account information.

You must have administrator authority to use the Administration tool.
The default administrator account information is:
Log-in ID: Administrator
Group: System
Password: Administrator
Enter your server name.
Your server name is the domain name or IP address for your LearnLinc server computer.
For example, [Link]. Do not include the virtual directory for your
LearnLinc Virtual Campus.
If you are using a web proxy server to connect to the Internet, check Use Proxy and
enter the server name and port of your web proxy server.
Click Log-in.
The Administration tool displays.

Select File > Import from the menu bar.

The Importing dialog displays.
Click the folder icon to select a LearnLinc capsule file (.lcp).

67

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

8.

9.

Quick Steps
1. Insert the LearnLinc Client
CD in the computers CD
drive.
2. Click Install LearnLinc
Client.
3. Follow the on-screen
instructions.

Installing the Classroom Software on a Users Computer

If you choose to perform the classroom software installation on each users computer yourself,
follow the directions in this section. If you choose to allow your users to download and install
the classroom software from the Virtual Campus, please see Allowing Your Users Download
and Install the Classroom Software on page 69.
The directions in this section assume that you are using the LearnLinc
client CD to perform the installation. If you are installing the classroom
software from the web, please see Downloading and Installing the
Classroom Software on page 309.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

68

Select one of the following options:

Keep the originals in the Name Service to ignore newer information in the capsule
file.
Replace the originals to overwrite any duplicate capsules in the current Name Service.
Click OK.
The capsules are added to the current Name Service in the same location in which they
were stored in the original Name Service. Be sure to review the packing list and install any
resource files that were included with the capsule file.

Insert the LearnLinc Client CD in your computers CD drive.

The Client installation option screen displays.
Click Install LearnLinc Client.
The Welcome screen displays.
Click Next.
The Software License Agreement screen displays.
Click Yes to accept the agreement.
The Choose Destination Location screen displays.
Click Browse to select another location, or Next to continue.
The Setup type screen displays.
Select one of the following options:
AdvancedMultimedia Content to install all LearnLinc classroom tools, audio and
video conferencing, Microsoft Streaming Media Player, and OpSession for AppShare,
and multimedia content synchronization.

Installing LearnLinc 4

9.
10.
11.

12.

13.
14.

Typical to install all LearnLinc classroom tools, audio and video conferencing,
Microsoft Streaming Media Player, and OpSession for AppShare, but not multimedia
content synchronization.
Custom to choose the components you wish to install.
Click Next.
The Edit your location screen displays.
Enter a descriptive name for your location and click Next.
The description displays on the LearnLinc palette in classes that are data only, or that use
audio conferencing. You can change the description later, in the LearnLinc client control
panel.
The Verify Proxy Server screen displays.
If you are on a network that uses a web proxy server, enter the server address and port
number for the web proxy server and click Next. If you do not use a proxy server, leave
the fields empty and click Next.
The Start Copying Files screen displays.
Review the information and click Next to begin the installation.
When the Setup complete screen displays, select Yes, I want to restart my computer
now. and click Finish.

You can find the web proxy

server address and port information by selecting Internet

Options or Preferences
from one of your web
browsers menus, and finding
the proxy or LAN settings.

Allowing Your Users Download and Install the Classroom Software

Make sure that each user installs and configures the classroom software before his or her first
class. We have included two documents in the docs folder on both the LearnLinc Client and
Server CDs that you can customize and distribute to your users to aid in this process.
Your first LearnLinc class ([Link]) is a memo that describes the process of creating an
account, logging-in to the Virtual Campus, getting the LearnLinc client, and joining a class.
Installing the LearnLinc classroom software ([Link]) provides detailed instructions for
downloading, installing, and configuring the LearnLinc classroom software.
Both of these documents can be found in the docs folder on the LearnLinc Client and Server
CDs.

69

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Client
Configuration.
2. If you change the web proxy,
enter the web proxy server
name and port number in
the HTTP proxy and
Port text boxes,
respectively.
3. If you choose to open a
UDP port in your firewall to
transmit audio data, make
sure Attempt to use UDP
data is checked. Otherwise,
clear the checkbox.
4. Click OK.

Configuring the Classroom Software to Work with Web Proxies and Firewalls
Generally, the LearnLinc classroom software is ready to use when you install it. However, if
your organization changes its web proxy or firewall configuration, you must configure each
LearnLinc client with the new settings.
1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Client Configuration, from the Windows taskbar.
The LearnLinc client control panel displays.

2.

70

If your organization uses a web proxy, set the web proxy information.
Select Specify a HTTP proxy server to use: and then enter the proxy server name and
port number in the HTTP and Port text boxes, respectively.
If you are only connecting to LearnLinc servers outside your companys firewall, check
Force all requests to use the proxy server.
If your web proxy does not support keep alive, select Force HTTP polling. This will
prevent a delay from occurring when students enter a class.

Installing LearnLinc 4

3.

4.

Set the Internet audio information.

If your organization uses Internet audio conferencing in LearnLinc classes, and chooses
to open a port in its firewall to transmit audio data, check Attempt to use UDP data.
Otherwise, clear the checkbox.
Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

Next Steps

If you check Attempt to use

UDP data, the LearnLinc client will attempt to make a

UDP connection to the server
for audio data. If it cannot, it
will make an HTTP connection instead.

Once you have successfully installed the LearnLinc server software, and installed the LearnLinc
classroom software on at least two computers, you can test your LearnLinc installations by
following the test plan in Chapter 5, Chapter Testing the LearnLinc Environment.

71

4 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

72

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

5
Testing the LearnLinc Environment
This chapter explains the process for testing the LearnLinc environment.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Test the LearnLinc Virtual Campus
Test the LearnLinc Virtual Classroom
Test additional components
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What do I need to complete the tests?
2. What do I need to test the connection between multiple sites?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
Virtual Classroom

Overview: Using LearnLinc on page 32.

Installing the LearnLinc server and

classroom software

Installing LearnLinc on page 43.

73

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you understand the importance of testing the
LearnLinc environment, and the elements necessary to do so. Specifically, you need to know:
Required Elements for Testing
Multiple Sites

Required Elements for Testing

To test the LearnLinc environment, you must have installed the proper software and have at
least two people from your LearnLinc team available to conduct the tests. These requirements
are described in detail in the remainder of this topic.
Software
You must install the LearnLinc server, enable all your licences, and install the classroom
software on two computers before conducting your LearnLinc tests.
LearnLinc Information
The LearnLinc Virtual Campus has sample users, and a sample course with resources and
classes that you can use to complete the tests outlined in this chapter.
Multiple Sites
To test the connection between multiple sites, you must install the LearnLinc classroom
software on at least one computer at each site. Each computer must be connected to an intranet
or the Internet so that it can connect to your LearnLinc server.

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for testing the LearnLinc
environment.

74

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

Check Your Licences

1. Launch a web browser on the server, or on another computer.
2. Navigate to [Link] where servername is the name of your
LearnLinc server.
If you have chosen to password protect your Server information page,
you will be prompted to enter your Windows user name and password.
See Server Information Page on page 46 for more information.
The LearnLinc Server Information page displays.

3.

Scroll down to the entry Classroom Service Licences.

Your licences are listed by conferencing type. You can see the total for each type, the
number currently in use, and the expiration date for each license type.

75

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

If your LearnLinc licences are not enabled, refer to Enabling Your Server Licenses on
page 52. Once your licences are enabled, return to this chapter.
If your LearnLinc licences are enabled, proceed to the next task.
Quick Steps
1. Launch a web browser and
navigate to your Virtual
Campus.
2. Click Im a LearnLinc user
and Id like to log-in.
3. Enter the default
administrator account
information.
Log-in ID: Administrator
Group: System
Password: Administrator
4. Click Login.
5. Change the password for
the default account
immediately.

76

Log-in as an Administrator
Logging-in to the Virtual Campus tests your LearnLinc server installation. If you can log-in, the
web server and LearnLinc Name Service database are functioning properly.
1. Launch a web browser and navigate to your Virtual Campus.
The address of the Virtual Campus is the servers domain name and the virtual directory
you chose during installation, for example, in [Link]
learnlinc,xyzlearning the server name, and learnlinc is the virtual directory name.
The welcome page displays.

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

2.
3.

4.

Click Im a LearnLinc user and Id like to log-in.

The log-in page displays.
Log-in using the default administrator account.
The account information is:
Log-in ID: Administrator
Group: System
Password: Administrator
Click Login.
The home page for the default administrator displays.

You are now logged-in as the default LearnLinc administrator.

Change the password for this account immediately. Refer to the next
section, Change the System Administrator Account Password for
detailed directions.

77

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Click User Directory in
the left navigation pane of
the Virtual Campus
2. Click System.
3. Click System
Administrator.
4. Click the Edit tab.
5. Enter a new password and
verify it.
6. Click Save to update the
account.
7. Click Logout on the top
menu bar.
8. Click Logout to return to
the welcome page.

78

Change the System Administrator Account Password

Changing the system administrator password not only ensures the security of your LearnLinc
environment, it tests the LearnLinc Name Service as well. During this task you will retrieve data
from the LearnLinc Name Service as well as add new data to it.
1. Click User directory in the left navigation pane of the Virtual Campus.
The User Directory displays.

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

2.

Click System to see a list of all the users in that group.

79

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

80

Click System Administrator to see your account information.

The details for your user profile display

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

4.

Click the Edit tab.

The edit page for your user profile displays.

5.

Enter a new password in the New password and Verify new password fields.
Passwords are case sensitive.
Click Save to update your account.
Your new password is now in effect. Be sure to record your password in a secure location.

6.

81

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

7.

Click Logout on the top menu bar.

The logout page displays.

8. Click Logout to return to the Virtual Campus welcome page.

9. Log-in again using the default administrator account to verify the new password.
10. Log-out and proceed to the next section.
Do not close your browser.
The remainder of the tasks in this chapter are divided between
instructor actions and student actions. Make sure that all members of
the LearnLinc team who are involved in the test have a copy of this
guide, or at least the following pages, to ensure that all tasks are
completed in sequence.

82

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

Log-in Again as Sample Instructor

Perform this task so that you can enter the Virtual Classroom as an instructor.
1. Click Im a LearnLinc user and Id like to log-in on the Virtual Campus welcome page.
The log-in page displays.
2. Log-in using the sample instructor account.
The account information is:
Log-in ID: instructor
Group: Sample
Password: there is no password for this account
3. Click Login to go to the Sample instructors home page.
The sample instructors home page displays.

Quick Steps
1. Click Im a LearnLinc user
and Id like to Log-in.
2. Enter the sample instructor
account information.
Log-in ID: Instructor
Group: Sample
Password: leave blank
3. Click Login.

You are now logged-in as Sample instructor.

To ensure the security of your LearnLinc environment, you may wish to
change the password for this account before proceeding.

83

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Click Sample Course
under You are teaching the
following courses on your
home page.
2. Click Join next to the class
for your conferencing type.
3. Wait for the LearnLinc
palette to display.

Instructor: Join a Class in the Sample Course

1. Click Sample Course under the heading You are teaching the following courses on your
home page.
The contents tab for Sample Course displays.

2.
3.

84

Click Join next to a class.

Join the type of class for which you have enabled conferencing licences.
If you have not done so already, you will be prompted to configure your computers audio
settings.
Complete all the steps in the LearnLinc Audio Wizard to configure your audio settings and
join the class.

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

Your web browser minimizes automatically as you begin to join the class. The LearnLinc
splash screen displays, followed by the LearnLinc palette. When your name displays in the
class list, you are logged-in to the class. The following diagram highlights the features of
the instructors palette.
.

Instructors palette

85

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Click Im a LearnLinc user
and Id like to Log-in.
2. Enter the sample student
account information.
Log-in ID: Student
Group: Sample
Password: leave blank
3. Click Login.

Student: Join the Same Class on Another LearnLinc Computer

A second LearnLinc team member should join the same class, using the sample student
account. You must have at least two users logged-in to complete the remainder of the tasks in
this test.
The information for the sample student account is:
Log-in ID: Student
Group: Sample
Password: there is no password for this account
To ensure the security of your LearnLinc environment, you may wish to
change the password for this account before proceeding.
For complete directions for logging-in and changing your password, refer to the instructions in
the previous sections, Log-in as an Administrator, and Change the System Administrator
Account Password but use the student account information.

86

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

As you join the class, your web browser minimizes, and the student LearnLinc palette displays.
The following diagram highlights the features of the students palette.
Students Palette

If the instructor and student

are not in the same room, be
sure to have a phone available
for their use until you are sure
they can communicate via
LearnLinc.

87

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. If you have a Talk button,
click it, or press <CTRL>.
2. Ask the student to click the
hand raise button if he or
she can hear you.

Instructor: Talk to the Class

This task tests audio and video conferencing, and is not necessary for users who are in the class
Data only. If you are in the class Data only, move to the task, Instructor: Launch the
Synchronized Web Browser and Navigate to a URL on page 91. If you are in any other class,
proceed with this task.
1. If you have a Talk button click it, or press <CTRL> before you begin speaking. Otherwise,
begin speaking to the class immediately.

If the student cannot

hear you, select Tools
> Local > Audio
wizard, to adjust your
audio settings. Repeat
the test.
If the student can hear
you, continue to the
next step.

2.

Talk to the class by speaking into your microphone.

As you speak, the volume indicator displays volume level bars. Green bars indicate an
acceptable volume level. Yellow or red bars indicate that the volume is too loud.
3. Ask the student to raise his or her hand if he or she can hear you and see you.
If the student cannot hear you, check your microphone and speaker cable connections,
and run your audio wizard by selecting Tools > Local > Audio Wizard, from the
LearnLinc palette menu bar. Ask the student to do the same via text chat. Try talking
again. If the student still cannot hear you, refer to Audio Conferencing
Troubleshooting on page 537.
If you are using video but the student cannot see you, check your video camera cable
connections, and make sure the lens is uncovered.
If you see the students hand raise, the student can hear you.
When your audio or video conferencing is working properly, continue with the next task.

88

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

Student: Raise Hand

If you hear the instructor speaking to you, and/or see his or her image in the LearnLinc palette
conferencing window, click Hand raise.

If you do not hear or see the instructor, wait for the instructor to contact you by another means,
such as text chat or a phone call. He or she may ask you to run your audio wizard. You can do
so by selecting Tools > Local > Audio wizard, from the LearnLinc menu bar.

Instructor: Pass the Floor

This task tests floor control, and gives the student the floor, so that you can test two-way
conferencing between the instructor and the floor holder.
1. Double-click the students name in the class list to pass the floor.

2.

Quick Steps
If you hear the
instructor, click Hand
raise.
Otherwise, wait for the
instructor to contact you by
another means.

Quick Steps
1. Double-click the students
name to pass the floor.
2. Ask the student to speak
into his or her microphone.

Ask the student to speak into his or her microphone.

If you cannot hear the student, contact him or her through text chat, and instruct him or
her to run the audio wizard by selecting Tools > Local > Audio Wizard, from the
LearnLinc palette menu bar. If you still cannot hear the student, refer to Audio
Conferencing Troubleshooting on page 537.
If you hear the student, take the floor back. Everyones conferencing is working
properly. Continue with the next task.

89

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Wait for the instructor to
pass the floor to you.
2. If you have a Talk button
click it, or press <CTRL>,
before speaking.
3. When you are done, ask the
instructor to take the floor
back.

Student: Talk to the Class

This task continues the conferencing test.
1. Wait for the instructor to pass the floor to you.
Students must have the floor to speak to the class.
2. If you have a Talk button click it, or press <CTRL>, before you begin speaking. Otherwise,
begin speaking to the class immediately.

Some users may have a Talk button, while others have a Mute checkbox. Your
computers audio hardware determines which of the two you use.
3. When you are done speaking, ask the instructor to take back the floor and click Talk or
press <CTRL> if necessary.
If the instructor did not hear and/or see you, run your audio wizard by selecting Tools >
Local > Audio Wizard, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar. Ask the student to do the
same. Try talking again. If the student still cannot hear you, refer to Audio
Conferencing Troubleshooting on page 537.
If the instructor heard and/or saw you, two-way audio is working properly.
When your audio or video conferencing is working properly, continue with the next task.

90

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

Instructor: Take the Floor

This task completes the floor control test.
Click Take floor to take the floor back from the student.

Instructor: Launch the Synchronized Web Browser and Navigate to a URL

This task tests the synchronized web browser. The synchronized web browser uses your
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator browserthe screen shots in this section may look
somewhat different from your web browser.
1. Select the agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette to display the agenda.

2.

Quick Steps
Click Take floor.

Quick Steps
1. Select the Agenda tab on
the LearnLinc palette.
2. Click the synchronized web
browser shortcut.
3. Navigate to a web site on
the Internet or your intranet.
4. Ask the student to raise his
or her hand when the web
site displays in his or her
browser.

Click the synchronized web browser shortcut.

91

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The synchronized web browser launches in the content area of your screen.

3.

Navigate to a web site on the Internet or your intranet.

If you navigate to an Internet site, both you and the student must be
connected to the Internet. If you navigate to an intranet site, both you and
the student must have access to your organizations intranet.

4.

Ask the student to raise his or her hand when the new web site displays in the
synchronized web browser.
If the student doesnt raise his or her hand, refer to the synchronized web browser
troubleshooting information in Classroom Tools Issues on page 522.
If the student raises his or her hand, the synchronized web browser is working
properly.
When your synchronized web browser is working properly, close it and continue with the next
task.

92

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

Instructor: Use AppShare

This task tests AppShare, LearnLincs application sharing tool.
1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > Calculator, from the Windows taskbar.

3.

Select the agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette to display the agenda.

4.

Click the AppShare shortcut.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Select Start > Programs >
Accessories > Calculator.
3. Select the Agenda tab on the
LearnLinc palette.
4. Click the AppShare shortcut.
5. Check Calculator in the
Applications list.
6. Click Start.

93

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The Select Application dialog displays.

5.
6.
7.

8.

94

Check Calculator in the Applications list.

If Calculator does not display in the list, click Refresh List.
Click Start.
Ask the student to raise his or her hand when the display window and calculator display
on his or her screen.
If the student doesnt raise his or her hand, refer to the AppShare troubleshooting
information in Appendix A, on page 509.
If the student raises his or her hand, AppShare is working properly.
When AppShare is working properly, your LearnLinc Virtual Campus and Virtual
Classroom tests are complete. If you are using LearnLinc at multiple sites, continue to the
next section, Multiple site testing.
Click Quit to close AppShare.

Testing the LearnLinc Environment 5

Multiple Site Testing

By testing locally before conducting a multiple site test, you are ensuring that most of the
LearnLinc features and tools will work properly regardless of where your students are located.
Perform the following test to ensure that students at distant sites can connect to your LearnLinc
server, and that audio conferencing is configured properly.
1. Make sure the LearnLinc classroom software is installed on a computer at your site, and on
a computer at each site with which you wish to test.
2. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as the Sample instructor.
3. Ask the users at each site to go to the Virtual Campus and create new accounts for
themselves.
4. Click Sample Course on your home page course list, and then click the Join link for the
class that matches your conferencing type.
5. Instruct the users at the other sites to join that class as well.
6. Wait for everyone to join the class before proceeding.
7. If you have a Talk button, click it before you begin speaking. Otherwise, begin speaking to
the class immediately.

8.

Talk to the class by speaking into your microphone.

As you speak, the microphone volume indicator, displays green bars to show your volume
level.

95

5 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

9.

Ask the students to raise their hands if they can hear and/or see you.
If you see all students hands raise, everyones conferencing is working properly.
If none of the students can hear and/or see you, run your audio wizard by selecting
Tools > Local > Audio Wizard, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar. Try talking again. If
the student still cannot hear you, refer to Audio Conferencing Troubleshooting on
page 537.
If some students can hear you, and others cannot, use text chat to ask the students who
cannot hear you to run their audio wizards. Try talking again. If the student still cannot
hear you, refer to Audio Conferencing Troubleshooting on page 537.

Next Steps
Once you have tested your LearnLinc environment, you are ready to roll out a larger pilot
installation. Install the LearnLinc classroom software for each person you expect to join your
pilot class, or instruct them to download and install the software from the Virtual Campus. Be
sure to test with each person to ensure that their audio and/or video conferencing is working
properly.
To prepare for your pilot class, please see:
Chapter 7, Managing Users
Chapter 8, Converting your Content for LearnLinc
Chapter 9, Creating Courses
Chapter 10, Scheduling Classes
Chapter 11, Working with Resources

96

Customizing LearnLinc 6

6
Customizing LearnLinc
This chapter explains the types of customizations that can be made to the LearnLinc server, the
Virtual Campus, and the Virtual Classroom.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Add streaming video to your server
Translate the Virtual Campus
Change the Virtual Campus graphics
Remove access to certain Virtual Campus functions
Make changes to Virtual Campus text
Change the Virtual Campus desktop bitmap
Enable instructors and students to show their pictures in the LearnLinc palette
Upload instructor and student pictures to the LearnLinc server
Create a custom client installation for Virtual Classroom customizations
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. Why customize?
2. What additional components can I install on the LearnLinc server?
3. What areas of LearnLinc can I translate?
4. What features can I customize?
5. What is the process for developing and implementing changes to the Virtual Campus?
6. How do I distribute changes to the Virtual Classroom?
7. Where are the student and instructor pictures that display in the palette stored?

97

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
Creating a LearnLinc environment

Overview: Creating a LearnLinc Environment on page 26.

Using LearnLinc

Overview: Using LearnLinc on page 32.

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you understand the types of customizations that
can be made to the LearnLinc environment. Specifically, you need to know:
Why Customize?
Streaming Video
Areas of LearnLinc That Can Be Localized
Features That Can Be Customized in the Virtual Campus
A Suggested Process for Developing and Implementing Virtual Campus Customizations
Features That Can Be Customized in the Virtual Classroom
Distributing Customizations to the Virtual Classroom

Why Customize?
While LearnLinc is a full featured environment that can be installed and used as is, your
organization may have specific training needs or goals that require some customization of the
LearnLinc server, Virtual Campus web site, or Virtual Classroom environment. Wherever
possible, we have provided you with easy access to customization information and tools.
Streaming Video
One of the most popular additions to the LearnLinc environment is Streaming Video. Streaming
video is prerecorded or live video that users view as it is downloading to their computers.
Prerecorded streamed video clips are stored on a web server or other accessible location.
When you access a streamed video file it begins to play almost immediately, and continues to
download and store the remainder of the file as you are playing it. Using prerecorded streamed
video files helps you to avoid long waits while you download media files.

98

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Live streamed video is captured by encoder software on your computer, sent to a server, and
then sent to individuals who have requested to see the streamed video. Streaming live video is
bandwidth efficient, but only provides a one-way video solution. In LearnLinc classes, the
instructor can use streamed video to send his or her live image to the class in real time
however, the students in the class cannot send their video images.
To add live streaming video to your LearnLinc environment you must add a streaming video
server to your LearnLinc server, or another server that all LearnLinc users will be able to access,
and purchase streaming video licenses for your LearnLinc server. LearnLinc 4.5 supports the use
of Microsoft Netshow Server 3.0 or Real Video Server 4.0. Additionally, you must provide a
second computer for your instructor to capture his or her video image and run the encoder
software. The encoder computer connects to the streaming video server to distribute the
instructors live video image to the class.
Streaming video is highly compressed. The compression process can take
up to 30 seconds, which will result in a 30 second delay between when
an instructor speaks and when the students hear him or her.

Areas of LearnLinc That Can Be Localized

LearnLinc 4.5 supports full localization of the LearnLinc Client software. Localized versions of
LearnLinc allow you to use up to two languages in class at one time. Please contact LearnLinc
for more information on localized LearnLinc software.
You can also localize the text of the LearnLinc Virtual Campus. Refer to Localizing the Virtual
Campus on page 109 for instructions.
Features That Can Be Customized in the Virtual Campus
You can make any or all of the following changes to the Virtual Campus:
replace border graphics with your organizations logo or artwork
remove access to certain functionality, such as the user directory
add custom functionality

99

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

A Suggested Process for Developing and Implementing Virtual Campus

Customizations
Once your Virtual Campus is in use, we suggest that you do not modify it directly. If you
modify the Virtual Campus directly, you may accidentally break parts of the campus, causing
your users to miss classes or be denied access to course resources or other information.
We recommend that you create a duplicate of your Virtual Campus, and store it on a separate
LearnLinc server for further development and testing. You can use the Administration tool
export and import features to put a copy of your LearnLinc Name Service database on the
duplicate server, so that you can make and test changes in a simulation of your actual
LearnLinc environment, without compromising your live LearnLinc server.
Features That Can Be Customized in the Virtual Classroom
You can make any or all of the following changes to the Virtual Classroom:
display users pictures in the LearnLinc palette
change the LearnLinc Virtual Classroom desktop background bitmap
change the default instructor and student bitmaps (for users who do not have their own
pictures uploaded to the server)
change the default page that displays when the synchronized web browser launches
change the default feedback answers
Distributing Customizations to the Virtual Classroom
While displaying users pictures in the LearnLinc palette does not require any changes to the
LearnLinc classroom software, all other customizations to the Virtual Classroom do. Because
these customizations require that you add to or update files in the LearnLinc classroom
software installation, you must create a customized installation and distribute to your users

100

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for customizing your LearnLinc
environment, specifically:
Adding Streaming Video to Your LearnLinc Server
Removing Access to Virtual Campus Functions
Modifying the Virtual Campus Download Page
Localizing the Virtual Campus
Making Changes to the Text in the Virtual Campus
Removing Access to Virtual Campus Functions
Enabling Instructors and Students to Show their Pictures in the LearnLinc Palette
Changing the Default Instructor and Student Pictures in the LearnLinc Palette
Changing the Virtual Classroom Desktop Background Bitmap
Changing the Default Page that Displays when the Synchronized Web Browser Launches
Changing the Default Feedback Answers for all Your LearnLinc Users
Creating a Custom Installation for the LearnLinc Classroom Software

Adding Streaming Video to Your LearnLinc Server

The following is a overview of the process of adding live streaming video to LearnLinc. For
specific directions, please refer to your NetShow 3.0 or Real Video 4.0 documentation.
1. Purchase and install LearnLinc streaming video licences on your LearnLinc server.
2. Install the Netshow or Real Video server software on a LearnLinc server or another server.
3. Set up a second computer next to the instructor who wishes to use live streaming video.
The second computer must be next to the instructor to capture his or her video and have
video capture hardware and software installed on it.
4. Install the encoder software on the second computer.
5. Test to make sure that streaming video is working outside of the LearnLinc environment.
6. Schedule a data only class that has the application Streaming Video in its autostart list.
7. Tell the class instructor to:
a. Join the class.
b. Select Tools > Class > Suspend Audio/Video to stop any other conferencing in use.
c. Enter the URL for the NetShow or Real Video server in the Streaming Video text box
d. Click Go!.
The students can hear and see the instructor in their video windows.

Quick Steps
1. Install streaming video
licences on your LearnLinc
server.
1. Install Netshow or Real
Video server.
2. Set up a second computer
next to the instructor with
the encoder software.
3. Schedule a data only class
with the application
Streaming Video in its
autostart list.
4. Tell the instructor to enter
the URL for the Netshow or
Real Video server in the
streaming video text box
and click Go!.

101

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Removing Access to Virtual Campus Functions

You can prevent your users from accessing features in the Virtual Campus by removing links to
those features. The following sections describe the processes for removing access to the user
account creation, guest course catalog, and user directory features.
Quick Steps
1. Locate and open the file
[Link] on your
LearnLinc server.
2. Comment out the lines that
create the link to the user
account creation page.

User account creation

1. Locate the file [Link] on your LearnLinc server.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb.
2. Open the file in Windows NotePad, Microsoft Visual InterDev or another editor.
3. Comment out the following lines by placing HTML comment markers at the beginning and
end of the following lines. The beginning <!-- and end --> comment lines have already
been added to the following example, in bold text.
<!-- <tr>
<td width=5></td>
<td width=32>
<a href="[Link]">
<img src="images/[Link]" alt="<%= String108 %>"
border="0" width=32 height=32 align=absmiddle>
</a>
</td>
<td width=190>
<a href="[Link]"><strong><font face="Tahoma"
size="2"><%= String109 %></a></font></strong>
</td>
</tr> -->
4. Save and close the page.
Do not delete the page [Link] from the server.

102

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Guest Course Catalog

1. Locate the file [Link] on your LearnLinc server.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb.
2. Open the file in Windows NotePad, Microsoft Visual InterDev or another editor.
3. Comment out the following lines by placing HTML comment markers at the beginning and
end of the following lines. The beginning <!-- and end --> comment lines have already
been added to the following example, in bold text.
<!-- <tr>
<td width=5></td>
<td width=32>
<a href="[Link]">
<img src="images/[Link]" alt="<%= String110 %>" border="0"
width=32 height=32 align=absmiddle>
</a>
</td>
<td width=190>
<a href="[Link]"><strong><font face="Tahoma"
size="2"><%= String111 %></a></font></strong>
</td>
</tr> -->
4. Save and close the page.

Quick Steps
1. Locate and open the file
[Link] on your
LearnLinc server.
2. Comment out the lines that
create the link to the guest
course catalog page.

Do not delete the page [Link] from the server.

103

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Locate and open the file
[Link] on your
LearnLinc server.
2. Comment out the lines that
create the link to the user
directory page.

User Directory
1. Locate the file [Link] on your LearnLinc server.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb.
2. Open the file in Windows NotePad, Microsoft Visual InterDev or another editor.
3. Comment out the following lines by placing HTML comment markers at the beginning and
end of the following lines. The beginning <!-- and end --> comment lines have already
been added to the following example, in bold text.
<!-- <a HREF="[Link]" target="main" onMouseOver="mOver(2)"
onMouseOut="mOut(2)">
<img SRC="<%=I18NDir%>/directory_i.GIF" BORDER="0" alt=""></
a><BR> -->
4. Save and close the page.
Note that users can still see profile pages for students and instructors with whom they are
taking courses.
Do not delete the page [Link] from the server.

Quick Steps
1. Determine which installation
option you wish to keep.
2. Locate and open the file
[Link] on the
LearnLinc server.
3. Comment out the lines for
the options you do not wish
to display.

104

Modifying the Virtual Campus Download Page

1. Determine which installation option you wish to keep on the page.
2. Locate the file [Link] on the LearnLinc server.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb.
3. Open the file in Windows NotePad, Microsoft Visual InterDev or another editor.
4. Comment out the following lines by placing HTML comment markers at the beginning and
end of the following lines. The beginning <!-- and end --> comment lines have already
been added to the following example, in bold text. (Note that the code already contains
other lines that have comment tags as well.)

Customizing LearnLinc 6

AdvancedMultimedia content
<!-- this is the start of the link for the Advanced client install -->
<!-- <table>
<tr>

<td valign="top">
<font size="2" face="Verdana, Arial, Helvetica">

<b><%= String208

%></b>

<%= String220 %></font>

<table width="100%">
<tr>
<%
' This is for Internet Explorer only
If theBrowser = "MSIE" Then
%>
<td>
<a href="[Link]?Title=<%= [Link](String208)
%>&Link=CF">
<%= String226 %>
</a>
</td>
<% Else
' This one is for netscape only
%>
<td>
<a href="[Link]?Title=<%= [Link](String208)
%>&Link=CF">
<%= String227 %>
</a>
</td>
<% End If %>
</tr>
</table>

105

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

</td>
</tr>
</table>
<br> -->
<!-- this is the end of the link for the Advanced client install -->

Typical
<!-- this is the start of the link for the Typical client install -->
<!-- <table>
<tr>
<td valign="top">
<font size="2" face="Verdana, Arial, Helvetica">
<b><%= String210 %></b>
<%= String221 %>
</font>
<table width="100%">
<tr>
<%
' This is for Internet Explorer only
If theBrowser = "MSIE" Then
%>
<td>
<a href="[Link]?Title=<%= [Link](String210)
%>&Link=CT">
<%= String226 %>
</a>
</td>
<% Else
' This one is for netscape only
%>

106

Customizing LearnLinc 6

<td>
<a href="[Link]?Title=<%= [Link](String210)
%>&Link=CT">
<%= String227 %>
</a>
</td>
<% End If %>
</tr>
</table>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
<br> -->
<!-- this is the end of the link for the Typical client install -->

Custom
<!-- this is the start of the link for the Custom client install -->
<!-- <table>
<tr>
<td valign="top">
<font size="2" face="Verdana, Arial, Helvetica">
<b><%= String212 %></b>
<%= String223 %>
</font>
<table width="100%">
<tr>
<%
' This is for Internet Explorer only
If theBrowser = "MSIE" Then

107

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

%>
<td>
<a href="[Link]?Title=<%= [Link](String212)
%>&Link=CC">
<%= String226 %>
</a>
</td>
<% Else
' This one is for netscape only
%>
<td>
<a href="[Link]?Title=<%= [Link](String212)
%>&Link=CC">
<%= String227 %>
</a>
</td>
<% End If %>
</tr>
</table>
</td>
</tr> -->
<!-- this is the end of the link for the Custom client install -->

108

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Localizing the Virtual Campus

1. Create a new folder on your LearnLinc server, under the language folder. Name the folder
so that it indicates the language your are adding, for example Espaol or Deutsche.
By default, the language folder is located in C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb\.
2. Copy the contents of the folder English and paste them into your new folder.
3. Locate the file [Link] in the language folder.
The information in this file enables a language selection drop down box and button on the
welcome page of the Virtual Campus.
4. Open the file using Windows NotePad or another text editor.
5. After <%, start a new line, and replace the existing text with the following, where
languagename is the name you want to appear in the language selection drop down box,
and foldername is the name of the folder you created in step 1.
Dim I18NDir
Select Case Session(Language)
Case languagename
I18NDir = "language/languagename"
%><!-- #INCLUDE FILE = "foldername/[Link]" --><%
Case Else
I18NDir = "language/English"
%><!-- #INCLUDE FILE = "English/[Link]" --><%
End Select

Quick Steps
1. Create a new folder on your
LearnLinc server under the
language folder.
2. Name the folder for the
language you are adding to
the campus.
3. Copy the contents of the
folder English to your new
folder.
4. Locate and open the file
[Link] in the
language folder.
5. Add the script in step 5,
right.

sub LanguageSelectBox
%>
<select name="Language" size=1>
<option <% if (Session("Language")="languagename") then
[Link] ("Selected") %>>languagename</option>
<option <% if (Session("Language")="English" or
Session("Language")="") then [Link]
("Selected") %>>English</option>
</select>
<%
end sub
%>

109

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

To translate the text for your localized version of the Virtual Campus, follow the
directions in the section Making Changes to the Text in the Virtual Campus on
page 110.
To replace the tabs and buttons in the Virtual Campus with translated versions, follow
the directions in the section Changing the Button Graphics in the Virtual Campus on
page 113.
To translate the Virtual Campus help pages and Quick Tutorial pages, locate the folders
help and tutorial under the folder for your language translation. Translate the text in
each HTML file directly. A working knowledge of HTML is necessary to translate the
HTML files.
Quick Steps
1. Locate and open the file
[Link] on your
LearnLinc server.
2. Edit the text you wish to
change by finding its string
and editing the text after the
equal sign (=),

Making Changes to the Text in the Virtual Campus

1. Locate the file [Link] on your LearnLinc server.
By default, the English version of this file is located in C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb\language\English. If you are localizing your
Virtual Campus, and you have created a folder for another language, locate the copy of the
file [Link] under the that folder.
2. Open the file in a text editor, such as Microsoft Write.
(Note that the file may be too large to open in Windows Notepad.)
3. Locate the text you wish to change.
The text entries are organized by the name of the web page on which they display.
If you are upgrading your Virtual Campus from a version that has already
been translated, locate the file [Link] in the previous version and
copy and paste its contents at the top of the file [Link]. Delete the
lines 'ErrorMsg001' to 'String307' that were
included in [Link], and translate all the lines after
the comment 'Words Added For LearnLinc 4.0'.

110

Customizing LearnLinc 6

4.

Edit the text after the equal sign (=).

Be sure to enclose the text with double quotes.
To display a space between sentences in the Virtual Campus, enter two spaces in the
text file.
If you want the text you are entering to display in quotes in the Virtual
Campus, be sure to use single quotes ( ) around that text.

111

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Changing Virtual Campus Graphics

You can change the image on the Virtual Campus welcome page, the border graphics, and the
button graphics in the Virtual Campus.
We recommend testing all changes on a duplicate LearnLinc server
before implementing them on your live LearnLinc server.

Quick Steps
1. Create a graphic to replace
the default, [Link].
2. Replace the original on the
LearnLinc server. By default,
the file is located in
C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincSer
ver\LLWeb\language.

Changing the Welcome Page Graphic

1. Create a graphic to replace the default graphic and name it [Link].
The graphic must be:
300 x 285 pixels (height x width)
saved in jpeg (.jpg) format.
2. Locate the original file [Link] on your LearnLinc server.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb\language.
3. Copy your graphic to the language folder.
The Confirm file replace dialog displays.

4.
5.

112

Click Yes to replace the file.

Launch a web browser to view your change.
You may need to reload or refresh your browser window to see the change.

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Changing the Virtual Campus Border Graphics

1. Create a graphic to replace the top border graphic and name it [Link].
The graphic must be:
1280 x 62 pixels (height x width)
saved in jpeg (.jpg) format.
2. Create a graphic to replace the left border graphic and name it [Link].
The graphic must be:
100 x 968 pixels (height x width)
saved in jpeg (.jpg) format.
3. Locate the original files [Link] and [Link] on your LearnLinc server.
By default, the files are located in C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb\language.
4. Copy your graphics to the language folder.
The Confirm file replace dialog displays.
5. Click Yes to replace the file.
6. Launch a web browser to view your changes.
You may need to reload or refresh your browser window to see the change.
Changing the Button Graphics in the Virtual Campus
In most cases, changing the button graphics is not necessary. If you choose to change the
graphic style, or to translate the text on the buttons, follow the directions outlined below.
Create the new graphic and save it with the same name as the existing button.
A complete list of the buttons in the Virtual Campus folder C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb\language\English follows.
If you are simply changing the style of the graphic, copy your graphic to the English
folder.
If you are translating the text on the graphic, copy the graphic file to the folder for the
translation. See Localizing the Virtual Campus on page 109 for complete instructions
on translating buttons and text in the Virtual Campus.

Quick Steps
1. Create graphics to replace
the top and border graphics.
Name them [Link]
and [Link],
respectively.
2. Replace the originals on the
LearnLinc server. By default,
the files are located in
C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincSer
ver\LLWeb\language.

Quick Steps
1. Create graphics to replace
the desired tabs and
buttons. Give your graphics
the same names as the
originals.
2. Replace the originals on the
LearnLinc server. By default,
the files are located in
C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincSer
ver\LLWeb\language\English.

113

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Tab and Button Graphics in the Virtual Campus

Note that tabs and some buttons have two graphics, one displays
normally, the other when the mouse is positioned over the button. You
must edit both graphics. The second graphic has the same name, with
_b at the end.
about_a.gif (about button)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
add_a.gif (add button)
add_b.gif
Displays on [Link], [Link]
Links to [Link] (edit tab), [Link], [Link] (edit tab),
[Link] (edit tab), [Link]
add_course.gif (add course button)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link] (edit tab)
add_folder.gif (add folder button)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
add_remove_a.gif (add/remove button)
Displays on [Link] (people tab)
Links to [Link], [Link]
add_user_a.gif (add user button)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
agenda_a.gif (agenda tab, not selected)
agenda_b.gif (agenda tab, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to agenda tab display
assistants_a.gif (assistants tab, not selected)
assistants_b.gif (assistants tab, selected)

114

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Displays on [Link]
Links to assistants tab display
auto_register_a.gif (auto register button)
Displays on [Link] (people tab)
Does not link to another page
cancel_a.gif (cancel button)
Displays on [Link], [Link], [Link]
Links to [Link], [Link], [Link]
contents_a.gif (contents tab, not selected)
contents_b.gif (contents tab, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to contents tab display
continue_a.gif
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
course_i.gif (course catalog button, not selected)
course_ib.gif (course catalog button, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
details_a.gif (details tab, not selected)
details_b.gif (details tab, selected)
Displays on [Link], [Link], [Link]
Links to details tab display
directory_i.gif (user directory button, not selected)
directory_ib.gif (user directory button, selected)
Displays on page [Link]
Links to [Link]
discussion_a.gif (discussion tab, not selected)
discussion_b.gif (discussion tab, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to discussion tab display
[Link] (download button)
Displays on [Link]
Links to LearnLinc install file [Link]

115

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

edit_a.gif (edit tab, not selected)

edit_b.gif (edit tab, selected)
Displays on [Link], [Link], [Link], [Link]
Links to edit tab display
help_a.gif (help button)
Displays on pages [Link], [Link], [Link], [Link],
[Link], [Link], [Link]
Links to [Link]
home_i.gif (home button, not selected)
home_ib.gif (home button, selected)
Displays on page [Link]
Links to [Link]
join_a.gif (join button)
Displays on [Link] (details tab)
Link launches LearnLinc classroom software
logout_a.gif (logout button)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
make_changes_a.gif (small make changes button)
Displays on [Link], [Link]
Links to [Link]
menu_div.gif (divider between links on top navigation bar)
This graphic does not require modification or translation
[Link] (download button, not selected)
[Link] (download button, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to page [Link]
[Link] (logout button, not selected)
[Link] (logout button, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to page [Link]
[Link] (help button, not selected)
[Link] (help button, selected)

116

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Displays on [Link]
Links to page [Link]
[Link] (language button, not selected)
[Link] (language button, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
ok_a.gif (OK button, not selected)
ok_b.gif (OK button, selected)
Displays on [Link], [Link]
Links to [Link] (edit tab)
people_a.gif (people tab, not selected)
people_b.gif (people tab, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to people tab display
quicktutorial_i.gif (quick tutorial button, not selected)
quicktutorial_ib.gif (quick tutorial button, selected)
Displays on [Link]
Links to [Link]
return_a.gif (return button)
Displays on [Link] (all tabs), [Link] (all tabs), [Link] (all tabs)
Links to [Link] (contents tab), [Link] (details tab)
save_a.gif (save button)
Displays on [Link] (edit tab), [Link] (edit tab), [Link] (edit tab),
[Link]
Links to [Link] (contents tab), [Link] (details tab), [Link] (details
tab), [Link] (details tab), [Link]
tab_a.gif (tab edges)
tab_b.gif
tab_c.gif
(these graphics do not require modification or translation)

117

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Collect image files from your
LearnLinc users that are 180
x 125 pixels, in bitmap, jpeg,
or ping format.
2. Copy the files to the
pictures folder on the
LearnLinc server.

Enabling Instructors and Students to Show their Pictures in the LearnLinc Palette
1. Collect image files from your LearnLinc users.
Each image must be:
in bitmap (.bmp), jpeg (.jpg), or ping (.png) file format
180 x 125 pixels (width x height)
stored in the following format: pictures\persona\group\[Link], where
group is the users log-in group, loginid is the users log-in ID, and fileformat is either
.bmp, .jpg, or .png. For example, Jane Does picture might be: pictures\persona\self
registered\[Link].
If the image format is .jpg, the users picture will also appear automatically on the Users
Personal Profile page in the User Directory.
Make sure to use log-in names, not full names when you name the image
file. In the previous example, JaneD is the log-in name, and Jane Doe
is the full name.

The quality of the image as the

user sees is it based upon the

color depth of the users video
display and the color depth of
the image itself. For best
results, capture images at 24
bits and ask users to configure
their displays to 16-bit or
higher.

118

2.

3.

Create a folder for each group under the pictures\persona folder on the LearnLinc server.
By default, the pictures\persona folders are located in C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\pictures\persona.
Copy the image files to the appropriate group folders on the LearnLinc Server.
Each users picture displays in the LearnLinc palette when he or she has the floor during a
LearnLinc class.

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Changing the Default Instructor and Student Pictures in the LearnLinc Palette
1. Create new images for the instructor and student.
Each image must be:
in bitmap (.bmp), jpeg (.jpg), or ping (.png) file format
180 x 125 pixels (height x width)
2. Name the instructor picture [Link] (or .jpg, or .png) and the student picture
[Link] (or .jpg, or .png).
3. Copy the image files to the default folder on the LearnLinc Server. By default, the
default folder is located in C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\pictures\default.
4. If the Confirm file replace dialog displays, click Yes to replace the files.

5.

Quick Steps
1. Create new images for the
default instructor and
student pictures that are 180
x 125 pixels, and bitmap,
jpeg, or ping format.
2. Name the instructors
picture [Link] (or
.jpg, or .png) and students
[Link] (or .jpg, or
.png).
3. Copy the files to the
\pictures\default on the
LearnLinc server.

The new default pictures display for users who do not have their own pictures on the
LearnLinc server.

119

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Create a new image called
[Link] that is 1024
x 768 pixels and 256 colors.
2. Distribute the new image to
your users individually, or
create a custom installation
that includes the new file.

Quick Steps
1. Create a new HTML page
and name it [Link].
2. Distribute the new page to
your users individually, or
create a custom installation
that includes the new file
and any image files.

120

Changing the Virtual Classroom Desktop Background Bitmap

1. Create a new image for the desktop bitmap.
The image must be:
1024 x 768 pixels (height x width)
256 colors. The image can be high color, if all your users computers are set to high
color.
saved as [Link] (no quotes)
2. Distribute the new image to your users.
To make the change manually, locate the file [Link] on each users computer
and replace it with your image.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincClient\Samples.
To make the change part of the LearnLinc classroom software installation, please see
Creating a Custom Installation for the LearnLinc Classroom Software on page 123.
Changing the Default Page that Displays when the Synchronized Web Browser
Launches
1. Create a new HTML page and name it [Link].
To redirect your users to a web page on the Internet or your intranet, you could include a
redirect meta tag in your new HTML page. Include the line:
<meta http-equiv="Refresh" content="#;URL=[Link]
in your page, where # is the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the user, and
webaddress is the URL to which you want to redirect your users.
2. Distribute the new HTML page and any image files that are used on the page to your users.
To make the change manually, locate the file [Link] on each users computer and
replace it with your file. Add any image files to this folder as well.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincClient\Docs.
To make the change part of the LearnLinc classroom software installation, please see
Creating a Custom Installation for the LearnLinc Classroom Software on page 123.

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Changing the Default Feedback Answers for all Your LearnLinc Users
1. Locate the file [Link] on a computer that has the LearnLinc classroom software
installed on it.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincClient\Bin.
2. Open the file in NotePad or another text editor.
To change one of the existing answer sets, continue to the next section, Editing an
existing answer set.
To add a new default answer set, see Creating a New Default Answer Set on page 122.
Editing an existing answer set
1. Locate the answer set you wish to edit.
The answer sets are numbered sequentially, from [Q1] to [Q6].
2. Edit the text after the equal sign (=) for each answer.
The answers are numbered sequentially, from A1 to A4.
3. Select File > Save, to save your changes.

Quick Steps
1. Open the file
[Link].
2. Locate the answer set you
wish to edit.
3. Edit the text after each =.
4. Save the file and distribute it
to your users.

You can change the answers, but you cannot change the name of the
answer set, which appears in the text chat right mouse menu, and under
the Tools menu on the LearnLinc Palette. Clicking on the old name will
display the new answer set.
4.

Distribute the new [Link] file to your users.

To update the file manually on each users computer, locate the file [Link] on
each computer and replace it with your file.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincClient\Bin.
To update the LearnLinc classroom software installation to use your new file please see
Creating a Custom Installation for the LearnLinc Classroom Software on page 123.

121

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Open the file
[Link].
2. Copy the [Q6] answer set
and paste it at the end of the
file.
3. Change the line [Q6] to
[Q7].
4. Edit the text after each =.
5. Under [Settings] Change
total questions to 7, and
default questions to 7.
6. Save the file and distribute it
to your users.

Creating a New Default Answer Set

1. Copy the following lines from the end of the file.
[Q6]
Question=A,B,C,D
TotalAnswers=4
A1=A
A2=B
A3=C
A4=D
2. Place the cursor at the end of the file, and paste the text.
3. Change the line [Q6] to [Q7].
4. Change the text after the equal sign (=) for each answer.
The answers are numbered sequentially, from A1 to A4.
5. Under [Settings] at the top of the file, change the following:
TotalQuestions=6 to TotalQuestions=7
DefaultQuestion=1 to DefaultQuestion=7.
6. Save the file.
The new default answer set displays on each users palette when they
join any class. If you change the feedback answer set during class, you
cannot return to the default.
7.

122

Distribute the new [Link] file to your users.

To make the change manually, locate the file [Link] on each users computer
and replace it with your file. Add any image files to this folder as well.
By default, the file is located in C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincClient\Bin.
To make the change part of the LearnLinc classroom software installation, please see the
following section Creating a Custom Installation for the LearnLinc Classroom Software.

Customizing LearnLinc 6

Creating a Custom Installation for the LearnLinc Classroom Software

If you chose to add customized files to the LearnLinc client software, you can create and
distribute a custom installation to your users on CD ROM or via a network drive.
The following instructions do not apply to the downloads on the Virtual
Campus download page. Those files cannot be customized without
purchasing third party installation software.
1.

2.

Copy the client installation disk folders from either the server or client CDs onto a local or
network drive.
The disk folder is labeled disk1, and is located on the CDs under the Client folder.
Copy the customized files to the disk1 folder.
You can add the files listed in the following table to disk1.

File name

Purpose

Copied to

[Link]

stores feedback answer sets

/bin

[Link]

displays when synchronized web browser launches

/docs

*.gif and/or *.jpg

optional graphics to display on customized [Link]

/docs

[Link]

sample question set for use with Q&A

/samples

[Link]

directions for using the Virtual Campus and joining a class

/samples

[Link]

displays in the content area during a LearnLinc class to hide

the desktop

/samples

*.gif and/or .jpg

optional graphics to display on customized [Link]

/samples

3.
4.

Quick Steps
1. Copy the client installation
disk folder, disk1 from a
LearnLinc CD, onto a local
or network drive.
2. Copy your customized files
to the disk1 folder.
3. Distribute the disk folder
to your users.
4. Instruct your users to
double-click on [Link]
in the folder disk1.

Distribute the disk1 folder on CD-ROM or via a network drive.

Instruct your users to double-click on [Link] in the folder disk1 to begin the custom
installation.

123

6 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

To Learn More
To learn more about:

Please see:

NetShow

[Link]

Real Video

[Link]

Next Steps
Once you have made and distributed your customizations, review the following chapters to
finish setting up your LearnLinc environment.
Chapter 7, Managing Users
Chapter 8, Converting your Content for LearnLinc
Chapter 9, Creating Courses
Chapter 10, Scheduling Classes
Chapter 11, Working with Resources

124

Managing Users 7

7
Managing Users
This chapter explains the concepts and tasks for managing LearnLinc users. In this chapter you
will learn how to:
Add, edit, and delete authority levels
Add, edit, and delete log-in groups
Add, edit and delete, users
Add a large number of users
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What are authority levels, log-in groups, and users?
2. What is the LearnLinc Name Service?
3. How do authority levels affect users in the Virtual Campus?
4. How do authority levels affect users in the Virtual Classroom?
5. What happens when users create their own accounts?
6. What tools can I use to manage LearnLinc users?

What You Need to Know Before Reading this Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concept.
the Virtual Campus

Overview: Using LearnLinc on page 32

125

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are creating users correctly and efficiently.
Specifically, you need to know:
What Is a LearnLinc User?
What Is an Authority Level?
What Is a Log-in Group?
Administration Options

What Is a LearnLinc User?

Each LearnLinc user has:
a full name
a log-in ID
a log-in group
a password
user profile information (email address, home page, contact information, comments)
an authority level
registration information
All of this information is stored in their user account.
Each user must have an account to log-in to the LearnLinc Virtual Campus. Users can create
their own accounts in the Virtual Campus, or you may choose to create accounts for all student
users. You must create all accounts for users who need authority levels greater than selfregister.
Each user can modify his or her user profile information in the Virtual Campus user directory,
with the exception the authority level. Only LearnLinc administrators can change the authority
level for a user.
What Is an Authority Level?
An authority level is a user account setting that determines what a user can and cannot do in
the LearnLinc environment. LearnLinc has five default authority levels: self register, student,
instructor, author, and administrator. The following table describes the default permissions for
each authority level. LearnLinc administrators, may choose to modify these authority levels, or
create new ones.
126

Managing Users 7

SelfStudent Instructor Author Administrator

register
Edit own user profile
Register for courses and join classes
Create classes in own course
Register/unregister users for own
course
Create resources in own course
Create classes in any course
Create resource in any course
Register/unregister users for any
course
Edit groups and users
Edit advanced properties

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

When an administrator creates a new user, he or she assigns an authority level to that account.
When a user creates his or her own account in the Virtual Campus, the account is automatically
assigned the self-register authority level.

You can remove the create my

own account option from
your Virtual Campus. For
detailed directions, please see
Removing Access to Virtual
Campus Functions on

What Is a Log-in Group?

Use log-in groups to create logical groupings of users. For example, in a corporate setting, you
might group your users by department: training, human resources, IT, and so forth. In an
academic setting, you might group users by department: biology, senior nursing, accounting,
and so forth.
Users must know their log-in groups to log-in to the Virtual Campus.

127

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Administration Options
As a LearnLinc administrator, you have two options for managing LearnLinc users and other
LearnLinc information: the Virtual Campus or the Administration tool. In general, you can
perform the same administrative tasks in both tools.
The Virtual Campus provides administrative access for common tasks to instructors,
authors, and administrators through any browser.
The Administration tool provides the ability to perform all the same tasks as the Virtual
Campus, plus additional advanced capabilities. The Administration tool can only be
accessed by administrators.
For most activities, such as adding, editing, or deleting an account, course, class, or resource,
we recommend using the Virtual Campus. If you have a large amount of information to enter,
such as numerous users, we recommend using the Administration tool.
The Administration tool is installed with the LearnLinc server. You can install the Administration
tool on other computers by downloading it from the LearnLinc Virtual Campus download page
(if you are logged-in as an administrator), or by installing it from the LearnLinc Server CD. See
Installing the Administration Tool on page 62 for detailed directions.
The information in the Detailed directions section of this chapter indicates when you should
use the Virtual Campus or the Administration tool to mange your LearnLinc users.

128

Managing Users 7

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for managing users, log-in
groups, and authority levels, specifically:
Creating a Log-in Group
Creating a User
Deleting a Log-in Group or User
Adding, Editing, and Deleting Authority Levels
Adding a Large Number of Users

Creating a Log-in Group

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus using the default Administrators account, or another
administrator account.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus
as an administrator.
2. Go to the User Directory.
3. Click Add Log-in Group.
4. Enter a name for the group
and click OK.

The default administrator account information is:

Log-in ID: Administrator
Group: System
Password: Administrator

129

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

130

Click User Directory in the left navigation pane.

The user directory displays, with a list of all log-in groups.

Managing Users 7

3.

Click Add Log-in Group.

The New group page displays.

131

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

4.

Enter a name for the group and click OK.

The new group displays, with the message There are no groups or users available.

To add a user to your new group, skip to step 4 of Creating a User on page 133.

132

Managing Users 7

Creating a User
1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus using the default Administrators account, or another
administrator account.
2. Click User Directory in the left navigation pane.
The user directory displays, with a list of all log-in groups.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus
as an administrator.
2. Go to the User Directory.
3. Click a group name.
4. Click Add User.
5. Enter the users information
and click OK.

133

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

134

Click a group name.

A list of all the users in that group displays.

Managing Users 7

4.

Click Add User.

The new user page displays.

5.

Enter the user information and click OK.

The user must have a unique log-in ID. For example, you may have two users named John
Smith. While you can enter John Smith in the Name field for both users you must assign
different log-in IDs, such as jsmith1 and jsmith2 to the accounts.
The list of users in the group, including the new user, displays.
You can edit the users information at a later time by selecting the users name in the
user directory and clicking the Edit tab. Make any desired changes and click Save to
save your changes.
Be sure to notify the new user of his or her account information.

135

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus
as an administrator.
2. Go to the User Directory.
to delete a group, click
delete next to its name.
to delete a user, click the
users log-in group name
and then click delete next
to the users name.

Deleting a Log-in Group or User

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus using the default Administrators account, or another
administrator account.
2. Click User Directory in the left navigation pane.
The user directory displays, with a list of all log-in groups.

3.

136

To delete a log-in group, click delete next to its name. Note that you cannot delete a
log-in group that has users in it.
To delete a user, proceed to step 3.
Click the name of users group.
A list of users in that group displays.

Managing Users 7

4.
5.

Click delete next to the user you wish to delete.

A warning displays, asking if you are sure you wish to delete the user.
Click OK to delete the user.
The list of users in the group displays, without the user you deleted.

137

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Administration
Tool.
2. Log-in to the Administration
tool.
3. Select System > Authority
Levels, from the left pane.
4. Select New > Authority
Level, from the menu bar.
5. Type a name and press
<Enter>.
6. Select the desired options
and click OK.

Adding, Editing, and Deleting Authority Levels

We do not recommend that you edit or delete the default authority
levels.
1.

Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Administration Tool, from the Windows taskbar.

The Administration tool launches on your computer.

138

Managing Users 7

2.

3.

4.
5.

Enter your account information.

You must have administrator authority to use the Administration tool.
The default administrator account information is:
Log-in ID: Administrator
Group: System
Password: Administrator
Enter your server name.
Your server name is the domain name or IP address for your LearnLinc server computer.
For example, [Link]. Do not include the virtual directory for your
LearnLinc Virtual Campus.
If you are using a web proxy server to connect to the Internet, check Use Proxy and
enter the server name and port of your web proxy server.
Click Log-in.
The Administration tool displays.

139

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

140

6.

In the left pane, click the plus box (+) next to the System folder to expand it.
The Authority Levels and System Resources folders display in the right pane.

7.

Click the Authority Levels folder to display its contents.

Managing Users 7

8.

Select New > Authority Level, from the Administration tool menu bar.

A new authority level icon displays in the right pane of the Administration tool.

141

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

9.

Enter a name for the authority level by replacing the highlighted text and press <Enter>.
The property sheet for the new authority level displays.

10. Check the desired options. A description of each option follows.

Check Change own password and preferences to enable users of this type to manage
their own user profile information.
Check Register for courses to enable users of this level to register for courses in the
Virtual Campus.
Check Enter classes to enable users of this level to join classes.
Check Create courses and classes to enable users of this level to create, edit, and
delete courses in the Virtual Campus.
Check Content authoring and resource management to enable users of this type to
add resources to courses and classes in the Virtual Campus.
Check System administration to enable users of this type to manage all LearnLinc
information, and to use the Administration tool.

142

Managing Users 7

11. Click OK to save the new authority level.

To edit the authority level at a later time, double click its icon to display its property
sheet. Make the desired changes and click OK.
To delete the authority level at a later time, click its icon once and select Edit > Delete
from the Administration tool menu bar.
Do not delete an authority level unless you are sure that no users have
that authority assigned to them.

143

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Administration
Tool.
2. Log-in to the Administration
tool.
3. Expand the Persona folder
and click once on the
desired log-in group.
4. Select New > User, from
the menu bar.
5. Enter a user name and full
name and click Insert.
6. Enter the user information
and click OK.

144

Adding a Large Number of Users

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Administration Tool, from the Windows taskbar.
The Administration tool launches on your computer.
2. Enter your account information.
You must have administrator authority to use the Administration tool.
3. Enter your server name.
Your server name is the domain name or IP address for your LearnLinc server computer.
For example, [Link]. Do not include the virtual directory for your
LearnLinc Virtual Campus.
4. If you are using a web proxy server to connect to the Internet, check Use Proxy and
enter the server name and port of your web proxy server.
5. Click Log-in.
The Administration tool displays.

Managing Users 7

6.

In the left pane, click the plus box (+) next to the Persona folder to expand it.

7.
8.

Select a group by highlighting it in the left pane of the Administration tool.

Select New > User, from the Administration tool menu bar.

The Insert new user dialog displays.

145

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

146

9.

Enter a user name and full name, and click Insert.

User name is the users log-in ID when they log-in to the Virtual Campus.
Full name is displayed on the users home page, and in class lists in the Virtual
Campus and Virtual Classroom.
The property sheet for the new user displays.

10.
11.
12.
13.

Enter a password for the user, and re-enter it in the following field to confirm it.
Enter the user profile information.
Click OK to save the new account and return to the Insert new user dialog.
Click Cancel when you are done adding new users.

Managing Users 7

Next Steps
In this chapter, you learned how to manage users, log-in groups, and authority levels. Once
you have created some users, youll need to provide other information, such as courses,
classes, and resources, for those users to work with. For more information, please see:
Chapter 9, Creating Courses
Chapter 10, Scheduling Classes
Chapter 11, Working with Resources

147

7 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

148

Creating LearnLinc
Courses, Classes, and
Content
The Creating LearnLinc Courses, Classes and Content section of this guide contains concepts
and tasks that are important to LearnLinc content developers and instructional designers. If you
are a LearnLinc content developer or instructional designer, or you perform any of the
following tasks for LearnLinc, please read this section.
Chapter 8

Converting your Content for LearnLinc

page 151

Chapter 9

Creating Courses

page 185

Chapter 10

Scheduling Classes

page 213

Chapter 11

Working with Resources

page 233

149

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

150

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

8
Converting your Content for LearnLinc
This chapter explains your options for creating and converting content for use in the LearnLinc
environment.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Convert PowerPoint presentations to various types of multimedia content
Upload web files to a LearnLinc server
Distribute your converted content to instructors and students
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. How is LearnLinc content different from other instructional content?
2. What types of content can I use with LearnLinc?
3. What are my content distribution options?
4. How do I determine which conversion option is right for my content?
5. Where do I store my converted content?
6. How do instructors and students access content?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
Virtual Campus

Overview: Using LearnLinc on page 32.

Virtual Classroom

Overview: Using LearnLinc on page 32.

LearnLinc authoring

LearnLinc Authoring Guide on the LearnLinc Authoring Kit CD.

151

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using content in LearnLinc to your best
advantage. Specifically, you need to understand:
How is LearnLinc Content Different from other Types of Instructional Content?
Your Content Conversion Options
Which Conversion Option is Right for You?
Where to Store your Content?
Making Content Available to Students

How is LearnLinc Content Different from other Types of Instructional Content?

LearnLinc content differs from other instructional content because it is meant to be used in a
synchronous environment. Most computer-based training (CBT) and web-based training (WBT)
content is designed to be used by students as they work on their own. By converting your
content for use in LearnLinc, you can add synchronization to these types of content, so that
they can be used in both wayssynchronized to the floor holders actions during class, and able
to be used by students on their own before and after class.

LearnLinc aware content has

been designed or converted
for synchronized use in the
LearnLinc Virtual Classroom.
Content created in ToolBook,
Authorware, PowerPoint, and
HTML can be converted to be
LearnLinc aware.

152

Your Content Conversion Options

Typically, instructors and authors use a number of different tools to develop training materials
for their courses. Some common tools are:
Microsoft PowerPoint (or other presentation slide software)
Microsoft Office, or other office productivity software (word processing, spreadsheet, etc.)
HTML editors (FrontPage, DreamWeaver)
Graphics editors (Paint Shop Pro, Corel-Draw, etc.)
CBT and WBT development tools (ToolBook, Authorware, Director, etc.)
While you can use any of these tools (or others not listed here) to develop LearnLinc content,
the conversion requirements are different for each. Some tools are supported directly and
materials developed with those tools require no conversion. Other tools require the use of a
conversion utility to make them LearnLinc aware, and still others require custom
development to work in the LearnLinc environment.

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

The following table lists common content types and your conversion options:

Current Content type

Conversion
Needed?

PowerPoint presentations

yes

convert to HTML by uploading in Virtual Campus

PowerPoint to ToolBook converter

Word, Excel, or other Office

documents

no

Use AppShare or AppView to share the document

with the class, or
Save as HTML in the original application and post
on web site or intranet
Take screen captures and display in Whiteboard

HTML pages

no

Screen shots, bitmaps, jpegs,

or ping image files

no

You can import image files (bitmap, jpeg, or ping

files) using the Import Picture function in
Whiteboard.
Alternately, you can create images by using
Whiteboard to grab screen shots.

ToolBook books*

yes

Your existing ToolBook content must be modified to

use LearnLincs ToolBook synchronization agent. You
must add a small amount of script to your ToolBook to
enable synchronization in LearnLinc classes.

Authorware content*

yes

Your existing Authorware content must be modified to

use LearnLincs Authorware model file. The model file
contains icons, variables, and functions that will enable
synchronization in LearnLinc classes.

Director content*

yes

Your existing Director content must be modified to use

LearnLincs Director synchronization agent cast.

Conversion Option(s)

Use Synchronized web browser to lead your class

through the HTML content.

* ToolBook, Authorware, and Director content can only be synchronized during class if
everyone has installed the LearnLinc client using the Advanced installation option.

153

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Which Conversion Option is Right for You?

Deciding which conversion option to choose depends on the original format of the content,
your intended method of delivery, and your familiarity with the tool used to develop the
content. The following table notes some advantages and disadvantages for various conversion
options, and the LearnLinc tool that you would use to deliver each type of content.
Conversion Option

154

Advantages

Disadvantages

Delivered Using...

Upload PowerPoint
presentation in Virtual
Campus

Easy to upload
If slides have simple
backgrounds, they
will display quickly

Each slide is
Synchronized web
converted to its own browser
HTML page, which
must be downloaded
individually during
class.

Convert PowerPoint
presentation using
PowerPoint to ToolBook
converter

Easy conversion to a
single file
Can be enhanced
with additional
ToolBook
functionality
Slides can be
annotated

Large files may

ToolBook sync agent
display slowly
Copies of the file
must be distributed
to students before
class and stored in
the same location on
all computers.

Share office documents

in AppShare

Interactive
experience for
students

Bandwidth intensive AppShare

Show office documents

in AppView

Students can see

instructors actions

only available in
AppView
classes on multicast
networks
students cannot use
document

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Conversion Option

Advantages

Save office documents as Easy conversion

HTML

Disadvantages

Delivered Using...

Must get the converted

files onto a web server

Synchronized web
browser

Screen capture office

documents to show in
Whiteboard

Easy
Cannot change
Can be captured on- document once it has
they-fly
been captured
Students can save
individual copies

Whiteboard

Use screen shots,

bitmaps, jpegs, or ping
image files in whiteboard

Can be imported or Usually combined with

created on-the-fly
other types of content.
Students can save
individual copies

Whiteboard

Modify existing ToolBook

books for use in
LearnLinc

Highly interactive
Great for teaching
complex content

Requires knowledge ToolBook sync agent

of ToolBook
Large files may
display slowly
Copies of the file
must be distributed
to students before
class and must be
stored in the same
location on all
computers.

155

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Conversion Option

156

Advantages

Disadvantages

Delivered Using...

Authorware content

Highly interactive
Great for teaching
complex content

Requires knowledge Authorware sync agent

of Authorware
Large files may
display slowly
Copies of the file
must be distributed
to students before
class and stored in
same location on all
computers.

Director content

Highly interactive
Great for developing
complex, multimedia
content.
Great for developing
and employing
animated content.

Requires knowledge Director sync agent

of Director
Large files may
display slowly
Copies of the file
must be distributed
to students before
class and stored in
same location on all
computers.

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Where to Store your Content?

Determining where your content must be stored depends on the size of the file or files, and
whether or not they must be downloaded. The following table outlines the best content storage
locations for the basic LearnLinc content types.
Content
Type

Relative
File Size

Downloaded
During Class?

ToolBook,
Authorware, or
Director

very large

Best Location

Typical Address

no

local drives for all

students

C:\foldername\ filename
(location must be the
same on all students
computers)

HTML
small to
(converted
medium
PowerPoint files,
office
documents, or
HTML pages)

Yesfrom a web
server

web server

[Link]
foldername/[Link]
(you cannot use drive
letters from your network
to address HTML content
if you are teaching
students who are outside
your corporate network.

Whiteboard
files

medium

Yes

instructors
computer

C:\foldername\
[Link]

Document files
for use with
AppShare or
AppView

medium

Yescontinuous
screen shots of the
document

instructors
computer

C:\foldername\ filename

Making Content Available to Students

Once you have converted and stored your content, you can make it available to students in the
Virtual Campus by adding it to a course contents list or a class agenda if you are an instructor,
author, or administrator. Once a student has registered for a course, he or she can access any
items that have been added to its course contents list and class agenda.

157

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for converting and distributing
content, specifically:
Uploading a PowerPoint File
Deleting a PowerPoint Presentation That has Been Uploaded to the Server
Modifying the PowerPoint Upload Default Settings
Uploading Web Files to the LearnLinc Server
Converting a PowerPoint file to a ToolBook Book
Adding a LearnLinc Navigator to your ToolBook Book
Distributing Toolbook/Authorware Books or Director Movies
For a complete guide to creating LearnLinc aware content, including
ToolBook and Authorware books and Director movies, please see the
LearnLinc Authoring Guide included on your LearnLinc Authoring Kit CD.
The directions and screen shots in this guide are based on Microsoft Internet Explorer. If you
are using Netscape Navigator, the directions remain the same, but some screen shots, menu
names, and dialog names may differ slightly.

158

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Uploading a PowerPoint File

1. Create a PowerPoint file in Microsoft PowerPoint (PowerPoint 2000 is recommended).
The final download size for each HTML page of the presentation
depends on the complexity of the original PowerPoint slides. Wherever
possible, use simple backgrounds when creating your presentation so
that the slides will load quickly when viewed in a web browser.

2.
3.

Note that any movies, animations, audio, actions, transitions, or hyperlinks that you add to
the presentation will not be converted to HTML.
Save the PowerPoint file in an accessible location, such as a local drive on your computer.
Log-in to the Virtual Campus using an account with instructor, author, or administrator
privileges.

Quick Steps
1. Create a PowerPoint file
(version 97 or or higher).
2. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
3. Select a course.
4. Select PowerPoint at the
bottom of the course
contents or class agenda list
and click Add.
5. Follow the on screen
directions.

By default, your PowerPoint

file cannot be more than 2MB
in size. To change this default,
please see Increasing the
upload file size setting on
page 169.

4.

Click Course Catalog to locate the course to which you want to add the presentation.
If you are an instructor, you must be registered as an instructor for the course to add
your presentation.
If you are an author or administrator, you can add your presentation to any course in
the course catalog.

159

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

Click the course name to display its contents list.

If you want to add the presentation to the class agenda, click the class name, and select
the Agenda tab.
Otherwise, remain on the contents list tab.

160

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

6.

At the bottom of the list, select PowerPoint from the drop down list and click Add.

161

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The Add a PowerPoint presentation to your course page displays.

162

7.

Click Browse to locate your presentation.

The Choose file dialog displays.

8.

Locate and select your file, and click Open.

The path and file name display in the File text box.

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

9.

Click Upload.
The Processing uploaded file page displays.

A copy of the PowerPoint file is uploaded to the server and converted. Each slide is
converted to a GIF image and placed on its own HTML page. The pages are saved on the
server, and a link is created in the courses contents list to access the first page of the
presentation.
Only one person at a time can add PowerPoint slides to the LearnLinc
server. If you attempt to add your PowerPoint slides and someone else
has already begun adding theirs, you will see an error message informing
you that you must wait until the server is free. In the rare case where
you and another person attempt to add your PowerPoint slides at the
exact same time, your browser may freeze temporarily. It will return to a
working state as soon as the other person finishes adding his or her
slides.

163

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

10. Wait for all three steps to be completed, and click OK.

The edit page for the presentations URL displays. You can edit the name and description
of the presentation if desired.
To update the presentation at a later time, repeat the previous steps. Note that the
PowerPoint file must have the same name to overwrite the existing presentation.

164

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Deleting a PowerPoint Presentation That has Been Uploaded to the Server

To delete an uploaded PowerPoint presentation, you must delete the PowerPoint file and the
HTML and GIF files on the server, and delete the item from any courses or classes in which it
was stored.
1. On the LearnLinc server, use Windows Explorer to locate the folder that contains your
content. The folder is located in the LearnLinc server installation directory, by default,
C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\llweb\Content\course_name\
powerpoint_file_name. Where Course_name is the name of your course, and
powerpoint_file_name is the name of your original PowerPoint file.

Quick Steps
1. Locate the presentations
folder under the Content
folder on the LearnLinc
server.
2. Delete the presentations
folder.
3. Delete the presentation
from any course contents
lists or class agendas in the
Virtual Campus.

165

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

166

2.

Right-click on the folder powerpoint_file_name and select Delete from the shortcut
menu.

3.

Close Windows Explorer.

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

4.

Navigate to your Virtual Campus web site and log-in as an instructor, author, or
administrator.

167

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

Locate the course that contains the presentation by clicking Course Catalog and then
clicking on the courses name.
The course contents list displays.

To delete a presentation from the courses contents list, click Delete next to the
presentations name.
To delete a presentation from a class agenda, click the class name, and then click the
Agenda tab for the class. Click delete next to the presentations name in the agenda
list.

168

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Modifying the PowerPoint Upload Default Settings

The PowerPoint upload default settings ensure that content can be viewed quickly and easily,
even at slow connection speeds such as 28.8 kbps. You can adjust these settings to suit your
organization's standards.
Modifying the powerpoint upload settings involves editing an Active
Server Page (ASP) on the LearnLinc Server. Making modifications to this
page can create errors in the Virtual Campus, and should only be done
by the system administrator or other qualified individual.

Increasing the upload file size setting

By default, the Virtual Campus does not accept PowerPoint presentations that are larger than
2MB. This limit ensures that the resulting content is a practical size for viewing over a 28.8 kbps
Internet connection. If your LearnLinc users have faster Internet connections, you may wish to
change this setting. To do so, edit the following line in the page [Link] on the LearnLinc
server:
1. Open the page [Link] in an HTML editor or Windows NotePad. The default
location of the file is: C:\Program Files\ILINC\LearnLincServer\LLWeb\[Link].
2. Locate the following line, and change the file size limit as desired:
maxFileSize = 2100000
2100000 indicates the maximum file size in bytes, and is approximately 2.1MB. When
modifying the maximum file size, be sure to use bytes, not megabytes.
3. Save the file and reboot the server.

Quick Steps
1. Open the page [Link]
on the LearnLinc server.
2. locate the line
maxFileSize=2100000.
3. Change the number of bytes
as desired and save the file.
4. Reboot the server.

169

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Open the page [Link]
on the LearnLinc server.
2. Locate the lines ppObjfImageWidth=736 and
ppObjFImageHeight=522.
3. Remove the apostrophe
from the beginning of each
line.
4. Save the file and reboot the
server.

Changing the Image Scaling for Higher Resolution Monitors

By default, each slide image is scaled to 512x384 pixels. This size fits well in the LearnLinc
content area for students who have a monitor resolution of 800x600. If all of your LearnLinc
users have their monitors set to 1024x768 or higher, you may choose to scale the slide images
to a larger size. If you wish to change the image scaling default, edit the following lines in the
page [Link] on the LearnLinc server:
1. Open the page [Link] in an HTML editor or Windows NotePad.
The default location of the file is: C:\Program
Files\LearnLinc\LearnLincServer\LLWeb\[Link].
2. Locate the following lines, and remove the apostrophe at the beginning of each line to
scale the images to a larger size:
'[Link]=736
'[Link]=522
3. Save the file.
4. Close your browser and log-in to the Virtual Campus again.
If you have already uploaded a presentation and you wish to change its display size you
must upload it again.
.

170

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Uploading Web Files to the LearnLinc Server

1. Copy your HTML (.htm) files to a floppy disk or other portable media.
2. On the LearnLinc server, locate the Content folder under the LearnLinc installation folder.
The default location for this folder is C:\Program Files\LearnLinc\LearnLinc
Server\LLWeb\Content.
If desired, create a new folder under Content.
3. Place a copy of each file in the Content folder, or a folder under Content.
Alternately, you can use FTP to create any necessary folders and upload the files to the
LearnLinc server.

Quick Steps
1. Locate the Content folder
under the LearnLinc
installation folder on your
LearnLinc server.
2. Create a new folder under
Content if desired.
3. Copy your .htm files to that
folder.

The URL for each HTML file is

based on its location on the

server. For example, if the files
[Link] and [Link] are
stored in the folder content
on the LearnLinc server http:/
/[Link]/learnlinc, the URL to view the
presentation would be http://
[Link]/learnlinc/content/[Link].

171

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Create a PowerPoint 95 (or
higher) file.
2. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc Utilities and select
a template.
3. Click OK when the log-in
warning displays.
4. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc Utilities >
PowerPoint to ToolBook
Converter.
5. Follow the on screen
instructions.
6. Save the book with an 8
character (or less) name and
the .ili extension.

Converting a PowerPoint file to a ToolBook Book

1. Create a PowerPoint file in MS PowerPoint 95 or higher.
2. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc Utilities, and select the desired template for the
resolution of your students computers..

3.

172

When you installed the PowerPoint to ToolBook converter, several templates were
installed on your computer as well. These templates are sized for different screen
resolutions including 800 x 600, 1024 x 768, and 1280 x 1024.
Click OK when the log-in warning message displays.

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc Utilities > PowerPoint to ToolBook converter.

The conversion wizard displays.

Click Select to select your PowerPoint file.
The Select PowerPoint Presentation dialog displays.
Select your presentation and click Open.
Click Next to display the next step of the wizard.
Select the LearnLinc Content item from the list of open ToolBook books and click Next.
Select an image format and click Finish.
A higher image format (24 bit) will result in a better quality image and a larger file size. A
lower quality image format (16 bit or 8 bit) will lower the image quality but lower the file
size as well.
A warning dialog displays, instructing you not to use your computer
while the conversion is in progress. Do not touch the keyboard or
mouse until the Conversion Wizard dialog displays.

173

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

10. When the conversion process is complete, the Save As dialog displays. Name your book
in eight characters or less and save it with the . ili extension.
Do not save your book in the LearnLinc Utilities directory with the
original template name. Doing so will overwrite the template.
Make sure that all ToolBook book and navigator file names are eight
characters or less, and that any folders in which they are stored are eight
characters or less.
If you want to add a LearnLinc Navigator to your book, continue to the following
section, Adding a LearnLinc Navigator to your ToolBook Book.
Otherwise, select File > Exit, to close the book.

The run-time version of ToolBook is installed with

LearnLinc. To author ToolBook content, you must
purchase a full version from
Asymetrix.

174

Tips for converting your PowerPoint presentations to ToolBook books

When selecting the image format for your book (24 bit, 16 bit, or 8 bit color) keep in mind
that higher bit depths produce better quality images, but with a larger file size. We
recommend 16 bit for most presentations.
The converter preserves the aspect ratio of your presentation by scaling it to fit the
ToolBook book by height. This means that the book may be wider than the PowerPoint
images. If you have the full version of ToolBook, you can correct the book size by selecting
Objects > Background Properties, in ToolBook and adjusting the page size.

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Adding a LearnLinc Navigator to your ToolBook Book

1. Open the ToolBook book by double-clicking on it from Windows Explorer. Note that all
synchronized ToolBook books have the .ili extension.
Launch the file by double- clicking it. If you open the book from the ToolBook File menu,
the LearnLinc menu will not display.
You must have a full version of ToolBook on your computer to complete
this task.
2.
3.

Click OK when the log-in warning message displays.

Press<F3> to enable the authoring menus for the book.
The ToolBook procedures described in this guide are based on the
ToolBook 6. 5 interface. If you are using an older or newer version of
ToolBook, your interface may look somewhat different. Please complete
the tasks in this section using the corresponding features on your version
of ToolBook.

4.

Select LearnLinc > Set Navigator.

Quick Steps
1. Double-click on a ToolBook
book with the .ili extension
in Windows Explorer.
2. Click OK when the log-in
warning message displays.
3. Press <F3>.
4. Select LearnLinc > Set
Navigator.
5. Enter the dotted name of a
navigator and check Enable
navigator.
6. Click OK and save the book.

A navigator is a standard toolbar that you can add to any

LearnLinc ToolBook book.

The Select a navigator for this book dialog displays.

5.
6.

Enter the dotted name of the navigator in the Navigator field. The default navigator is
[Link].
Make sure Enable Navigator is checked and click OK. The navigator will display at the
top of the book when it is opened in a LearnLinc class.

To find the dotted name of a

navigator, launch the Administration tool, select Resource >
Navigator, and double- click
the desired navigator. The dotted name displays in a grayedout box on the property
sheet. (You must be an administrator to use the
Administration tool.)

175

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

7.

Select File > Save from the ToolBook menu bar.

8.

Make the book available to students by adding it to a course contents list or class agenda.
See the following task, Distributing multimedia content for detailed directions.
Instruct your users to download the book before class, to a location that
you specify. All users must store the book in the same location for
synchronization to work properly during a class.

176

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

Distributing Toolbook/Authorware Books or Director Movies

1. Make sure that the ToolBook, Authorware, or Director file you wish to distribute is stored
in a location that all students can access, such as a file server, ftp server, or network drive.
Do not store the file on a network drive if you are teaching students
who are outside your organizations network.
2.
3.

Log-in to the Virtual Campus.

Locate the course to which you want to add the content.
If you are an instructor, you must be registered as an instructor for the course to add
your multimedia content.
If you are an author or administrator, you can add your multimedia content to any
course in the course catalog.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Locate the course to which
you want to add the
content.
3. Select Book or Director
Movie at the bottom of the
course contents or class
agenda list and click Add.
4. Enter a name, description,
and download address for
the book.
5. Click Save.

Consider using a compression

utility to store one or more
files in a smaller, compressed,
file that will be easier to
download. Some compression utilities, such as WinZip
have additional features that
enable you to create compressed files that automatically
extract the content to a location you specify, and to
password the files, if desired.

177

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

4.

Click the course name to display its contents list.

To add the content to the class agenda, click the class name, and select the Agenda
tab.
Otherwise, remain on the contents list tab.

178

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

5.

At the bottom of the list, select Book (for Toolbook or Authorware content) or Director
Movie (for Director content) from the drop down list and click Add.

179

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The Edit tab for a new book or movie displays.

180

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

6.
7.

8.

9.

Enter a name and description for the content.

Enter the download location of the file, for example the URL for an FTP site on which your
content is stored, or the path on a network drive that everyone can access. This is the
location from which each student will get the file.
Enter the local location of the content.
Students can use this link once they have installed the file on their local computers. Enter
the location in which the file will be stored on the students local computers.
For Authorware/Toolbook books, leave the Run with selection box set to none. For
Director movies, leave the Run with selection box set to Director.

181

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

10. Click Save.

The Details tab for the book or movie displays, with the information you entered. The
download location is displayed as a clickable link.

11. Click Return to return to the contents list for that course.

182

Converting your Content for LearnLinc 8

To Learn More
To learn more about:

Please see:

Developing PowerPoint Presentations

Microsoft PowerPoint documentation

Developing HTML content

World Wide Web Consortiums HTML home page

at [Link]
John Decembers HTML station at

[Link]
Web Monkeys HTML teaching tool at http://

[Link]/webmonkey/teachingtool/
[Link]
Teach Yourself Web Publishing with HTML 4 in a week
by Laura Lemay
Developing ToolBook, Authorware, or
Director content for LearnLinc

LearnLinc Authoring Guide (included on the

LearnLinc Authoring Kit CD)
Asymetrix ToolBook, Macromedia Authorware, or
Macromedia Director documentation, respectively.

Next Steps
In this chapter, you have learned some basics for converting and distributing content to
LearnLinc students. To learn more about the courses and classes in which you will use your
content, please see:
Chapter 9, Creating Courses
Chapter 10, Scheduling Classes
To learn more about other types of resources, please see Chapter 11, Working with Resources.
To learn more about using content in the Whiteboard, please see Chapter 20, Collaborating
With Your Students on the Whiteboard.

183

8 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

184

Creating Courses 9

9
Creating Courses
This chapter explains how to create courses in the Virtual Campus.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Group related courses in the course catalog
Add a course to the course catalog
Make a private course
Register instructors and students for a course
Add resources to a course contents list
Add resources to a class agenda or autostart list
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is a course?
2. What do courses contain?
3. What does registering for a course mean?
4. How do authority levels affect access to courses?
5. How do students view courses?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concept:
Virtual Campus

Overview: Using LearnLinc on page 32.

185

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using courses effectively. Specifically,
you need to know:
What Is the Virtual Campus?
Where Is the Virtual Campus?
What Is a Course?
What Happens When a Student Registers for a Course?
Folders
Course Contents
The Student View

What Is the Virtual Campus?

The Virtual Campus is a web site that displays LearnLinc information and provides students
with a way to access courses and resources, and join classes. Administrators, authors, and
instructors can add, edit, and delete LearnLinc information in the Virtual Campus as well.
The Virtual Campus contains the:
start page
home page
course catalog
user directory
quick tour
download page
log-out page
Help

186

Creating Courses 9

The Start Page

When you navigate to the Virtual Campus, the start page displays.

By default, the start page has three options:

If you have an account, click Im a LearnLinc user and Id like to log-in to begin working
in to the Virtual Campus.
If you dont have an account, you can create your own account by clicking Id like to
create my own account and then begin working in the Virtual Campus.
If you want to view the course catalog without logging-in, click Id like to browse the
course catalog as a guest. You can see course information, but you cannot use course
resources or join classes.
Your LearnLinc administrator may choose to change the options on this page.

187

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Your Home Page

Your home page is personalized for you when you log-in. You always see the list: You are
taking the following courses:. In addition, if you are an instructor, author, or an administrator
you see the list: You are teaching the following courses: if you are registered to teach one or
more courses. Each course name is a link to more information.
The Course Catalog
The course catalog lists all available LearnLinc courses. Students and instructors can see more
information about, or register for, any course in the list. Authors and administrators can add
new courses to the course catalog as well.
User Directory
The user directory lists all the LearnLinc users in your organization. Students, instructors, and
authors can see information for anyone in the directory, and edit their own information and
password. Administrators can add, edit, and delete users and log-in groups as well.
Quick Tutorial
All users can take the quick tutorial to learn more about using the Virtual Campus and joining
classes.
Download Page
The download page provides links for downloading and installing the LearnLinc classroom
software. All users must download and install the classroom software before attempting to join
a LearnLinc class. By default the download page lists options for typical, advanced, and custom
installations. In addition, administrators can download the LearnLinc administration tool from
the download page. Your LearnLinc administrator may choose to change the options on this
page.
Log-out Page
The log-out page enables each user to exit the Virtual Campus and ensure that his or her
account cannot be used by others. As an added security measure, any account that is inactive
for approximately 15 minutes is automatically logged-out. This includes the time spent in the
virtual classroomif a user is in class for more than 15 minutes, he or she is automatically
logged-out of the Virtual Campus.

188

Creating Courses 9

Help
Online help is available to all users. Online help contains key concepts and detailed directions
for using the LearnLinc Virtual Campus, and for participating in a LearnLinc class.
Where Is the Virtual Campus?
The address, or URL, for your organizations Virtual Campus is decided by your LearnLinc
administrator, system administrator, or webmaster. The URL is the name of the computer on
which the LearnLinc server software is installed followed by the location of the Virtual Campus
files on that computer
For example, if the URL of the Virtual Campus is: [Link]
then the Virtual Campus is stored on the computer [Link] in a virtual
directory named learnlinc.
What Is a Course?
A course is a container for classes and resources. Instructors, authors, and administrators can
use courses to group related classes and resources in one location that is accessible to
LearnLinc students. Students must register for a course to be able to attend its classes and
access it resources.
Courses are stored in the Virtual Campus course catalog. Students can register for any course in
the course catalog. Instructors can add, edit, and delete classes and resources for any course for
which they are registered as an instructor, however they cannot create or delete courses.
Administrators and authors can create, edit, and delete courses, as well as add resources and
classes to them.
Courses may be either public or private. Public courses are available to all LearnLinc users in
the Course Catalog. Everyone can register for public courses. Private courses are not listed in
the course catalog. A LearnLinc administrator, author, or the course instructor must register
students for a private course. Once a student has been registered for a private course, it
displays on his or her home page.

189

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

A course has the following elements: a description, a course contents list, a people list, and a
threaded discussion. Students can access these elements by selecting a course from the course
catalog and clicking the Contents, People, and Discussion tabs. Administrators, authors,
and the course instructors have an Edit tab, and additional options on each tab, that they can
use to modify the course.

What Happens When a Student Registers for a Course?

When a student logs-in to the Virtual Campus, he or she can browse the Course Catalog and
register for any course in the catalog. Once the student registers for the course, he or she can
access all the resources and classes in the course, and the course is added to the course list on
his or her home page.
190

Creating Courses 9

The student can use the resources in the course contents list, and resources in any class
agendas in that course. In addition, the student can see a list of all the instructors for the
course, and all the students who are registered for the course. He or she can e-mail anyone
who is registered for the course, including the instructors, as long as that person has specified
an e-mail address in his or her user profile. Finally, the student can participate in group
discussions by e-mailing the entire class, or by joining in a threaded discussion.

Folders
Authors and administrators can group related courses by creating a folder in the course catalog,
and creating all the related courses in that folder. It is important to note that you must create
the folder first and then add the new course to ityou cannot move an existing course into a
folder.

If the course has auto register

turned on, so that all LearnLinc users are automatically
registered for the course, the
student list does not list each
user. Rather, the message
Everyone is automatically
registered for this course is
displayed.

Course Contents
Instructors, authors, and administrators can add classes and several types of course resources to
a course contents list. LearnLinc resources can be applications, audio clips, books, notes,
PowerPoint presentations, Q&A files, URLs, video clips, and whiteboard files. For a complete
description of each resource type, please see What Is a Resource? on page 234.
In addition, instructors and students can access course resources while in class, by displaying
the course resources list in the Agenda list.

191

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The Student View

Students see all the same course information that instructors, authors, and administrators see
with the exception of the edit functions. Students do not see the edit tab, nor do they see the
sort, add, or delete links and buttons on any tabs.

192

Creating Courses 9

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for creating and editing courses,
specifically:
Creating a Folder in the Course Catalog
Adding a Course to the Course Catalog
Registering Instructors for a Course
Registering Students for a Course
Adding Resources to a Course
Unless otherwise noted, information in the following screen shots is for example only. In some
cases, partial screen shots may be used, which represent part of a larger interface element,
rather than the entire interface. Partial screen shots are represented by jagged, tear off edges.

Creating a Folder in the Course Catalog

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator or author.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Go to the Course Catalog.
3. Click Add Folder.
4. Enter a name and click OK.

You must be a LearnLinc administrator or author to create a new folder in the course
catalog.

193

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

194

Click Course Catalog on the left menu bar.

The course catalog displays.

Creating Courses 9

3.

Scroll to the bottom of the list and click Add Folder.

The New Folder page displays.

195

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

4.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Go to the Course Catalog.
3. Click Add Course.
4. Enter the course information
and click Save.

196

Enter a name for the folder and click OK.

The information page for the folder displays with the message There are no courses
available.
To add a course to the folder, skip to step 4 of the following task Adding a course to
the course catalog.
To return to the course catalog, click Go up a level.

Adding a Course to the Course Catalog

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator or author.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator or author to create a course.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

Creating Courses 9

3.

Scroll to the bottom of the list and click Add Course.

The Edit tab for the new course displays.

4.

Enter a name, description, and home page for the course.

If you have created a web site for the course, or would like to direct students to a
particular site, enter its URL in the Home Page text box. The URL should take the form
of [Link] for example,
[Link]
If you have an ftp site on which you store content for students to download, enter its
URL in the Download text box. The URL should take the form of [Link]
foldername, for example, [Link]

197

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

6.

Clear the checkmark next to Show in the course catalog if you want to make the course
private.
Private courses do not display in the course catalog. An administrator, author, or an
instructor for the course must register each student individually. Once a student is
registered, the course displays in the course list on his or her home page.
Click Save.
The Contents tab for the new course displays with the information you entered.

To register instructors and students for the course, skip to step 4 of the following task
Registering instructors and students for a course.
To add resources to the course contents list, skip to step 4 of the task Adding
Resources to a Course on page 209.

198

Creating Courses 9

Registering Instructors for a Course

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator or author to register instructors for a course. Once
an instructor has been registered, he or she can register additional instructors and students.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Go to the Course Catalog.
3. Click the name for your
course.
4. Click People.
5. Click Add/Remove under
Instructors.
6. Click a group name.
7. Check each user you wish to
make an instructor.
8. Click Save.
9. Click Go up a level to
register instructors in other
groups, or Return to finish.

199

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

200

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

Creating Courses 9

4.

Click the People tab.

The instructor and student lists display.

201

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

202

Click Add/Remove, under Instructors.

A list of all log-in groups displays.

Creating Courses 9

6.

Click a group to display a list of all its users.

7.

Select an instructor or instructors by checking the box next to each name and click Save.
To choose more instructors from another group, click Go up a level.
To go back to the People tab, click Return. Skip to step 5 of the following section
Registering students for a course to continue.

203

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Go to the Course Catalog.
3. Click the name of your
course.
4. Click People.
5. Click Add/Remove under
Students.
6. Click a group name.
7. Check each user you wish to
register as a student.
8. Click Save.
9. Click Go up a level to
register students in other
groups, or Return to finish.

204

Registering Students for a Course

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or a registered instructor to register students
for a course.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

Creating Courses 9

3.

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

205

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

4.

Click the People tab.

The instructor and student lists display.

To register every user in the LearnLinc system for your course, Click Auto Register. Click
OK when the warning dialog displays to complete the auto registration. Skip to step 4
of Adding resources to a course or class to continue.
If you choose to Auto Register all users for the course, any individual
student registrations will be lost. Student email links, and the group
student email link are not available in Auto Register courses.
To select individual students to register for the course, Click Add/Remove under
Students. Continue with the rest of the steps in this section.

206

Creating Courses 9

A list of all log-in groups displays.

207

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

208

5.

Click a log-in group to display a list of all its users.

6.

Select students by checking the box next to each name and click Save.
To choose more students from another group, click Go up a level.
To go back to the People tab, click Return. Click the Contents tab and skip to step 4
of the following section Adding resources to a course or class to continue.

Creating Courses 9

Adding Resources to a Course

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor to add resources to
a course or its classes.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Go to the Course Catalog.
3. Click the name of your
course.
4. Select a resource from the
drop down list and click Add.
5. Enter the information for the
resource and click Save.

209

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

210

Click the name of the course you wish to work on.

The contents list for that course displays.

Creating Courses 9

4.

Scroll to the bottom of the page, select an item from the drop down list and click Add.
The edit page for the new resource displays.

5.

Enter the resource information and click Save to add it to the contents list.
If you selected Class, please see Adding a Class to a Course Contents List on
page 221.
If you selected PowerPoint, please see Uploading a PowerPoint File on page 159.
If you selected another resource, please see Adding a Resource to a Class Agenda or
Autostart List on page 243.

211

9 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Next Steps
To learn more about classes and resources, please see:
Chapter 10, Scheduling Classes
Chapter 11, Working with Resources

212

Scheduling Classes 10

10
Scheduling Classes
This chapter explains the process of scheduling classes in the Virtual Campus.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Schedule a class by adding it to a course contents list
Select assistant instructors for the class
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is a class?
2. What is floor control?
3. What are the audio and video conferencing options?
4. What is an assistant instructor?
5. What are the classroom security options?
6. How do students access classes?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
Virtual Campus

What Is the Virtual Campus? on page 186.

Creating Courses

Creating Courses on page 185.

213

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are completing all the necessary tasks for
scheduling a class. Specifically, you need to know:
What Is the Virtual Classroom?
Floor Control
Audio and Video Conferencing
Bandwidth
Streaming Video
Assistant Instructors
Classroom Security
The Student View

What Is the Virtual Classroom?

The Virtual Classroom is an online meeting space in which students, an instructor, and assistant
instructors can communicate, interact, and collaborate using a variety of classroom tools.
You enter the Virtual Classroom by registering for a course in the Virtual Campus and joining
one of its classes. If that course contains any classes, you can join its classes. To join a class,
you must have the LearnLinc classroom software installed on your computer.
When you join a class your classroom software makes a connection to the LearnLinc server and
remains connected throughout the class, so that you can communicate with the other students
and your instructor. Your connection to the server is a channel through which you can send
information, such as text chat messages or audio conferencing, to the class and receive their
information back.
Once you join a class, you receive information about it in real timejust as if you were in a
traditional classroom. If another student sends a text chat message, you see it immediately. If
the instructor or floor holder speaks to the class, you hear him or her as if you were sitting in
the same room with them.
To participate in a class, you use the tools in the LearnLinc palette. The LearnLinc palette
displays on the left side of each users computer screen as he or she joins a class. The
LearnLinc palette displays class information such as the class and agenda lists. In addition, you
can access all of the class tools from the LearnLinc palette or its menus. For more information
about the LearnLinc palette, please see The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.

214

Scheduling Classes 10

Floor Control
Floor control is a format, or style of presentation, that is assigned to a class when it is
scheduled. LearnLinc classes can be in one of two floor control formats: instructor led or open
discussion. For both of these formats only one person can be the floor holder at a time. The
floor holder, the person who has the floor, controls audio or video conferencing and any
applications and content that are in use. The floor holder can launch and close applications
and content for everyone in the class.
In instructor led floor control classes, the instructor takes the floor automatically when he or
she joins the class. The instructor can pass the floor to any student and take the floor back at
any time. Instructor led floor control works well for large and/or lecture based classes, or
classes that are a combination of lecture and interaction.
In open discussion classes, the instructor has no more control of the floor than any other
student in the class. Anyone can take the floor at any time, although using the hand raise
function helps to ensure order for the class. Open discussion floor control works well for small,
highly interactive classes or meetings.
Audio and Video Conferencing
Your organization may choose to add audio or video conferencing to your Virtual Classroom.
The audio and video conferencing options are:
Data only
Internet audio
Multicast audio
Indeo Multicast video
H.323 Multicast video
If you use any of the LearnLinc audio or video conferencing options in your class they will be
seamlessly incorporated into the LearnLinc palette. However, your organization must have
purchased licences for that conferencing option for it to be used in your class. You can check
the ServerInfo page to see which types of conferencing licences, if any, your organization has
purchased and installed. To learn more about the ServerInfo page, please see Checking Your
Server Licenses on page 53. Brief descriptions of each of the conferencing options follow.
Data Only
Classes that do not use LearnLinc audio or video conferencing are data only. Some
organizations choose the data only option and supplement it with phone conferencing,
satellite video, or other third party conferencing options.
215

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Internet Audio
If your classes connect over the Internet or an intranet you can use Internet audio in your class.
Internet audio enables two-way audio conferencing in classes in which students have low
bandwidth connections to the LearnLinc server.
Note that if you schedule an Internet Audio class with the Low bandwidth
setting, everyone in the class must have a minimum of a Pentium II 233 processor
to achieve lower bandwidths while retaining audio quality. If you choose Low
and your users do not meet these requirements, their audio conferencing will
sound garbled and may be unusable. If you are unsure if your users meet the
higher system requirements, choose Medium bandwidth which works with
lower processor speeds (as outlined in the System Requirements for Unicast
Audio Conferencing on page 20).

Multicast Audio
If your classes connect over an intranet, a local area network (LAN), or wide area network
(WAN) you can use Multicast audio to add two-way audio conferencing to your classes.
Multicast audio requires a dedicated amount of bandwidth, but that amount does not change,
regardless of the number of students in your class.
Indeo Multicast Video
If your classes are connected by an intranet, a local area network (LAN), or wide area network
(WAN) you can use Indeo Multicast video to add two-way video conferencing to your classes.
Multicast video requires a dedicated amount of bandwidth, but that amount does not change,
regardless of the number of students in your class.
Indeo Multicast video requires that your users have Intel ProShare 150, 200, or 400 hardware
and software installed on their computers.
H.323 Multicast Video
If your classes connect over an intranet, a local area network (LAN), or wide area network
(WAN) you can use H.323 Multicast video to add two-way video conferencing to your classes.
Multicast video requires a dedicated amount of bandwidth, but that amount does not change,
regardless of the number of students in your class. H.323 Multicast video requires that your
users have Intel ProShare 500 hardware and software installed on their computers.

216

Scheduling Classes 10

Bandwidth
Each user must have a certain amount of bandwidth available in their connection to the
LearnLinc server to participate in a LearnLinc class. The amount of bandwidth required
depends on the type of activities taking place in class, and the type of conferencing that is in
use.
The figures listed in the following table represent average bandwidth usage based on the class
bandwidth setting that you choose when you schedule the class. The averages listed assume
that you are using the conferencing type selected and AppShare. If you are not using
AppShare, your bandwidth requirements drop significantly.
Note that the basic LearnLinc connection uses very little bandwidth but that some LearnLinc
activities, such as launching the synchronized web browser, displaying a large image in the
Whiteboard, or a lot of AppShare activity may cause your bandwidth usage to peak
temporarily.

kbps is an acronym for kilobits

per second. Your modem has
a certain speed associated
with it, for example, 28.8 kbps
or 56 kbps, however that number indicates the fastest connection that your modem is
capable ofyou may actually
connect at a slower rate. Refer
to your modem documentation to determine your connection speed during a
LearnLinc class.

This table shows average bandwidths for normal use. Bandwidth will
fluctuate dramatically depending on your actions. For best
performance, networks should be designed to handle bandwidth
peaks.
Bandwidth Conferencing
setting
type

You need an average bandwidth of:

Low

Data only

Medium

Data only

High

Data only

Low

Internet Audio

14 Kbps per student

You will have grayscale AppShare with acceptable performance.
20 Kbps per student
You will have grayscale AppShare with good performance.
32 Kbps per student
You will have color AppShare with good performance.
28 Kbps per student
(6 Kbps audio + 22 Kbps Data)
You will have acceptable audio conferencing and grayscale AppShare
with good performance. Note that Internet audio users must have
Intel Pentium II 233 processors or higher to achieve lower
bandwidths while retaining audio quality.

217

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

218

Bandwidth Conferencing
setting
type

You need an average bandwidth of:

Medium

Internet Audio

High

Internet Audio

Low

Multicast Audio

Medium

Multicast Audio

High

Multicast Audio

Low

Indeo Multicast
Video1

28 Kbps per student

(12 Kbps audio + 16 Kbps Data)
You will have good audio conferencing and grayscale AppShare with
acceptable performance.
44 Kbps per student
(12 Kbps audio + 32 Kbps Data)
You will have good audio conferencing and color AppShare with
good performance.
6 Kbps per class for Audio and 22 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 446 Kbps:
22 Kbps (20) + 6 Kbps = 446 Kbps)
You will have good audio conferencing and grayscale AppShare with
acceptable performance. Note that multicast audio users must have
Intel Pentium II 233 processors or higher to achieve lower
bandwidths while retaining audio quality.
12 Kbps per class for Audio and 16 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 332 Kbps:
16 Kbps (20) + 12 Kbps = 332 Kbps)
You will have good audio conferencing and grayscale AppShare with
good performance.
36 Kbps per class for Audio and 32 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 676 Kbps:
32 Kbps (20) + 36 Kbps = 676 Kbps)
You will have very good audio conferencing and color AppShare with
good performance.
282 Kbps per class for Audio and 22 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 722 Kbps:
22 Kbps (20) + 282 Kbps = 722 Kbps)
You will have good video conferencing at 6 frames per second and
grayscale AppShare with acceptable performance.

Scheduling Classes 10

Bandwidth Conferencing
setting
type

You need an average bandwidth of:

Medium

Indeo Multicast
Video1

High

Indeo Multicast
Video1

Low

H.323 Multicast
Video2

Medium

H.323 Multicast
Video2

High

H.323 Multicast
Video2

340 Kbps per class for Audio and 16 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 660Kbps:
16 Kbps (20) + 339.6 Kbps = 660 Kbps)
You will have good video conferencing at 6 frames per second and
grayscale AppShare with good performance.
607 Kbps per class for Audio and 32 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 1247 Kbps:
32 Kbps (20) + 607 Kbps = 1247Kbps)
You will have good video conferencing at 12 frames per second and
color AppShare with good performance.
50 Kbps per class for Video and 22 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 490 Kbps:
22 kbps (20) + 50 Kbps = 490 Kbps)
You will have acceptable video conferencing at 6 frames per second
and grayscale AppShare with acceptable performance.
172 Kbps per class for Video and 16 Kbps per student for Data
(ex. A 20 person class would need 492 Kbps:
16 Kbps (20) + 172 Kbps = 492 Kbps)
You will have good video conferencing at 6 frames per second and
grayscale AppShare with good performance.
463 Kbps per class and 32 Kbps per student for AppShare
(ex. A 20 person class would need 1103 Kbps:
32 Kbps (20) + 463 Kbps = 1103 Kbps)
You will have very good video conferencing at 12 frames per second
and color AppShare with good performance.

1. For Indeo video, note that only the audio quality is affected by the low and medium

bandwidth settingsvideo quality remains the same.

2. For H.323 video, the bandwidth setting affects both the audio and video quality.

219

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Streaming Video
You can use streaming video over the Internet or on an intranet with limited bandwidth as an
alternative to multicast video. Streaming video is useful in classes in which students have low
bandwidth connections to the LearnLinc server, but live, one way video from the instructor is
important to the success of the class.
Streaming live, one-way video to the class requires a Microsoft NetShow or RealVideo server
and an additional computer for the instructor to run the streaming video encoder. Please see
Adding Streaming Video to Your LearnLinc Server on page 101 for detailed directions.
Assistant Instructors
Assistant instructors are students who have some extra privileges during class. These privileges
enable an assistant to manage the background activities of the classroom, such as monitoring
text chat, feedback responses, and hand raises so that the instructor is free to concentrate on
presenting new content to the class. A class can have one or several assistant instructors, or
none at all. Assistant instructors are assigned to a class when it is scheduled.
The assistant instructors palette is identical to the instructors, with the exception of the
following, which are only available to instructors:
Glimpse and Privacy shortcuts on the Agenda tab
Floor control buttons (pass floor, take floor, dismiss attendee, all hands down)
Classroom Security
To prevent unauthorized students from entering your class, you can set an entering password
when you schedule the class. When students attempt to join the class, they are prompted with
a password dialog, and cannot join the class unless they supply the correct password. If you
password protect a class, you must supply the password to students via email or other means.
Additionally, you may choose to display an entering message for your class. Students do not
see the message until after they have entered the password, if one has been set. Your message
might contain the number for a phone conference if your class is data only, support contact
information, or a simple welcome message.
The Student View
Once a student has registered for a course, he or she can see information about the classes in
that course. For each class, students can see a description, start and end times, instructor and
student lists, and the agenda list. Students can join any class within 30 minutes of its start time.

220

Scheduling Classes 10

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks for scheduling a class, specifically:
Adding a Class to a Course Contents List
Selecting Assistant Instructors for the Class

Adding a Class to a Course Contents List

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Select a course from the
course catalog.
3. On the Contents tab,
select Class from the
drop-down box and click
Add.
4. Enter the class information
and click Save.

You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor for a course to add
classes to it.

221

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

222

Click Course Catalog.

The course catalog displays.

Scheduling Classes 10

3.

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

223

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

224

4.

Scroll to the bottom of the list, select Class from the drop down list and click Add.
The Edit page for the new class displays.

5.

Enter the following class information:

Enter a name and description for the class. Students see this information in the Course
Catalog.
Select an instructor from the Instructor drop down box. You can choose one person
from the registered instructors for the course.
Select either instructor led or open discussion floor control policy from the Floor
policy drop down box.

Scheduling Classes 10

Select an Audio/Video conferencing option for the class.

Reminder! Your organization must have purchased licences for a
conferencing option to use it in class. If you select an option for which
you do not have licences, everyone will see an error stating that there
are not enough licences to participate in conferencing for the class.
Select a bandwidth option. The bandwidth setting does not affect Data Only classes. For
Internet Audio classes choose Low or Medium. Medium and High produce the
same results for Internet Audio classes. For Multicast Audio or Video classes choose
from Low, Medium and High. High is the best quality, but uses the most
bandwidth as well.
Please note that if you schedule an Internet Audio class with the
Low bandwidth setting, everyone in the class must have a
minimum of a Pentium II 233 processor to achieve lower
bandwidths while retaining audio quality. If you choose Low and
your users do not meet these requirements, their audio
conferencing will sound garbled and may be unusable. If you are
unsure if your users meet the higher system requirements, choose
Medium bandwidth which works with lower processor speeds (as
outlined in the System Requirements for Unicast Audio
Conferencing on page 20).

If you set starting and ending

times for the class, users cannot join it until 30 minutes
prior to its scheduled start
time.

Set the class starting and ending times, or choose Class is always open. Classes with
starting and ending times expire after the ending timepeople in the class can
continue working, but no one else can join. Classes that are always open never expire.
The times displayed on this page reflect the time zone of the LearnLinc
server. If your time zone is different than the server time zone, adjust
your time to match that of the server time zone, and then enter the
adjusted values in the time fields.
If desired, check Display message when joining class and enter a message.
If desired, check Password protect class and enter a password.

225

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

6.

Click Save.
The Details tab for the class displays, with the information you entered.

To add an assistant instructor to the class, skip to step 5 in the following topic Selecting
Assistant Instructors for the Class.
To add resources to the class agenda or autostart list, please see Adding a Resource to
a Class Agenda or Autostart List on page 243.

226

Scheduling Classes 10

Selecting Assistant Instructors for the Class

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor for a course to add
assistants to one of its classes
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Select a course from the
course catalog.
3. On the Contents tab,
select a class by clicking on
its name.
4. Click the Assistants tab.
5. Click Add/Remove.
6. Click a log-in group name to
see its users.
7. Check each user that you
wish to make an assistant
and click Save.

227

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

228

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

Scheduling Classes 10

4.

Click a class name to see the details for that class.

The class details page displays.

229

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

230

Click the Assistants tab.

The assistants list displays, with the message There are no assistants for this class.

Scheduling Classes 10

6.

Click Add/Remove.
A list of all the instructors and students who are registered for the course display.

7.

Select assistants by checking the box next to the name of each assistant and click Save.
To go back to the Assistants tab, click Return.
To add resources to the class agenda or autostart list, please see Working with
Resources on page 233.

Next Steps
In this chapter, you learned how to schedule a class. To learn more about resources please see
Chapter 11, Working with Resources.

231

10 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

232

Working with Resources 11

11
Working with Resources
This chapter explains the process for adding training resources to the Virtual Campus and
Virtual Classroom.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Add a resource to a course contents list
Add a resource to a class agenda or autostart list
Sort items in a course contents or class agenda list
Remove a resource from a course contents or class agenda list
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is a resource?
2. What are the resource types?
3. Who can add a resource to a course or class?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
the Virtual Campus

What Is the Virtual Campus? on page 186.

the Virtual Classroom

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on

page 318.

Courses

What Is a Course? on page 189.

233

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are adding the resources to courses and
classes correctly. Specifically, you need to know:
What Is a Resource?
Who Can Add a Resource to a Course or Class?
What if the Same Resource Is Used in Multiple Courses or Classes?
The Student View

What Is a Resource?
A resource is a training material that has been added to a LearnLinc course or class. The
LearnLinc resource types are: applications, audio clips, video clips, multimedia books, Director
movies, URLs, Whiteboard files, and recorded classroom files. Any of these resources can be
added to a LearnLinc course contents list, class agenda, or autostart list. A description of each
resource type follows.
Applications
LearnLinc has several classroom tools, or applications, including: AppShare, AppView, Glimpse,
Q&A, Streaming Video, Synchronized Web Browser, and Whiteboard. While you can add any
LearnLinc application to a course contents list, most LearnLinc applications are meant for
classroom use only. The exceptions are Q&A, Whiteboard and Streaming Video, which can be
used outside of the virtual classroom to create or view files before class, and are more likely to
be included in a course contents list.
Audio Clips
An audio clip is a digital audio file. When a user clicks on an audio clip link in the Virtual
Campus, the clip plays in Windows Media Player.
Books
A book is a multimedia file that contains a combination of text, sound, still and motion pictures,
animations, and/or other media formats. For LearnLinc, these books should be created in either
Asymetrix ToolBook or Macromedia Authorware so that they can be synchronized in LearnLinc
classes. You can add these books to a course contents or agenda list so that students can
download them before class for stand alone use, or so that they can use them in
synchronization with their instructor during class. Books are used primarily in class.
234

Working with Resources 11

Director Movies
A Director movie is a multimedia file that contains a combination of text, sound, still and
motion pictures, animations, and/or other media formats. These movies are created in
Macromedia Director and can be synchronized in LearnLinc classes. You can add these movies
to a course contents or agenda list so that students can download them before class for stand
alone use, or so that they can use them in synchronization with their instructor during class.
Director movies are used primarily in class.
Notes
A note is a text item that displays in the Virtual Campus. You can add notes that contain
important information about a course and its contents, or you can create an HTML link to a
web page as the contents of your note. Notes are limited to 129 characters. Notes are almost
always used outside of class.
PowerPoint Presentations
When you add a PowerPoint presentation to a course or class it is converted to a set of web
pages and it displays in the list as a URL. When you click on a PowerPoint link in the Virtual
Campus, a new web browser opens and displays the presentation. PowerPoint presentations
work equally well inside and outside of class.
Q&A Files
You can add a Q&A question file to the list for your students to use as preview or review for
your classes. Students can use the Q&A question editor, which is installed with the LearnLinc
classroom software, to view the questions and their answers. It is more likely, however, that
you would add the question list to a class agenda, and use it during class.
Recorded Classroom Files
A recorded classroom file is a recording that you make of one of your classes using the
LearnLinc Classroom Recorder. The Classroom Recorder captures all classroom activity,
including audio, video, text chat, and any actions on the classroom workspace. When you click
the class recording in your course contents list, the file plays in the LearnLinc Classroom Player.

235

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

URLs
You can use URLs to add links to web pages to your course contents list, class agenda, or
autostart list. When you click on a URL link, a new web browser window opens and displays
the web page. Note that users who are outside your organizations network cannot access
content on your intranet. URLs work equally well inside and outside of class.
Video Clips
A video clip is a digital video file. When you click on a video clip link in the Virtual Campus,
the clip plays in Windows Media Player. Video clips work equally well inside and outside of
class.
Whiteboard Files
A whiteboard file may contain text, simple graphics, and pictures. When you click on a
whiteboard link, the whiteboard file opens in the LearnLinc whiteboard. You can view and edit
the file on your own and during class. If you edit the file, you must save it on your local
computer. Whiteboard files are usually used in class.
Can I Hide Selected Resources from Students?
LearnLinc 4.5 enables you to make resources that are listed in a course contents list, class
agenda, or the library private by adding the characters @> before the resources name. Doing so
hides the resource from students, and indicates to those who can see it that the resource is
private.
To make a resource private, you must be registered as an instructor for the course that contains
the resource, or be an author or administrator.
The following list outlines which users can see private resources and under what circumstances
they can see them.
Students can never see private resources.
An instructor for a course can see any private resources in that courses contents list or any
of its classes agendas in both the Virtual Campus and the Virtual Classroom.
An assistant instructor can see any private resources for classes in which he or she is
registered as an assistant. The assistant can only see private resources for those classes in
the Virtual Campus. However, once the assistant joins a class, he or she can see private
resources in both that class agenda and the course contents list.

236

Working with Resources 11

Authors and administrators can see private resources in all courses and classes in the Virtual
Campus. They can only see private resources in the Virtual Classroom if they are registered
as the instructor or an assistant for that class.

Who Can Add a Resource to a Course or Class?

LearnLinc authors and administrators can add, edit, or delete resources in any course or class in
the Virtual Campus. LearnLinc instructors can add, edit, or delete resources in any courses for
which they are registered instructors.
What if the Same Resource Is Used in Multiple Courses or Classes?
When you are adding resources to a course or a class in the Virtual Campus, you must always
create the resource in the contents list or agenda in which you wish to store it. For example, if
you have a book that will be used in multiple classes, you must create a book in each class
agenda for that book. In most cases it is much more efficient to add the book to the course
contents list, and switch the agendas drop down box to Course resources to access the
resource during class.
The exception to this rule is applications. Using the Administration tool, your administrator can
add an application to selection list that displays when you choose to add an application to a
course or class.
Directions for adding an application to the list follow in the Detailed Directions section of this
chapter.
The Student View
Students can use resources in the Virtual Campus before and after classes, and use them during
class. They can launch a resource from the class agenda for their own use, or the instructor can
launch a resource for them, and synchronize his or her use of the resource with the class.
Students cannot create, edit, or delete resources.

237

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks for adding a resource to a course or
class, specifically:
Adding a Resource to a Course Contents List
Adding a Resource to a Class Agenda or Autostart List
Making a Resource Private
Editing a Resource
Sorting Items in a Course Contents or Class Agenda List
Removing a Resource from a Course Contents, Class Agenda, or Autostart List
Adding an Application to the Application Selection List
Quick Steps

Adding a Resource to a Course Contents List

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.

1. Log-in to the Virtual

Campus.
2. Select a course from the
course catalog.
3. Select a resource from the
drop down box and click
Add.
4. Enter the resources
information and click Save.

You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor for a course to add
resources to it or one of its classes.

238

Working with Resources 11

2.

Click Course Catalog.

The course catalog displays.

239

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

240

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

Working with Resources 11

4.

Scroll down, select a resource type from the drop down box and click Add.

241

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

The edit page for the new resource displays.

Enter the resource information and click Save. Please see the detailed directions for
creating each resource type in the following sections:
Audio Clips, Books, Director Movies, Q&A Files, Video Clips, and Whiteboard Files on
page 248
URLs on page 250
Applications on page 251
Notes on page 253

242

Working with Resources 11

Adding a Resource to a Class Agenda or Autostart List

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor for a course to add
resources to one of its classes.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

3.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Select a course from the
course catalog.
3. Click on a class name and
select its Agenda tab.
4. Select a resource from the
drop down box and click
Add.
5. Enter the resources
information and click Save.
6. Click Return.

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

243

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

244

Working with Resources 11

4.

Click the name of the class on which you wish to work.

The details for that class display.

5.

Click the Agenda tab.

The agenda and autostart lists display, with the messages There is nothing in the agenda
for this class., and There is nothing in the autostart list for this class..

245

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

6.

246

Select an item from either the agenda drop down box or the autostart drop down box and
click Add.

Working with Resources 11

The edit page for the new resource displays.

7.

Enter the information for the resource and click Save. Detailed directions for creating each
resource type follow in the sections:
Audio Clips, Books, Director Movies, Q&A Files, Video Clips, and Whiteboard Files on
page 248
URLs on page 250
Applications on page 251
Notes on page 253
Recorded Classroom Files in Chapter 16, Recording Classes

247

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Audio Clips, Books, Director Movies, Q&A Files, Video Clips, and Whiteboard Files
1. Enter a descriptive name for the resource.
2. Enter a short description of the resource.
If the resource is a downloadable file, you may wish to enter download instructions in the
description field.
3. Enter a location and/or download location for the resource.
If the file is (or will be) installed on a local or shared drive, enter the path in the
Location field. For example, m:\training\lit\[Link]. Doing so creates a link that
students can use to launch the file from that location.
If the file must be downloaded and installed prior to use, enter the information in the
Download field. For example, [Link] Doing so
creates a link that students can use to download and install the file before class.

248

Working with Resources 11

4.

5.

If desired, select an application to run the resource.

For audio or video clips the default application is Streaming Video. Leave the default
unless you have another application with which you wish to run the clip.
For books the default is None. Do not change the default.
For Director movies the default is Director. Do not change the default.
For Q&A files the default application is Q&A. Do not change the default.
For whiteboard files, the default application is Whiteboard. Do not change the default.
Click Save to save the resource, and click Return to return to the agenda list.

249

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

URLs
1. Enter a descriptive name and a short description for the URL.
2. Enter the web address in the Location field.
The location can be an address on the Internet, for example
[Link] or a location on your intranet, for example
[Link]

3.

4.

250

If desired, select an application with which to view the URL.

The default is Synchronized Web Browser. If you have added another browser
application to the course, you may choose to launch the URL in that browser instead.
Click Save to save the resource, and then click Return to return to the agenda list.

Working with Resources 11

Applications
If you select an application from the drop down box, click Continue to add it and return to
the Agenda list.
If you select Other from the list, the Edit tab for the new application displays.

1.

2.

When you add a LearnLinc

application to a list the details
page has no information in it
because the application is
installed locally on each users
computer. You cannot launch
the application in the Virtual
Campus, but you can click on
the application in the Agenda
list during class, and the application will launch. To enable
students to use Q&A or
Whiteboard outside of class,
add a Q&A or whiteboard file
to the list instead of the
application.

Enter a descriptive name and a short description of the application.

If the application is a downloadable file, you may wish to enter download instructions in
the description field.
Enter a location and/or download address for the resource.
If the file is (or will be) installed on a local or shared drive, enter the path in the
Location field. For example, m:\training\lit\[Link]. Doing so creates a link that
students can use to launch the file from that location.
If the file must be downloaded and installed prior to use, enter the information in the
Download field. For example, [Link] Doing so
creates a link that students can use to download and install the file before class.

251

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

252

Click Save to save the application, and then click Return to return to the agenda list.

Working with Resources 11

Notes
1. Enter a descriptive name for the note.
2. Enter the text of the note in the Contents field. Notes can have a maximum of 129
characters.

To put an HTML link to

another web page in the note,
use the following format:
<a href=[Link]
[Link]>Text for link
</a>

When you add a note to a class agenda, students can read it in the
Virtual Campus, however only the tile of the note can be seen in the
agenda list during class. Notes do not work in the autostart list.
3.

Click Save to save the resource, and then click Return to return to the agenda list.

253

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Locate the resource in your
course contents list or class
agenda.
2. Click on the resources
name.
3. Click the Edit tab.
4. Type @> before the first
letter of the resource name.
5. Click Save.

Making a Resource Private

1. Locate the resource in your courses contents list or class agenda.
If you are an instructor, you must be registered to teach the course to make its resources
private.
2. Click on the resources name.
The resources details page displays.

3.

254

Click the Edit tab.

The edit fields for the resource information display.

Working with Resources 11

4.

5.

In the Name field, type the characters @> before the resource name.
For example, if the resource name is Welcome Book, change it to @>Welcome Book
making sure not to type a space between > and W.
Click Save to save your changes.
Students cannot see the private resource in the course contents list, class agenda list, or the
library, however it will still be visible to registered instructors and assistants, and authors
and administrators. Note that assistant instructors cannot see private resources in the
course contents list when they are in the Virtual Campus.

255

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Select a course from the
course catalog.
3. Locate the resource.
4. Click the resource name,
then click the Edit tab.
5. Edit the resources
information as desired and
click Save.
6. Click Return.

256

Editing a Resource
1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor for a course to edit
its resources, or its class resources.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

Working with Resources 11

3.

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

4.

If the resource is in a class agenda or autostart list, click the class name in the course
contents list, and then click the class Agenda tab.

257

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

258

Click the resource name to display its details tab.

Working with Resources 11

6.

Click the Edit tab to display the edit fields for the resource.

7.
8.

Make the desired changes and click Save.

Click Return to return to the list.

259

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Select a course from the
course catalog.
3. Locate the resource.
4. Click its up or down arrows
to sort it in the list.

Sorting Items in a Course Contents or Class Agenda List

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor for a course to edit
it, or its classes.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

3.

260

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays, with up and down sort arrows next to each item.

Working with Resources 11

4.

Click the up or down arrows for the item you wish to move.
The item moves one position for each click. Wait for the item to move after each click.

261

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Select a course from the
course catalog.
3. Locate the resource.
4. Click delete next to its
name.
5. Click OK.

262

Removing a Resource from a Course Contents, Class Agenda, or Autostart List

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus as an administrator, author, or instructor.
You must be a LearnLinc administrator, author, or registered instructor for a course to
delete its resources, or its class resources.
2. Click Course Catalog.
The course catalog displays.

Working with Resources 11

3.

Click the name of the course on which you wish to work.

The contents list for that course displays.

4.

Click delete next to the item you wish to remove.

A warning dialog displays with the message Are you sure you want to delete this item?

5.

Click OK to delete the item.

263

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Adding an Application to the Application Selection List

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Administration Tool, from the Windows taskbar.

1. Select Start > Programs >

LearnLinc > Administration
Tool, from the windows
taskbar.
2. Log-in to the Administration
tool.
3. Select the Resource >
Application folders.
4. Select New > Resource >
Application from the menu
bar.
5. Type a name for the
authority level and press
<Enter>.
6. Enter the applications
properties and click OK.

The Administration tool launches on your computer.

2.

264

Enter your account information.

You must have administrator authority to use the Administration tool.

Working with Resources 11

3.

4.
5.

6.
7.

Enter your server name.

Your server name is the domain name or IP address for your LearnLinc server computer.
For example, [Link]. Do not include the virtual directory for your
LearnLinc Virtual Campus.
If you are using a web proxy server to connect to the Internet, check Use Proxy and
enter the server name and port of your web proxy server.
Click Log-in.
The Administration tool displays.

In the left pane, click the plus box (+) next to the Resource folder to expand it.
Click the Application folder to view its contents in the right pane.

You must create the new application in the Application folder to

make it display in the application selection list in the Virtual Campus.
Do not create the application in a folder under the Application
folder or another folder in the Name Service.

265

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

8.

Select New > Resource > Application.

9. A new application icon displays in the right pane of the Administration tool.
10. Enter a name for the new authority level by replacing the highlighted text and press
<Enter>.
11. The property sheet for the new application displays.
Enter a descriptive name for the application in the Name field. This is the name users
will see in the application list in the Virtual Campus.
Enter a path to the applications executable file or click the folder icon to locate it. Note
that the application must be installed in that location on every users computer for the
application to launch in LearnLinc.
If desired, enter prefix or suffix information to affect how the application launches.
If desired, check base path to use the LearnLinc base path or a base path that you
have created.
If desired, enter additional attributes such as copyright information.
12. Click OK to save the new application.
The application will appear in the application selection list the next time you log-in to the
Virtual Campus and attempt to add an application to a course or class.

266

Working with Resources 11

Next Steps
In this chapter, you learned how to add, edit, sort, and delete resources in the Virtual Campus.
To learn more about using resources in a LearnLinc class, please see:
Chapter 15, Teaching a Class
Chapter 18, Using Multimedia Content During Class
Chapter 19, Synchronizing Web Content
Chapter 20, Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard
Chapter 21, Sharing Applications With the Class
Chapter 23, Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

267

11 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

268

Teaching LearnLinc
Classes
The Teaching LearnLinc Classes section of this guide contains concepts and tasks that
are important to LearnLinc instructors. If you are a LearnLinc instructor, or you perform any of
the following tasks for LearnLinc, please read this section.
Chapter 12

Visiting the Virtual Campus

page 271

Chapter 13

Working With Courses

page 289

Chapter 14

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class

page 305

Chapter 15

Teaching a Class

page 317

Chapter 16

Recording Classes

page 341

Chapter 17

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

page 365

Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

Chapter 21

Sharing Applications With the Class

page 413

Chapter 22

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

page 439

Chapter 23

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

page 445

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

269

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

270

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

12
Visiting the Virtual Campus
This chapter explains the benefits and use of the LearnLinc Virtual Campus web site. Your
organization can use the Virtual Campus web site to make LearnLinc courses, classes,
resources, and information accessible to all users.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Find your Virtual Campus
Find courses you are teaching
Log-in to the Virtual Campus
Locate information about a user
Edit your user profile and password
Register for a course
Drop a course
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is the Virtual Campus?
2. Where is the Virtual Campus?
3. Who can use the Virtual Campus, and what can they do?
4. What do students see in the Virtual Campus?

271

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
The Virtual Campus

What Is the Virtual Campus? on page 186.

The difference between the

Internet and an intranet

The Difference Between the Internet and an Intranet on

page 386.

web browsing

Your Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator

documentation.

URL

Definition on page 384.

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using the Virtual Campus to its full
potential. Specifically, you need to know:
Authority Levels and the Virtual Campus
The student view

An authority level is a LearnLinc setting that determines

what information users can
access and edit. Each LearnLinc user is assigned an authority level when his or her
account is created. The default
authority levels are self register,
participant, instructor, author,
and administrator.

272

Authority Levels and the Virtual Campus

The following table illustrates the tasks that LearnLinc users can perform, based on the default
LearnLinc authority levels.
Authority level

Activities in the Virtual Campus

Self register

By default, users who self register (create their own accounts) can perform the
same tasks as participants.

Participant (Student)

Browse course catalog and user directory

Change personal profile information and password
Register for courses
Use course and class materials
Email course instructors and students
Participate in the course discussion list
Join classes

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

Authority level

Activities in the Virtual Campus

Instructor

In addition to the participant tasks, instructors can perform the following tasks
in courses for which they are registered instructors:
Add resources and classes to the course contents list
Register users for their courses
Edit the course information and display properties
Edit classes, agendas, and autostart lists
Delete items from the course contents list and class agenda
Record classes

Author

In addition to the participant and instructor tasks, authors can:

Add, edit, and delete courses in the course catalog
Add, edit, and delete items in any course contents list, class agenda, or
autostart list
Record classes

Administrator

Administrators can perform all participant, instructor, and author tasks. In

addition, administrators can:
add, edit, or delete log-in groups, users, and authority levels
use the Administration tool
Record classes

The student view

Generally, students have either self register or participant authority levels. The previous
table outlines the tasks that users with either of these authority levels can perform. While
students see all the same information as those with higher authority levels, they do not have
access to the edit functions for any items other than their own user accounts.

273

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for using the Virtual Campus,
specifically:
Finding Your Virtual Campus
Logging-in to Your Virtual Campus
Locating Information About Another User
Editing Your User Profile and Password
Registering for and Dropping Courses
Quick Steps
1. Ask your LearnLinc
administrator for the Virtual
Campus URL.
2. Use your web browser to go
to that URL.

274

Finding Your Virtual Campus

1. Contact your LearnLinc administrator to get the URL of your organizations Virtual Campus.
The URL of your Virtual Campus is specific to your organization.
2. Launch your web browser.
You can use either Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 w/sp 1 or higher, or Netscape
Navigator 4.05 or higher to visit the Virtual Campus.
3. Type the URL and press <Enter> to navigate to your Virtual Campus.
For Internet Explorer, type the URL in the Address field. For Navigator, type the URL in
the Location field.

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

Logging-in to Your Virtual Campus

1. Launch your web browser and navigate to your Virtual Campus.
The Virtual Campus welcome page displays.

Quick Steps
1. Go to your Virtual Campus.
2. Click Im a LearnLinc user
and Id like to log-in.
3. Enter your account
information and click Login.

275

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

Click I'm a LearnLinc user and I'd like to log-in.

The log-in page displays.

If you do not have an account, do not click I'd like to create my own
LearnLinc account.. If you do, the account you create will have selfregister permissions only. You will not be able to instruct, author, or
administer in LearnLinc. Your LearnLinc administrator must create an
account for you. If you are the LearnLinc administrator, you can use the
default administrator account to log-in and create new accounts for
yourself and others. Please see Log-in as an Administrator on page 76
for information regarding the default administrator account.

276

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

3.

Enter your log-in name, group, and password in the appropriate fields and click Login.
If your entered your account information incorrectly, the log-in page displays again,
prompting you to re-enter your information.
If you entered your account information correctly, your personalized home page
displays.

277

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to your Virtual
Campus.
2. Click User Directory in
the side navigation bar.
3. Click the name of the
desired log-in group.
4. Click the name of the
desired user.

278

Locating Information About Another User

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
When your home page displays, note the side navigation frame, which displays links to
common areas, including the user directory.
2. Click User Directory to see a list of all LearnLinc log-in groups.

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

3.

Click a log-in group to view the users in that group.

279

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

4.

Click a user name to view the available information about that user.

If the user has provided email and home page information, you can click the links to
send email or visit the home page, respectively.
To return to the log-in group list, click the User Directory link at the top of the page.

280

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

Editing Your User Profile and Password

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
When your home page displays, note the side navigation frame, which displays links to
common areas, including the user directory.
2. Click User Directory to see a list of all LearnLinc log-in groups.
The User Directory displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to your Virtual
Campus.
2. Click Directory in the side
navigation bar.
3. Click the personal profile
link near the top of the page.
4. Click the Edit tab to edit
your information.
5. Click Save when you have
made your changes.

281

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

282

Click your log-in group name.

A list of all the users in your group displays.

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

4.

Click your name.

Your user information displays.

283

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

6.

284

Click the Edit tab.

The edit page for your account displays.

You can change your personal information as desired.

You can change your password by entering a new password in the New password
and Verify new password fields.
Click Save.

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

Registering for and Dropping Courses

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
When your home page displays, note the side navigation frame, which displays links to
common areas, including the course catalog.
2. Click Course Catalog.
A list of all courses in the catalog displays.

3.
4.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to your Virtual
Campus.
2. Click Course Catalog.
3. Click Register next to the
desired course name.
4. Click OK when the
Success page displays.
5. Click Unregister at any time
to drop the course.

Locate the desired course in the list and click Register next to its name.
The Success page displays.
Click OK to return to the course catalog.

285

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Dropping a Course
Once you are registered for a course, you see an Unregister link to next to its name in the
course catalog. You can click Unregister at any time to drop the course.

286

Visiting the Virtual Campus 12

To Learn More
To learn more about:

Please see:

The Internet and the World Wide Web

Learn the Net at [Link]

NetLearn at [Link]

netlearn/[Link]
The Internet Information Center at http://

[Link]/iic/

Next Steps
In this chapter, you have learned about the Virtual Campus, how to get basic LearnLinc
information, and how to perform basic tasks such as changing your password or registering for
and dropping courses. To learn about some of the more advanced Virtual Campus tasks, please
see:
Chapter 9, Creating Courses
Chapter 10, Scheduling Classes
Chapter 11, Working with Resources
Chapter 13, Working With Courses
To learn more about joining a class from the Virtual Campus, please see:
Chapter 14, Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class
Chapter 15, Teaching a Class

287

12 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

288

Working With Courses 13

13
Working With Courses
This chapter explains the benefits and use of courses in the LearnLinc environment.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Access course information
Use a course resource
Participate in a threaded discussion
Email individuals or groups who are registered for a course
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is a course?
2. Who can manage courses?
3. Where are classes and resources stored?
4. What is a threaded discussion?
5. How do students use courses?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
Virtual Campus

What Is the Virtual Campus? on page 186.

Courses

What Is a Course? on page 189.

Course contents

Course Contents on page 191.

289

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using courses correctly. Specifically, you
need to know:
Who Can Manage Courses?
Classes
People
Threaded Discussion

Who Can Manage Courses?

LearnLinc Administrators, authors, and instructors can all manage courses. Administrators and
authors can create, edit, and delete courses, and classes and resources within those courses.
Instructors can add, edit, or delete classes and resources in any course for which they are
registered as an instructor.
Classes
A class can only be created within a course. Once a class is added to a course, registered
students can join the class from the Virtual Campus. A course may have one class that is always
open, or multiple classeseach of which is scheduled for a particular date and time. You can
view class information and join classes from the courses contents list. If you choose to view
the class information, you can see the instructor, any assistant instructors, the date and time of
the class, and the class agenda. You can launch resources from the agenda for your own use as
well.

290

Working With Courses 13

People
Everyone who is registered for a course is listed on its People tab. You can email anyone who
has an email link next to his or her name, or click on anyones name to see his or her contact
information.

291

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Threaded Discussion
Every course has its own threaded discussion group. Anyone who is registered for the course
can enter new messages or respond to existing message threads in the discussion.

292

Working With Courses 13

The Student View

Students see a description, contents list, people list, and threaded discussion for each course.
They can access all the resources in the contents list, including any class information, and join
classes. Students do not see the edit functions for courses or classes under any circumstances.

293

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for using a course, specifically:
Accessing Course Information
Opening Course Resources
Finding Out Who Is Taking a Course
Communicating with the Class

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Click Course Catalog.
3. Click a course name.

294

Accessing Course Information

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
Your home page displays.

Working With Courses 13

2.

Click Course Catalog.

A list of all the available courses displays.

295

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

296

Click a course name to see its description, home page, and contents.

Working With Courses 13

Opening Course Resources

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
Your home page displays.
2. Click the name of the course with which you wish to work.
The contents list for that course displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Click the name of a course.
3. Click an item in the contents
list,
4. Click its location or
download link to open it.

297

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

298

3.

Click an item in the list to view its details.

4.

Click the download link to install the resource.

If there is a download link, you must download and install the resource before you can
use it.
If there is a location link, you can click it to open the resource once you have installed
it.

Working With Courses 13

Finding Out Who Is Taking a Course

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
Your home page displays.
2. Click the name of the course with which you wish to work.
The contents list for that course displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Click a course name.
3. Click People.

299

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

Quick Steps
1. Click email next to a
student or instructors name.
2. Enter your message and
send the email.

Sending email to an individual in the course

1. Click email next to the person to whom you wish to send email.
Your email program launches, and a new email message, with the recipients address,
displays.
Note that you must have email software installed and configured on your
computer to send email from the Virtual Campus.
2.

300

Click People.
Lists of the instructors, and students who are registered for the course display.

Enter your message and send the email.

Working With Courses 13

Communicating with the Class

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
Your home page displays.
2. Click the name of the course with which you wish to work.
The course contents list displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Click a course name.
3. Click Discussion.
Click a link to send email to
a group within the course.
Click Enter the course
discussion to join the
threaded discussion.

301

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

Click the Discussion tab.

The discussion tab displays.

To send an email to the whole class, or a group within the class, see the following
section Sending E-mail to the Class.
Note that this option is not available for auto-register courses.

To join the courses threaded discussion, see Participating in a Threaded Discussion

on page 303.

302

Working With Courses 13

Sending E-mail to the Class

Under Email click the group to whom you wish to send email.
To send an email to all the instructors for the course, click Send email to instructors.
To send an email to all the students in the course, click Send email to students.
To send an email to all the instructors and students in the course, click Send email to
everyone.
Only users who have an email address listed in their user profiles will
receive your email.

Participating in a Threaded Discussion

Click Enter the course discussion list. The threaded discussion list for the course displays.

To
To
To
To

begin a new thread in the discussion, click Create a new topic.

view a message, click its title in the list.
view the responses to a topic, click the (+) plus box next to its title.
add to the current thread, click Reply to this message.

303

13 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

To Learn More
To learn more about:

Please see:

Creating and editing courses

Creating Courses on page 185

Scheduling classes

Scheduling Classes on page 213

Next Steps
In most cases, working with courses and course resources is a first step to joining classes. For
more information on preparing for and teaching classes, please see:
Chapter 14, Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class
Chapter 15, Teaching a Class

304

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class 14

14
Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class
This chapter explains the tasks for preparing for an online LearnLinc class.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Download and install the classroom software
Configure the classroom software
Make your picture display in the LearnLinc palette
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is the classroom software used for?
2. How do I select the right installation option?
3. How do I get my picture to display in the LearnLinc palette during class?
4. How is LearnLinc affected by my companys web proxy server and firewall?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concept:
the Virtual Campus

What Is the Virtual Campus? on page 186.

305

14 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are ready to join a LearnLinc class.
Specifically, you need to know:
About the Classroom Software
Choosing Between the Typical, Advanced, and Custom Installations
The Downloading Process
Displaying your Information in the LearnLinc Palette
Web Proxies

Your LearnLinc administrator

may choose to provide the
LearnLinc software to you on
a CD, rather than through the
Virtual Campus.

306

About the Classroom Software

The LearnLinc classroom software is a set of tools that instructors and students use to connect,
communicate, and collaborate in a virtual classroom. Each LearnLinc user must have the
classroom software installed on his or her computer before joining a LearnLinc class.
LearnLinc users join classes by clicking join links in the Virtual Campus. When you click a
join link, your computer downloads a file from the Virtual Campus that supplies information
about the class to the LearnLinc classroom software. The classroom software launches
automatically and reads all the necessary information about the class from that file. Without the
LearnLinc classroom software your computer cannot read the information in the file.
Once the classroom software has launched, it connects to the LearnLinc server, which allows
you to enter the class, and connect to all the other users in that class. The classroom software
remains connected to the LearnLinc server throughout the class, so that everyone in that class
can continue to pass data, such as conferencing and synchronization data, to each other.
The classroom software is available to everyone in via the Virtual Campus download page.
There are three download and install options on the download page.
Choosing Between the Typical, Advanced, and Custom Installations
The LearnLinc classroom software installation option that you choose depends on the types of
content and conferencing you will use in your classes. Check with your LearnLinc administrator
before choosing an option. In some cases, your administrator may have removed all but one
option from the download page. In this case, simply click the remaining link to begin your
installation. A brief description of each of the installation options follows.

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class 14

Typical
The typical installation is sufficient for most users. It includes the following components:
LearnLinc classroom tools
sample files
audio and video conferencing components
Microsoft Streaming Media Player
LearnLinc Classroom Player
AdvancedMultimedia Content
The advanced installation contains all the components of the typical install, with the addition of
content synchronization for ToolBook, Authorware, and Director, and the LearnLinc Classroom
Recorder. If you are using synchronized multimedia books in your classes, or want to record
classes, choose this download option.
Custom
In most cases, either the typical or advanced installation options are appropriate. However, if
your organization chooses not to install certain LearnLinc components, you can use the custom
installation to select just the specific components you need to install. Be sure to ask your
LearnLinc administrator for detailed instructions concerning which components to select during
the installation.
The Downloading Process
LearnLinc uses an Internet technology called install from the web to provide you with the
most efficient software installation. Install from the web enables you to begin installing the
LearnLinc classroom software without downloading the entire software package first. As you
begin the installation, the installer checks your current computer configuration, and downloads
only the necessary components during the installation. In this way, your download and install
time may be reduced significantly.
Displaying your Information in the LearnLinc Palette
Once you have installed the LearnLinc classroom software, you can begin joining and
participating in classes immediately. However, if you are participating in data only or audio
conferencing classes, you can enhance your class participation by adding your picture to the

307

14 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

LearnLinc paletteso that it displays when you have the floor. Displaying your picture in the
palette can personalize your interaction with the class by putting a face with the voice.
Your picture can be in bitmap (.bmp), jpeg (.jpg), or ping (.png) format, and your administrator
must uploaded it to the LearnLinc server. Once you add your picture to the server, it will
display in the palette any time you have the floor.
Do not add your picture to the palette if you are using video conferencing. Your live video
image will display in the palette, rather than a still picture and location description.

A web proxy server is a computer that acts as a gate

between users on a network
and the Internet. Using a web
proxy enables an organization
to ensure security, administrative control of their network,
and cache Internet information. Using a web proxy
reduces network traffic and
speeds web browser response
time by caching, or storing,
local copies of each page that
its users visit.

308

Web Proxies
When you connect to a LearnLinc class, you are sending and receiving information through the
same connection that your web browser uses. If your organization filters its web browser
information through a web proxy server, then your LearnLinc information will go through that
web proxy as well. You can check to see if your web browser is configured to use a web proxy
by opening the Preference dialog for Netscape browsers, or the Internet Options dialog for
Internet Explorer browsers. Different versions of these browsers store proxy information in
different locationsgenerally you can look for Advanced, Security, or Connections to find
the Proxy or LAN settings. If your web browser is using a web proxy, you can configure
LearnLinc to use the same proxy settings during installation, or in the LearnLinc Client
Configuration control panel.

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class 14

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for downloading and installing
the LearnLinc classroom software, specifically:
Downloading and Installing the Classroom Software
Reconfiguring your Classroom Software after Installation
Changing LearnLincs Web Proxy Settings
Making your Picture Display in the LearnLinc Palette

Downloading and Installing the Classroom Software

1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
Your home page displays.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Click Download on the
top navigation bar.
3. Click an installation option
to begin.

309

14 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

310

Click Download on the top navigation bar.

The download page displays.

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class 14

3.

Click Begin install from the web for the option you wish to install.
Your LearnLinc administrator may have removed some options from this page, or made
other modifications.
The Loading Installation page for the option you chose displays.

4.

If you are using Netscape Navigator, you may see the Java Security dialog, and page that
prompts you to download the latest version of Install From The Web before you can install
LearnLinc.
If you want to update your version of Install From The Web, click Accept in the Java
Security dialog. When the update is complete, you can continue with the LearnLinc
installation. Move to step 5.
If you do not want to update your version of Install From The Web, click Deny in the
Java Security dialog, and then click the bottom link on the accompanying web page.
The link takes to you a page from which you can download a small file to your
computer. Keep your internet connection open and double-click on the file to start the
Install From The Web. Move to step 6.

311

14 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

Click the Install from the web button.

The LearnLinc Client dialog displays, and the setup files are downloaded to your
computer.

When the setup files have been downloaded, the Setup dialog and the LearnLinc splash
screen display.
6. When the Welcome screen displays, click Next.
The Software License Agreement screen displays.
7. Review the license agreement
To exit the installer without accepting the terms and installing the software, click No.
You are prompted to Exit Setup or Resume. If you choose to resume, you must
accept the terms of the agreement. If you choose Exit Setup, the installer closes.
To accept the terms of the agreement, click Yes. The Choose destination location
screen displays.
8. Click Browse if you wish to change the location to which LearnLinc will be installed.
9. Click Next.
The Edit your location screen displays.
10. Enter a short description of your location and click Next.
The description will display on the Live from: line on the LearnLinc palette.
The Internet connection type screen displays.
11. Select your Internet connection type.
If you use a modem to connect to the Internet, you connect directly to the Internet.
Select I connect directly to the Internet and click Next. Skip to step 12.
If you are on a network, you may connect via a web proxy server. If you are unsure,
check your web browsers proxy settings or contact your system administrator. If you
use a web proxy server, select I use a web proxy server to connect to the Internet and
click Next. Proceed to step 11.

312

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class 14

12. Enter your web proxy server information.

If the fields are blank when the screen first displays, contact your IS department for the
correct web proxy server information.
If the fields are filled when the screen first displays, accept the information in the fields
unless you know you will be using a different web proxy server to connect join
LearnLinc classes.
Click Next. The Start copying files screen displays.
13. Review the information in the Current settings list.
To change the information, click Back.
To start the installation, click Next.
14. When the installation is complete, select Yes, I want to restart my computer now. and
click Finish.
When your computer restarts, the LearnLinc Audio Wizard will display. Be sure to
complete all the steps in the audio wizard to ensure your audio will work properly in class.

You can change your web

proxy server settings for
LearnLinc after installation by
selecting Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Client Configuration, and updating the
information in the LearnLinc
control panel.

313

14 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Client
Configuration, from the
Windows taskbar.
Enter a new description in
the Location section.
Enter the web proxy
information in the Web
proxy section.
2. Click OK.

Reconfiguring your Classroom Software after Installation

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Client Configuration, from the Windows taskbar.
The LearnLinc Client Configuration control panel displays.

Changing the Location Description in the LearnLinc Palette

1. In the Location section of the panel, enter a new description.
2. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
The new description displays in the Live from field on the LearnLinc palette during class.

314

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class 14

Changing LearnLincs Web Proxy Settings

1. If your organization uses a web proxy, set the web proxy information. You can find this
information in your web browsers Preferences (Netscape) or Internet Options (Internet
Explorer) dialog.
Select Specify a HTTP proxy server to use: and then enter the proxy server name and
port number in the HTTP and Port text boxes, respectively.
If you are only connecting to LearnLinc servers outside your companys firewall, check
Force all requests to use the proxy server.
If your web proxy does not support keep alive, select Force HTTP polling. This will
prevent a delay from occurring when students enter a class.
2. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
The new settings will take effect the next time you join a LearnLinc class.
Making your Picture Display in the LearnLinc Palette
1. Create an image file using a digital camera, photo scanner, or illustration software. The
image must be:
in bitmap (.bmp), jpeg (.jpg), or ping (.png) file format
180 x 125 pixels (width x height)
named in the following format: [Link], where loginid is your log-in name,
and fileformat is either .bmp, .jpg, or .png. For example, Jane Doe would name her
picture: [Link].

Follow the same procedure

to add your students pictures

to the LearnLinc server.
Devise a standard procedure
for creating the image files
and uploading them to the
server.

Make sure to use your log-in name, not your full name, when you create
the image file. In the previous example, JaneD is the log-in name, and
Jane Doe is the full name.
2.

Ask your LearnLinc Administrator to add the picture to the LearnLinc server.
Your picture will display in the LearnLinc palette when you have the floor in class.

Next Steps
Now that you have installed the LearnLinc classroom software, and copied your picture to the
LearnLinc server, you are ready to teach your first LearnLinc class. For more information on
teaching classes, please see Chapter 15, Teaching a Class.

315

14 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

316

Teaching a Class 15

15
Teaching a Class
This chapter explains the basics of teaching a live, online, LearnLinc class. In this chapter you
will learn how to:
Join a class
Make sure the class can hear you
Talk to the class
See who is in your class
Pass the floor to a student
Work privately while you have the floor
Dismiss a student
Leave class
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is the Virtual Classroom?
2. How are classes on an intranet different from classes on the Internet?
3. What is the LearnLinc palette?
4. What is floor control?
5. What is an assistant instructor?
6. What are the different audio and video conferencing options?
7. What is the difference between full-duplex and half-duplex audio?
8. How does hand raising work in the Virtual Classroom?
9. What do students see when they are in class?

317

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
The Virtual Campus

Visiting the Virtual Campus on page 271.

Downloading and installing the

LearnLinc classroom software

Preparing Your Computer for Your First Class on page 305.

The Virtual Classroom

What Is the Virtual Classroom? on page 214.

Floor control

Floor Control on page 215.

Assistant instructors

Assistant Instructors on page 220.

Audio and video conferencing

Audio and Video Conferencing on page 215.

Streaming Video

Streaming Video on page 220.

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using the Virtual Campus to its full
potential. Specifically, you need to know:
LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet
The LearnLinc Palette
The Difference Between Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Audio
Hand Raising
The Student View

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet

A LearnLinc virtual classroom is created when two or more LearnLinc users connect to the
LearnLinc server to join the same class. In addition to knowing that the LearnLinc server plays
an important part in your ability to join a LearnLinc class, it is also important to realize that the
location of that server, and how your computer connects to it, affect your participation in the
class. The following diagrams illustrate two common configurations for the LearnLinc server
and LearnLinc client computers on an intranet and on the Internet.

318

Teaching a Class 15

LearnLinc on an Intranet
If your LearnLinc server is connected to your organizations intranet, and everyone in the class
is connected to the same intranet, then your class is being held on that intranet. Everyone in
the class can access web pages, networked drives, or shared folders on that intranet, (unless
they are restricted by the organizations IS department). Depending on the intranet
configuration, your class may or may not be able to access the public Internet. The following
diagram represents a LearnLinc server, and student and instructor computers on the same
intranet.

319

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

LearnLinc on the Internet

If your LearnLinc server is connected to the public Internet, and everyone in the class is
connected to the public Internet, then your class is being held on the public Internet. People
who are on a private intranet cannot join your class, unless their organization gives them access
to the public Internet. Everyone in the class can access web sites on the Internet. The following
diagram represents a LearnLinc server where some clients are on an intranet with Internet
access, and some students are on the Internet.

320

Teaching a Class 15

The LearnLinc Palette

The LearnLinc palette is a tool palette that LearnLinc instructors, assistant instructors, and
students use to interact with one another during a LearnLinc class. The following diagram
highlights the main areas of the palette. A brief description of each callout follows the diagram.
Instructors Palette

321

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

On Air/Current Speaker Indicator

You are the floor holder when you see the red On Air indicator at the top of the palette. You
can be seen and/or heard by the class, and you control any applications or content that is in
use. If you launch an application or piece of content while you have the floor it launches for
everyone in the class as well. When someone else has the floor, you see his or her name in
place of the On Air indicator.
Hand Raise Indicator
When someone raises his or her hand during class you see a green flashing light behind the
hand raise indicator. You can see which person raised his or her hand in the class list.
Take Floor from Student
If you give the floor to a student during class, you can take control of the floor back by clicking
Take floor. You regain control of synchronized content, applications, and conferencing.
Conferencing Window and Location
If video conferencing is in use, you see and hear the current floor holder in real time in the
conferencing window. If your class uses audio conferencing or is data only, you see a picture
of the floor holder in the conferencing window. If that person does not have their own picture
on the LearnLinc server, you see the default student picture. If you do not have your picture on
the server, everyone sees the default instructor picture when you have the floor. The location of
the current floor holder is listed below the conferencing window, as well.
Mute Conferencing Checkbox, or Talk Button
You may see either a Mute checkbox or a Talk button below the conferencing window. Both
Mute and Talk work when you have the floor.
If you see a Mute checkbox, check the box to silence your audio and/or video
conferencing while you have the floor.
If you see a Talk button below the conferencing window, click the Talk button once, or
hold down the <CTRL> key, to talk to the class. Once you click the Talk button, you will
not be able to hear the instructor. To hear the instructor, click the button again, or release
the <CTRL> key, so that the Talk button is in a raised position.

322

Teaching a Class 15

Even if the Talk button is pushed out, you may still have the floor. Your
actions on shared content and applications are still visible to the class
until you pass the floor to someone else.

Volume Indicators
The volume indicators show the volume level for both your speakers (or headset) and
microphone. Watch the volume indicators to see whether or not you are speaking loud enough
while you have the floor. If the bars are green, your volume is acceptable. If the bars are yellow
or red, your volume is too high.
Network Bandwidth Monitor
The network bandwidth monitor flashes green, yellow, and red. Green indicates sufficient
bandwidth to participate in class. Yellow indicates that there is not enough bandwidth for all
the LearnLinc information, resulting in poor quality audio or slow text chat, for example. Red
indicates that there is not enough bandwidth to participate in the LearnLinc class at all.
Class List
The class list displays the names of everyone in the class, including your name. Hand raise
icons display next to each student who has his or her hand raised, as do feedback response
indicators for each student who has selected a response. The class list has:
buttons that enable you to select a student and give him or her the floor, put all hands
down, and dismiss the selected attendee
buttons at the top of the class list that enable you to sort the list in hand raise order, by
feedback response, or alphabetically by first name.
counters for the total number of attendees and the total number of hand raises
Agenda
The agenda contains a list of all the resources for the current class. You can click on any item
in the list to launch it, with the exception of notes (which cannot be opened in the Virtual
Classroom). You can also use resources from the course contents list by selecting it from the
agenda drop-down list, and launch applications from the shortcuts at the bottom of the agenda
tab.

323

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Feedback
Feedback is a polling application that you can use to quickly poll the class using one of several
predetermined answer sets. Feedback displays a set of answers, and a pie chart that shows the
percentage of the class that selected each answer. You can right-click on the feedback area to
select a different set of answers, to reset feedback, or to share the pie chart with the class. You
can see individual feedback responses in the class list next to each students name.
Text Chat
Use text chat to send messages to the whole class or to just one student. When others in the
class send messages, you see them in your text chat transcript window. You can right-click on
the text chat area to undock the text chat window, change the font size, or clear the transcript.
If you are the instructor, you can restrict text chat to yourself and the current floor holder.
Private messages from your students or assistants appear in red text.

A sound card is a piece of

hardware that you can add to
your computer to play and
record audio. For example,
you use your sound card
when you listen to music CDs
on your computer. You can
use your sound card to send
and receive live audio as well
as prerecorded audio. LearnLinc requires a sound card to
enable live audio or video
conferencing during a LearnLinc class.

324

The Difference Between Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Audio

Your sound card hardware and software may produce either full-duplex or half-duplex audio.
The difference between full and half-duplex is whether or not you can hear someone else
while you are speaking. Full-duplex cards can send and receive data at once, whereas halfduplex sound cards can only send or receive data at any time. Your sound card type, and your
settings in the LearnLinc Audio Wizard, determine whether you see a Mute checkbox or a Talk
button displayed on the LearnLinc palette under the conferencing window.
If you see the Mute checkbox, you are in full-duplex mode and you can send your audio and
receive someone elses audio at the same timeas if you were on the telephone. In a LearnLinc
class, this happens when the instructor passes the floor to a student, and both continue to talk.
Everyone in the class can hear both the instructor and the floor holder at all times. If you have
the floor and you check the Mute check box, the class cannot hear you.
If you see the Talk button, you are in half-duplex mode and you can either send audio or
receive it, but not both at the same timeas if you were using a CB-radio. In a LearnLinc class,
you must have the floor, and click the Talk button in to speak to the class. If you click the Talk
button again to push it out, the class cannot hear you, even though you have the floor.

Teaching a Class 15

Hand Raising
During class, one of the primary means for students to communicate with their instructor is
hand raising. In LearnLinc, students can raise their hands electronically by clicking the hand
raise icon on their LearnLinc palettes.
When a student raises his or her hand, the instructors hand raise indicator flashes, the hand
raise counter on the palette is increased by one, and a hand raise icon displays next to the
students name in the class list. In instructor led classes, instructors can use the hand raise
function to poll students for agreement or disagreement, solicit questions, and to check
students status. In open discussion classes, students and the instructor can use the hand raise
function make floor passing more orderly.
The Student View
When a student joins a class, he or she sees a palette that is quite similar to that of the
instructor. The following diagram highlights the main areas of the student palette. A brief
description of the differences between the instructor and student palettes follows the diagram.

325

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Student Palette

326

Teaching a Class 15

Hand Raise Button

Instead of a hand raise indicator, students have a hand raise button that they can push to raise
their hands electronically. The button remains pushed in as long as the hand is raised. Students
do not see hand raise icons in the class list.
Return Floor to Instructor
In an instructor led class, the button at the top right of the student palette is the Return floor to
instructor button. A student who has the floor can pass it back to the instructor, but not to
another student.
In an open discussion class, the floor button at the top right of the student palette is the Take
floor button. Any one can take the floor from any floor holder at any time.
Class List
Students see the class list in all their classes, regardless of floor control format. However, in
instructor led classes, students do not see hand raise icons or individual feedback responses in
the class list.
In open discussion classes, students see both indicators.
Feedback
Students see the feedback answer set, with radio buttons next to each answer. If you choose to
share it with them, students see the summary pie chart as well.
In open discussion classes, everyone sees the summary pie chart at all times. In addition, the
ability to control feedback is based on floor controlso that the current floor holder can change
the answer set and reset feedback.
Text Chat
Students see the text chat transcript at all times and can send messages at all times, unless you
restricted text chat.
In instructor led classes, students can undock text chat, and they can send private messages to
you and any assistants in the class. Private messages always go to you and all the assistants
students cannot select you alone, or an assistant or student for a private message.
In open discussion classes, students can send private messages to any individual at any time.
As with instructor led classes, only you can restrict text chat.

327

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for teaching a LearnLinc class,
specifically:
Joining a Class
Making Sure the Class Can Hear You
Talking to the Class
Seeing Who Is in Your Class
Responding to Hand Raises
Passing the Floor to a Student
Working Privately While You Have the Floor
Dismissing a Student from Class
Leaving a Class
The following directions are for teaching instructor led classes. When
directions for teaching open discussion classes differ, they appear in
italics at the end of each topic.
The following directions assume that you have joined a class as its
instructor. If you have not joined the class as its instructor, and you are
scheduled to teach it, exit the class and the Virtual Campus, log-in using
your instructor account information, and join the class again.

328

Teaching a Class 15

Joining a Class
1. Log-in to the Virtual Campus.
Your home page displays a list of all the courses for which you are currently registered.

Quick Steps
1. Log-in to the Virtual
Campus.
2. Click the course that
contains your class.
3. Click join next to your
class.

329

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

Click the course name that contains the class you wish to join.
All the courses that you are registered to teach are listed under the heading You are
teaching the following courses. The courses contents list displays.

3.

Click join next to the class you are teaching.

Your browser minimizes and the LearnLinc palette displays.
Reminder: you must download and install the LearnLinc classroom
software before you join your first class. If you join the class and do not
have the most recent version of LearnLinc, you will be asked if you want
to automatically update to the latest version.

330

Teaching a Class 15

Configuring your LearnLinc Palette

1. Select Tools > Local > Preferences from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.

Quick Steps
1. Select Tools > Local >
Preferences from the
LearnLinc palette menu bar.
2. Check or clear each item by
selecting it.

2.

By default Hide Desktop Window is selected, which is indicated by the check mark
next to this menu item. When checked, your desktop and any icons or images on it are
covered by the LearnLinc background image.
By default, Always On Top is not selected, and does not have a check mark next to it.
When checked, the LearnLinc palette cannot be hidden by other windows.
Check or clear these preferences as desired by selecting them from the Preferences menu
list.

331

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Monitoring the Network Status

The networks status monitor displays your connection status throughout class. The network
status indicator has three states, which are described in the following table:
Green indicates that there is sufficient bandwidth for you to participate in class.
Yellow indicates that some of the bandwidth-intensive LearnLinc tools, such as
conferencing or application sharing, may not function properly. However, you can still
participate in the class.
When a students network status monitor is yellow for one minute, a warning message
appears in the students text chat.
Red indicates that there is not enough bandwidth available for LearnLinc to function

properly.
If this indicator flashes, you may be experiencing a temporary fluctuation in
bandwidth that will resolve itself.
If this indicator flashes continuously, attempt to participate in the class. If you cannot
participate in class, there is not enough bandwidth available. Contact your LearnLinc
administrator to resolve this issue.
When a students network status monitor is red for one minute, a warning message
appears in the students, instructors, and assistant instructors text chat.

332

Teaching a Class 15

Making Sure the Class Can Hear You

1. If the class is unable to hear you while you have the floor, run the LearnLinc Audio Wizard
by selecting Tools > Local > Audio Wizard, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.

The LearnLinc Audio Wizard displays.

Click Next to begin.
The Select Headset or Speakers screen displays.
3. Select either Headset or Speakers.
If you are using a headset select that option. When you have the floor, you can hear the
instructor while you are speaking, as long as you have a full duplex sound card.
If you are using speakers, select that option. When you have the floor and you click the
Talk button you cannot hear the instructor. Even if you have a full duplex sound card
you will not hear the instructor while you are speaking. Using this setting prevents
feedback and echoes from your speakers while you are speaking.
4. Click Next.
The Adjust playback volume screen displays.
5. Click Play and adjust the slider until the volume is at a comfortable level.
6. Click Next.
The Adjust Recording Volume screen displays.
7. Speak into your microphone for several seconds.
Speaking into your microphone sets your sound cards recording volume.
8. Click Next.
The Test Audio Quality screen displays.
9. Click Record and speak into your microphone for several seconds.
10. Click Playback to hear your recording.
If the volume is not acceptable, click Back twice to return to the Adjust Playback Volume
screen. Adjust the slider until the volume is acceptable and then return to the Test audio
quality screen.
11. Click Finish.
2.

Quick Steps
1. Select Tools > Local >
Audio Wizard, from the
LearnLinc palette menu bar.
2. Click Next.
3. Select Headset or
Speakers and click Next.
4. Click Play and adjust the
volume, then click Next.
5. Speak into your microphone
and then click Next.
6. Click record and speak into
your microphone.
7. Click Playback.
8. Click Finish.

You can run the audio wizard

when you are not in class by
selecting Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Audio Wizard,
from the Windows task bar.

333

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you have the
floor.
2. If you see the Talk button
click it or press <CTRL>.
3. Begin speaking to the class.
4. Click the Talk button again,
or release the <CTRL> key
when you are done
speaking.

Talking to the Class

1. Make sure you have the floor.
You have the floor when you see the red On Air indicator at the top of the LearnLinc
palette.

If you do not have the floor, take it by clicking Take Floor.

2.

334

Determine if you have full- or half-duplex audio.

If you see a Mute checkbox below the conferencing window, you have full-duplex
audio. You can talk to the class when you have the floor, and when you pass it to a
student. Mute your microphone (and video) by checking Mute.
If you see a Talk button below the conferencing window, you have half-duplex audio.
Click Talk, or hold down the <CTRL> key, and begin speaking to the class.

Teaching a Class 15

If you are using video conferencing, the class can both hear and see you while you have
the floor.
Muting audio and video while you have the floor does not affect
synchronization. If you wish to use synchronized content or applications
privately while you have the floor, click Privacy on the LearnLinc
palette Agenda tab. Please see Working Privately While You Have the
Floor on page 337 for more information.

Seeing Who Is in Your Class

Scroll through the class list to see the name of each person in your class. The class list is
located in the middle of the LearnLinc palette and is updated continuously as students join and
leave the class. Note that when a student joins or leaves the class, it may take a minute or
longer for the list to update.

335

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Responding to Hand Raises

When a student raises his or her hand, you see three indicators on the palette to notify you of
the hand raise:
A green light flashes behind the hand raise indicator at the top left of the palette.
A hand raise icon displays next to the students name in your class list.
The hand raise counter, which is below the class list, is incremented by one.
If you have assistant instructors in your class, they see these indicators as well.
You can respond to a hand raise by:
passing the floor to the student, or
clicking All hands down, or
acknowledging the hand raise verbally, but letting the class know you will answer
questions at a later time.
In open discussion classes, you have a hand raise button in the top left corner of the palette,
rather than the hand raise indicator.
Lowering all raised hands
Click All hands down on the LearnLinc palette.

All the hand raise icons in the class list are removed. The hand raise button is pushed out on
the student palette for each student who had raised his or her hand.
In open discussion classes, you do not have the All hands down button.

336

Teaching a Class 15

Passing the Floor to a Student

1. Highlight a students name from the class list by clicking it once.
2. Click Pass floor.

Quick Steps
Double-click a students name
to pass the floor to him or her.

Your On Air indicator is replaced by the name of the new floor holder.

Taking the floor back from a student

Click Take floor at any time to take the floor back from a student.

Working Privately While You Have the Floor

To use synchronized content and LearnLinc applications privately while you have the floor,
click Privacy. For example, if you are showing a presentation to the class, and want to view the
next slide on your own, click Privacy before moving to the next slide. When you are ready to
continue, return to the previous slide and click Privacy again to start sharing your actions with
the class.
Privacy is off when the window shade is up.
Privacy is on when the window shade is down and the background is red.

337

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Dismissing a Student from Class

1. Highlight a students name from the class list by clicking it once.
2. Click Dismiss attendee.

Leaving a Class
Select File > Exit, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.

When you leave an instructor led class in which:

you are the current floor holder, students who remain in class cannot use LearnLinc features
that rely on floor control, such as audio or video conferencing.
a student is the current floor holder, that student can use LearnLinc features that rely on
floor control, but cannot pass the floor to another student.
In open discussion classes, students who remain in class can continue to pass the floor and use
features that rely on floor control after you leave.

338

Teaching a Class 15

To Learn More
To learn more about:

Please see:

Downloading and installing the LearnLinc

classroom software

Downloading and Installing the Classroom Software on

page 309.

Multicast video conferencing options

Audio and Video Conferencing on page 215.

Streaming video

Adding Streaming Video to Your LearnLinc Server on

page 101.

Next Steps
Once you are comfortable with the basic task of teaching a LearnLinc class, you may wish to
explore some of the classroom tools that are available for your use during a class. If you would
like to know more about the LearnLinc classroom tools, please see:
Chapter 16

Recording Classes

page 341

Chapter 17

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

page 365

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

Chapter 21

Sharing Applications With the Class

page 413

Chapter 22

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

page 439

Chapter 23

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

page 445

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

339

15 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

If you would like to know more about creating or working with LearnLinc synchronized
content, please see:
Chapter 8, Converting your Content for LearnLinc
Chapter 11, Working with Resources
Chapter 18, Using Multimedia Content During Class

340

Recording Classes 16

16
Recording Classes
This chapter explains how to record and play back classes using LearnLincs Classroom
Recorder and Classroom Player. In this chapter you will learn how to:
record a LearnLinc class
pause or stop the recorder
upload a recorded class to your course contents list
play a recorded class
set recorder options
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. How do I get the recorder and player?
2. What is the Classroom Recorder?
3. What is a dedicated recording computer?
4. Who can record classes?
5. What is the difference between saving and uploading a recorded class?
6. What is the Classroom Player?
7. How big are recorded files?

341

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you understand how to work the Classroom
Recorder and Classroom Player. Specifically, you need to know:
How Do I Get the Classroom Recorder and Player?
What Is the Classroom Recorder?
What is a Dedicated Recording Computer?
What Is the Difference Between Saving and Uploading a Recorded Class?
Who Can Record Classes?
What Is the Classroom Player?

How Do I Get the Classroom Recorder and Player?

The LearnLinc Classroom Recorder is installed when you complete an Advanced - Multimedia
Content or Custom installation of LearnLinc 4.5. If you want to play back a recorded class on
a computer that does not have LearnLinc 4.5 installed, you can download and install the player
from the Download page in the Virtual Campus.
The LearnLinc Classroom Player is installed when you do a Typical or Advanced - Multimedia
installation of LearnLinc 4.5.
What Is the Classroom Recorder?
The LearnLinc Classroom Recorder is an application that records a LearnLinc class on a student
computer. The Classroom Recorder captures all classroom activity, including audio, video, text
chat, and any actions on the classroom workspace. The recorder also uploads the recorded file
and adds it to your course contents list.

You can also use the Classroom Recorder outside of a class to upload a classroom recording
that you previously saved to your hard drive.

342

Recording Classes 16

What is a Dedicated Recording Computer?

A dedicated recording computer is a computer that records, but does not participate in, a class.
In general, if you are using any conferencing type other then data-only, you should use a
dedicated recording computer.
Who Can Record Classes?
Anyone with instructor, author, or administrator privileges can record classes. You will most
likely want to join the class as a student with instructor or administrator privileges so that the
student experience, rather then the instructor experience, is recorded.
What Is the Difference Between Saving and Uploading a Recorded Class?
You can upload a recorded class to the server immediately after recording the class or you can
save it to your hard drive and upload it at a later time.
Uploading the file adds it as a resource to the LearnLinc Course that the recorded class is part
of. The uploaded class displays on the course contents list. The uploading process work best
when only one recording at a time is uploaded to the server.
The save/upload process begins as soon as:
the recording computer leaves the class OR
someone stops the Classroom Recorder.

343

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

What Is the Classroom Player?

The LearnLinc Classroom Player is a standalone application that plays the recorded class file.
Once you install the player, it is accessible on your Start menu.
The player is automatically launched when you play the recorded file from your course
contents list or class agenda. The player streams the recorded file from the server to your
computer.

You can also download the file from the course contents list, save it to your hard drive, and
then play the file at a later time. The advantage of downloading and playing the file is that you
do not need to have an active Internet connection while playing the file and the file will play
continuously without stopping to buffer.

How Big Are the Recorded Classroom Files?

The recorded classroom files average 10 MB per hour of recorded class. A system administrator
should ensure that the files are backed-up or deleted according to your organizations server
space needs.

344

Recording Classes 16

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks involved in recording a class and
playing the recorded class, specifically:
Recording a class
Pausing or stopping the recorder
Uploading a recorded class to your course contents list
Playing a recorded class.
Setting your recorder options
Note: The directions and screen shots in this guide are based on Microsoft Internet Explorer. If
you are using Netscape Navigator, the directions remain the same, but some screen shots, menu
names, and dialog names may differ slightly.

Recording a Class
1. Log-in to LearnLinc with instructor, author, or administrator authority on the computer that
will be recording the class
If you are the instructor for the class, do not log-in as yourself on the
recording computer unless you want to record the instructor view of
the class.
2.
3.

You may want to

assign someone to
monitor the
recording computer
during the class.

Join the class you want to record.

Select Tools > Class > Record Classroom.
Quick Steps
1. Log-in to LearnLinc as an
Instructor, Author, or
Administrator.
2. Join the class.
3. Select Tools > Class >
Record Classroom.
4. Click Start Recording.

345

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The Classroom Recorder opens.

4.

Click Start Recording.

The Classroom Recorder minimizes on your desktop.
The recorder will continue to record the class until
you or the person monitoring the recording clicks the minimized recorder on the task
bar (see the next section, Pausing or stopping the recorder) OR
LearnLinc is closed on the recording computer (see Uploading a Recorded Class).

346

Recording Classes 16

Pausing or Stopping the Recorder

1. Click the minimized recorder on your windows task bar.
The recorder stops recording and maximizes on the recording computers screen.

Quick Steps
1. Click the minimized
recorder.
2. Click Resume Recording to
continue, or Stop to save
the file or cancel the
recording.

2.

Do one of the following:

If you want to . . .

Then . . .

resume recording

click Resume Recording.

The recorder resumes recording and minimizes on the
recording computers taskbar.

stop recording

click Stop.
You can now either save or cancel the recording. If you
save the file, you can upload it to the Virtual Campus.
Refer to Uploading a Recorded Class and Saving a
Recorded Class to Upload Later for more information.

347

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Uploading a Recorded Class

1. When the class is over or someone stops the Classroom Recorder, the Classroom Recorder
maximizes and a Save As dialog appears.

1. Navigate to the location

where you want to save the
recorded classroom file.
2. Name the file.
3. Click Save.
4. Click Yes to upload the file
to the Server.
5. If necessary, log-in to the
Server.
6. Click OK when the upload
complete message appears.
2.
3.

348

Select a location and type a name for the file. The default name is the name of the class
you recorded.
Click Save.

Recording Classes 16

The File Upload dialog appears.

4.

Click Yes.
The LearnLinc Server Login dialog box appears.

5.

Enter your log-in information and click OK.

You must have Administrator, Instructor, or Author authority to upload
a file to the LearnLinc server. Instructors can only upload recorded
classes to their own courses.

349

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The file begins uploading. The slider bar on the upload dialog box indicates its process.
When the upload is complete, an Upload Complete message appears.

6.
7.

350

Click OK.
The recorded class is now accessible from the course contents list for the course containing
the class you recorded.

Recording Classes 16

Saving a Recorded Class to Upload Later

1. When the class is over or someone stops the Classroom Recorder, the Classroom Recorder
maximizes and a Save As dialog appears.

Quick Steps
1. Navigate to the location
where you want to save the
recorded classroom file.
2. Name the file.
3. Click Save.
4. Click No on the File
Upload dialog.

2.
3.

Select a location and type a name for the file. The default name is the name of the class
you recorded.
Click Save.

351

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The File Upload dialog appears.

4.

352

Click No.
The file is saved to the location you specified and can be uploaded at a later time.
When you are ready to upload the file, you can run the Classroom Recorder from the
LearnLinc Program Group on your Start menu. See Uploading a Saved File on page 353.

Recording Classes 16

Uploading a Saved File

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Upload Recording.
A File Open dialog box displays.
2. Navigate to the saved recorded class file and click Open.
The LearnLinc Server Login dialog box appears.

3.

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Upload
Recording.
2. Navigate to the recorded
classroom file and click
Open.
3. Log-in to the Server and
click OK.
4. Click OK when the upload
complete message appears.

Enter your log-in information and click OK.

You must have Administrator, Instructor, or Author authority to upload
a file to the LearnLinc server.
The file begins uploading. The slider bar on the upload dialog box indicates its process.
When the upload is complete, an Upload Complete message appears.

4.

Click OK.
The recorded class is now accessible from the course contents list for the course containing
the class you recorded.

353

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Playing a Recorded Class

1. In the Virtual Campus, access the course containing the recorded class. The recorded
classroom file that you uploaded is on the course contents list.

1. Locate the recorded class on

your course contents list.
2. Click Play.

Recorded Classroom
Resource

2.

354

Click Play.
The Classroom Player opens and begins playing your recorded classroom file. As the file is
opening, you will see a Please Wait. Initial screen loading message.
When the first part of the file becomes available, the Classroom Player begins streaming
the file to your desktop. The classroom activity from the recorded class occurs on your
desktop, just as if you were participating in the class.
While the recorded class plays, you can pause, stop, fast forward, or rewind the file using
the recorder controls. The following diagram describes each control and the information
the player displays about the recorded file.

Recording Classes 16

View the size and total

playing time of the file in
hours and minutes.

View the name of the file.

Click Fast Forward or drag

the slider to move quickly
through the recorded file.

Click Rewind to rewind or

drag the slider to move
quickly back through the file.

Click Play to play the file. The

button is grayed out when the
file is playing.

Click Stop to stop the file and

rewind it to the beginning.
Click Pause to temporarily
stop the file in a particular
spot.

While the recorded file plays, the current playing time displays in the status bar below the
button controls. If the player needs to stop to download more data to play a process called
buffering the estimated buffering time will appear in the status bar.

355

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Downloading a Recorded File

1. In the Virtual Campus, access the course containing the recorded class. The recorded
classroom file that you uploaded is on the course contents list.

1. Locate the recorded class on

your course contents list.
2. Click the name of the file.
3. Click Download.
4. Follow your browsers
download instructions.

2.

356

Click the name of the file.

Recording Classes 16

The Edit Resource page appears.

3.

Click Download..
Note that this page displays an estimated time for the file download. This
estimate is based on a 28.8 kbs Internet connection. If you are
connecting to the Internet at a higher speed for example on a 56 kbs
modem or on an office network with a dedicated Internet connection
the download time may be much faster than the estimate.

357

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The File Download dialog box appears.

4.

358

Select Save this file to disk and click OK.

Recording Classes 16

The Save As dialog box appears.

5.

Navigate to the location where you want to save the file, and then click Save.
The recorded classroom file begins to download.
The File Download dialog box displays the progress as your file downloads.
It is important to remember where you save the downloaded file, so that
you can easily access it later when you are ready to play it.

359

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

When the download is complete, a message displays notifying you that it is done.

6.

360

You can play the file now, or wait and play it later:

If you want to . . .

Then . . .

play the file now

click Open.
The Classroom Player opens and plays the file.

play the file later

click Close.
The Download Complete dialog box closes and you are
returned to the recorded class resource details page in
the Virtual Campus.

Recording Classes 16

Playing a Downloaded File

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Classroom Player.
The LearnLinc Classroom Player opens.

Quick Steps
1. Locate the recorded class
file in Windows Explorer.
2. Double-click the file name to
open the player and play the
file.

2.

Select File > Open.

The Open dialog box appears.

3.

Navigate to the recorded classroom file and click Open.

361

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The file opens in the Classroom Player.

Click the Play

button to begin
playing the file.

4.

362

Click the Play button to play the file.

Recording Classes 16

Setting the Recorder Options

1. Join a class on the recording computer with administrator, instructor, or author authority.
2. Select Tools > Set Recorder Options.

The Set Recorder Options dialog appears.

363

16 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.
4.

364

Under Temporary Directory, select the directory in which recorded classroom files will be
saved during classroom recording.
Select the audio source you want the Classroom Recorder to use when recording audio
classes. The default audio source for classes using audio conferencing is LearnLinc
Multimedia Conferencing.

If you want to record . . .

Then select . . .

no audio

none

audio using a dedicated

recording computer

LearnLinc Multimedia Conferencing.

Important! No audio generated from the recording
computer will be recorded.

audio from the recording

computer, multimedia audio
played during a class, or
telephone conferencing

Default Windows audio devices.

Important! You may also need to adjust hardware
components and connections, depending on what
you will be recording. Please contact LearnLinc
Customer Service for more information.

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students 17

17
Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your
Students
This chapter explains the benefits and use of text chat, LearnLincs instant messaging tool. In
this chapter you will learn how to:
Undock the text chat window
Change the font size in the text chat window
Send a message to the class
Send a private message
Restrict text chat to yourself, your assistants, and the floor holder
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is text chat?
2. Who can send and receive private messages?
3. What is restricted text chat?
4. What are network status monitor messages?
5. What do students see?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concept:
the LearnLinc classroom

Teaching a Class on page 317.

365

17 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using text chat correctly during class.
Specifically, you need to know:
What Is Text Chat?
Private Messages
Restricted Text Chat
Assistant Instructors and Text Chat
The Student View

What Is Text Chat?

Text chat is a messaging tool that you can use to communicate with your students and assistant
instructors during class. When anyone enters a message in text chat, the message is
immediately visible to everyone in the class. The message displays with the name of the sender
in bold before the text.

Text chat is part of the LearnLinc palette, and is visible throughout the class. Text chat can be
undocked from the palette to enable resizing and private messaging, but it cannot be closed.
Text chat messages display in several colors:
Messages to the class from students and assistant instructors display in plain black text.
Messages to the class from the instructor display in green text.
Private messages to a student from the instructor or an assistant display in red text.
Private messages to the instructor from an assistant display in bold red text.
Private messages to an assistant from the instructor display in bold red text.
Private messages from an assistant to another assistant display in bold red text.

366

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students 17

Private Messages
In addition to sending messages to the entire class, you can also choose to send a private
message to a student or an assistant instructor. To send a private message, you must undock
text chat from the LearnLinc palette.
When you send a private message, the recipient sees it in red text, with your name in bold
before the message text. When you receive a private message, it displays in red text, with the
name of the sender and the recipient in bold before the message text. When you receive a
private message from an assistant instructor, it displays in bold red text, with the name of the
sender and the recipient in bold before the message text. Assistant instructors can send private
messages to you, or to any student in the class.
Restricted Text Chat
You can choose to restrict text chat to yourself, your assistant instructors, and the current floor
holder at any time during class. When text chat is restricted only the instructor, assistants, and
the current floor holder can enter messages, however, everyone can see the messages in their
own text chat windows. If you pass the floor to another student, that student gains the ability to
enter messages in text chat, and the previous floor holder loses that ability.
Students can still send private messages to the instructor and assistants.
Network Status Monitor Messages
When a students network status monitor is red for more than one minute (indicating severe
network congestion), the student, instructor, and any assistant instructors receive a warning
message in text chat. If the network status monitor is yellow for more than one minute
(indicating moderate network congestion), only the student receives a warning message in text
chat.
The messages help the instructor and assistant instructors monitor any bandwith problems the
students may be having, which are negatively affecting LearnLinc performance. When the class
is over, the text chat is automatically saved in each users temporary Windows directory. Each
saved text chat file will overwrite the previously saved file.

367

17 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Assistant Instructors and Text Chat

If you have one or more assistant instructors in your class, they can monitor text chat while you
concentrate on presenting new content. The assistants see any private messages from the
students and can respond to each student individually, if necessary. If an assistant sends you a
private message it displays in bold red text in your text chat window, to let you know that the
message requires your attention.
The Student View
In instructor led classes, students have a checkbox labeled Private that enables them to send
private messages to all instructors. The all instructors group is made up of the instructor and
any assistants in the class.

In open discussion classes, students have the same text chat window as instructors. Students
can send messages to the class, or send a private message to any individual in the class.

368

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students 17

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks for using text chat in a class,
specifically:
Sending a Message to the Class
Changing the Font Size in the Text Chat Window
Undocking the Text Chat Window
Sending Private Messages
Restricting Text Chat to yourself, your Assistants and the Current Floor Holder

Sending a Message to the Class

1. Click in the text box at the bottom of the LearnLinc palette.

transcript area

Quick Steps
Type your message in the text
box at the bottom of the
palette and press <Enter>.

enter your message here

and click Send
2.

Type your message and click Send.

Your message is sent to everyone in the class.

369

17 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Changing the Font Size in the Text Chat Window

1. Select Tools > Local > Text Chat Font Size from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.

1. Right-click on the text chat

transcript area.
2. Select a font size from the
right mouse menu.

3.

Quick Steps
1. Right-click on the text chat
transcript area.
2. Select Dock My Text Chat
from the right mouse menu.

Select Small Fonts For Me, Medium Fonts For Me, or Large Fonts For Me from the list.
All messages in your text chat transcript window resize to the option you selected.

Undocking the Text Chat Window

Select Tools > Dock My Text Chat Window, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar to clear its
checkmark.

The text chat window displays in the bottom quarter of the content area. You can resize,
minimize, or move the window as desired.

Docking the text chat window

Click the Close box in the upper right corner of the text chat window to return it to the
LearnLinc palette.

370

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students 17

Sending Private Messages

1. Undock text chat from the palette.

Quick Steps
1. Undock text chat.
2. Check Private and select a
name from the drop down
list.
3. Type your message and
press <Enter>.

2.
3.
4.

Check Private to enable the drop down box.

Select a name from the drop down list.
Type your message and click Send.
The person you selected in the drop down box see your message in red text.
Only instructors and assistants can send private messages to students.
Students can only send private messages to the instructor and all
assistants, not to each other.

Restricting Text Chat to yourself, your Assistants and the Current Floor Holder
1. Pass the floor to the student with whom you want to chat.
2. Select Tools > Class > Restrict Text Chat, from the palette menu bar.

3.

Quick Steps
1. Pass the floor to someone.
2. Select Tools > Class >
Restrict Text Chat.

Enter a message and click Send.

Everyone will see your message, but only the floor holder and assistants can respond to it.

371

17 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Next Steps
Text chat is one of several LearnLinc classroom tools. If you would like to know more about
the other LearnLinc classroom tools, please see:

372

Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

Chapter 21

Sharing Applications With the Class

page 413

Chapter 22

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

page 439

Chapter 23

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

page 445

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

Using Multimedia Content During Class 18

18
Using Multimedia Content During Class
This chapter explains the benefits and use of multimedia content in LearnLinc classes. In this
chapter you will learn how to:
Suspend conferencing to run an audio or video clip
Launch and close synchronized multimedia books, audio clips, and video clips
Work with synchronized multimedia books
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is multimedia content?
2. How is it synchronized?
3. What happens when I run an audio or video clip in a class that uses live audio or video
conferencing?
4. How is multimedia synchronization affected by differing connection speeds among
students?
5. What do students see?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
The Virtual Campus

Visiting the Virtual Campus on page 271.

Working with courses

Working With Courses on page 289.

Teaching a class

Teaching a Class on page 317.

Converting content for LearnLinc

Converting your Content for LearnLinc on page 151.

373

18 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using your synchronized content
correctly. Specifically, you need to know:
What Is Multimedia Content?
Types of Multimedia Content that Can Be Synchronized
Synchronization
ToolBook, Authorware, and Director
Director Movies
Audio and Video Clips
What if My Multimedia Content Contains Audio or Video Clips and My Class Uses
Conferencing?
The Student View

What Is Multimedia Content?

In LearnLinc, multimedia content refers to books that incorporate several types of media, and to
audio and video clips. A multimedia book and a Director movie combines text, still pictures,
audio clips, video clips, animations, and other media. An audio or video clip is a pre-recorded
clip that can be played on its own.
Types of Multimedia Content that Can Be Synchronized
LearnLinc 4.5 supports synchronization for ToolBook 5.0 books and higher, Authorware 4.0
applications and higher, Director 7.0, and audio and video clips.
ToolBook files require the ToolBook RunTime software, which is installed with the
LearnLinc Advanced installation option.
Authorware and Director files do not require any additional software to run, but do require
the LearnLinc Advanced installation option.
Audio and video clips require a player, such as Microsofts Windows Media Player or
RealNetworks RealPlayer. Windows Media Player is installed with LearnLinc.
Synchronization
Synchronization can only take place during a LearnLinc class. When you launch a synchronized
book during class, a unique sharing channel for that piece of content opens, and all users in
the class tune in to that channel. The actions of the floor holder are sent to the rest of the
374

Using Multimedia Content During Class 18

class via this channel. You can think of this process as giving the floor holder a master remote
control that enables him or her to control eveyones content.

ToolBook, Authorware, and Director

In most cases, ToolBook, Authorware, and Director content is distributed to students before
class on CD-ROM, or via a download link in the Virtual Campus. All students must install the
content to the same location on their computers for synchronization to work properly.
While in a LearnLinc class, you can take the floor and launch the content from the class
agenda. The book or movie launches on all students computers as well. As you use the book
or movie, your actions are reflected on each students computer. These actions include things
like page turns, annotations, and shared pointer movements. The exact actions that can be
synchronized depend on the functionality that the multimedia author has chosen to include.
When you pass the floor to a student, that student can control the content for the class. When
the book or movie is no longer needed, you can take the floor and close the it for everyone in
class.
Audio and Video Clips
To synchronize an audio or video clip during class, you can take the floor and launch the clips
from the class agenda or the library. (If the class uses audio or video conferencing, you must
suspend audio/video before launching the clip.) The media player launches on everyones
computers at the same time. Each student begins to download and play the clip, at varying
speeds based on their connection to the Internet. When they are done playing the clip, each
student can close his or her own media player window.
Differing Connection Speeds among Students Affect some Kinds of Synchronization
Although all your students computers receive data telling them to launch the media player and
get the clip that you launched at the same time, they actually see the streamed media file at a
pace based on their own connection speeds.
The pace at which each student downloads the streamed file depends on his or her connection
speed. For example, if most of your students are on an office network with a very large,
dedicated connection to the Internet, they will download the files much more quickly than
students who are at home with a 28.8 kbps modem.

Connection speed does not

equal modem speed. In
most cases, when you connect
to the Internet or dial into a
network using a modem, you
do not connect at the fastest
rate your modem is capable
of. For example, if you have a
28.8 kbps modem, you might
get a connection speed of
24.4kbps. If the phone circuits
are out of date, you might
only get a connection of 19.2

375

18 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

If you know that some of your students have slow connections make sure that everyone in the
class has finished viewing the file before you restart conferencing and return to your
discussion. To check with your students, you might try either of the following before you
launch the streaming media file:
Ask your students to raise their hands when they have finished downloading the page.
Change the feedback answer set to Assignment status (Not much progress, Still working,
Almost finished, Completed) and ask students to indicate their progress in feedback as they
view the file.

Streaming media files are

audio, video, or multimedia
files that are stored on a web
site or other accessible location. When you access a
streamed media file, it begins
to play almost immediately,
and continues to download
and store the remainder of
the file as you are playing it.
Using streamed files helps you
to avoid long waits while you
download media files.

376

What if My Multimedia Content Contains Audio or Video Clips and My Class Uses
Conferencing?
If your class uses audio or video conferencing, you must release the class sound cards before
you can play the clip. Audio and video conferencing use your computers sound card to send
and receive audio data. When you run an audio clip, video clip, or a clip within a piece of
multimedia content, your computer must use your sound cardbut in a LearnLinc class, the
sound card is already in use by conferencing. When you suspend conferencing before playing
the clip, you are releasing the sound card, so that it can be used for the clip. Once the clip is
finished, you can restart your conferencing and continue with class.
If you are using LearnLincs streaming video application, conferencing is suspended for you
automatically when you launch the Streaming Video.
The Student View
When you use synchronized multimedia content in a LearnLinc class, your students see exactly
what you see. If you turn a page, the page turns on each students copy of the content as well.
If you make an annotation, each student sees it on his or her copy as well. If the floor is passed
to another student, then that students actions are reflected on each persons copy of the
content.

Using Multimedia Content During Class 18

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for using multimedia content in
a class, specifically:
Suspending Conferencing to Run an Audio or Video Clip
Launching a Synchronized Multimedia Book, Director Movie, Audio Clip, or Video Clip for
the Class
Working With ToolBook Synchronized Multimedia Books
Closing Synchronized Multimedia Books for the Class
Closing Audio and Video Clips

Suspending Conferencing to Run an Audio or Video Clip

1. Tell the class that you will be suspending conferencing. They will not be able to see or
hear you once you complete the next step.
2. Select Tools > Class > Suspend Audio/Video.

Quick Steps
1. Tell the class you are
suspending conferencing.
2. Select Tools > Class >
Suspend Audio/Video.

The message Audio/video suspended displays in the conferencing area on everyones

palettes, and your students cannot see or hear you.

377

18 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.
4.

Launch the clip from the class agenda or the library.

Select Tools > Class > Suspend Audio/Video, again to restore conferencing when the clip is
over.
Conferencing is restored when your picture (or the default instructor picture) is displayed
in the conferencing window. Your students can hear and see you again.

Launching a Synchronized Multimedia Book, Director Movie, Audio Clip, or Video

Clip for the Class
You can launch synchronized multimedia content for the class from either the class agenda or
the library. Both procedures follow.
Quick Steps
1. Make sure you are the floor
holder.
2. Double-click the desired
item in the Agenda.

Launching a Multimedia Book, Director Movie, Audio Clip, or Video Clip from the Agenda
1. Make sure you are the floor holder.
You must be the floor holder to launch an agenda item for the class.
2. Click the Agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette.
The Agenda tab is located in the middle of the palette, under the People tab.

3.

378

Double click the item you wish to launch for the class.
The content launches on each students computer.

Using Multimedia Content During Class 18

Launching a Multimedia Book, Director Movie, Audio Clip, or Video Clip from the Library
1. Make sure you are the floor holder and have Instructor authority.
You must be the floor holder and an instructor to launch a library item for the class.
2. Select Run > Library, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.
The LearnLinc library dialog displays.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you are the floor
holder.
2. Select Run > Library.
3. Double-click on the desired
item.

Depending on the type of resource you want to launch, do one of the following:
To expand the list of books, double-click Books
To exapand the list of Director movies, double-click Director Movies
To expand the list of audio clips, double-click Audioclips
To expand the list of video clips, double-click Videoclips
The resources are organized by course within each list.

379

18 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.
4.

Double-click on the folder for your course.

Highlight the desired item by clicking it once and click Open Material to launch it for
everyone.

Working With ToolBook Synchronized Multimedia Books

The following descriptions refer to the default ToolBook navigator, which is included with
LearnLinc. Authorware books, and ToolBook books that use other navigators, have their own
custom navigation systems.
Click Contents to display the contents of the book. The author may or may not
include a table of contents in the book.
Click Print to print pages of a ToolBook book. Any annotations that are visible on
the page appear on the printed version.
Use the Shared pointer to point out parts of the content to everyone in the
session. Click on Shared pointer once to turn it on. Click on it again to turn it off.
Mark up pages of the book with the Draw tool. When you draw on a page, the
annotation displays on each students copy of the book. To use the draw tool
click on it once. Move your mouse to the desired location, hold down the left
mouse button, and drag to draw on the page.
Click Erase to remove all annotations on the current page. When you have the
floor, erasing the marks on your copy of the book erases them for everyone.
Use Select color to choose the color of the draw tool and the shared pointer.
Click Select color, then click the color you wish to use.
Click Notes to open a sticky note on your copy of the book. There are several
things you can do with sticky notes:
type text on the note
move the note by clicking on its gray border and dragging
minimize the note by clicking the minimize note button
mail your note to everyone in the session by clicking the mail button
save your sticky note to a text file by clicking the disk button
delete the note by clicking the trash can button
Click Page history to turn back to the most recently viewed page.

380

Using Multimedia Content During Class 18

Click Resync class to synchronize all students to your current page.

Click Page forward to turn to the next page in the book.

Closing Synchronized Multimedia Books for the Class

1. Make sure you are the floor holder.
2. Click the Close button in the top right corner of the window.
For Authorware books, instruct your students to close the book themselves.
For ToolBook books, the Shared Close dialog displays. Click Close All to close the
book for everyone.

Closing Audio and Video Clips

1. Click the Close button in the top right corner of the Windows Media Player window.
2.

Instruct your students to close Windows Media Player themselves.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you are the floor
holder.
2. Click the Close button.
3. Click Close all if the
Shared Close dialog
displays.

Quick Steps
1. Click the close button.
2. Instruct the class to close
Media Player themselves.

381

18 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

To Learn More
To learn more about:

Please see:

Content development for

LearnLinc

LearnLinc Authoring Guide

(this guide can be found on the LearnLinc Authoring Kit CD)

ToolBook navigators

LearnLinc Authoring Guide

Macromedia Authorware and

Director

[Link]

Asymetrix ToolBook

[Link]

Streaming media

[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]

Next Steps
In this chapter, you have learned about using multimedia content during LearnLinc classes, and
how conferencing affects multimedia content. To create and use other synchronized content
options, please see:
Chapter 8, Converting your Content for LearnLinc
Chapter 11, Working with Resources
Chapter 19, Synchronizing Web Content

382

Synchronizing Web Content 19

19
Synchronizing Web Content
This chapter explains the benefits and use of the synchronized web browser, LearnLincs addon for your web browser.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Launch the synchronized web browser
Send the class to a specific web address when you launch the synchronized web browser
Allow a student to synchronize his or her web navigation
Close the synchronized web browser for yourself, or for everyone in the class
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is the synchronized web browser?
2. What is the difference between the Internet and an intranet?
3. What is the difference between HTML and other web presentation technologies?
4. What browsers does the synchronized web browser support?
5. How is synchronized web browsing affected by differing connection speeds?
6. What do students see?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
the Virtual Classroom
the LearnLinc palette
floor control

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on page 318.
The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.
The Difference Between Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Audio on page 324.

383

19 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using the synchronized web browser
effectively during LearnLinc classes. Specifically, you need to know:
What Is the Synchronized Web Browser?
When Should I Use the Synchronized Web Browser?
What Does it Synchronize?
The Difference between HTML and Other Web Presentation Technologies
The Difference Between the Internet and an Intranet
Differing Connection Speeds Among Students Affects Synchronization
Supported Browsers
Synchronizing Navigation in Frames
The Student View

A URL (Uniform Resource

Locator) is the address of a
web page or other resource
on the Internet, or an intranet.
For web pages on the Internet, a URL might take the
form of
[Link]
[Link].

384

What Is the Synchronized Web Browser?

The synchronized web browser is an add on to your Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape
Navigator web browser. When you are the floor holder in a LearnLinc class, you can use the
synchronized web browser to lead the class as you navigate the World Wide Web. When you
launch the synchronized web browser, everyone elses browsers launch as well. Since the
synchronized web browser uses the default web browser for each computer, people in the
same class can use either Internet Explorer, or Netscape Navigator. You see your regular web
browser, and you can navigate the web as you would normally. Each time you go to a new
URL, or click a new link on a web page, the class also follows that link. In between your
navigations, each student can browse at his or her own pace.

Synchronizing Web Content 19

When Should I Use the Synchronized Web Browser?

If your content changes often and must be readily accessible to students during and outside of
class, consider creating HTML content and browsing it with the synchronized web browser.
Assuming you have access to a web server, or to someone who can help you post your content
to a web server, you can make last minute changes quickly and easilywithout worrying about
distributing those changes to your students. Additionally, you can create your HTML content in
a variety of ways, including:
using a WYSWIG (What you see is what you get) editor, such as Microsoft Front Page,
Macromedia DreamWeaver, Adobe PageMill, or many others
converting existing documents to HTML using popular office applications, such as Microsoft
Word, PowerPoint, or Excel
using the Virtual Campus to convert your PowerPoint presentations to HTML and add them
to courses and classes.
What Does it Synchronize?
The synchronized web browser synchronizes HTML navigation. Many web pages contain other
content, such as CGI scripts, JavaScript, VBScript, ASP (Active Server Pages), Java, and
Macromedia Shockwave presentations, however these elements are not synchronized by the
synchronized web browser. For example, you may lead the class to a page that contains a form
that you are using as a test, and then instruct your students to fill out and submit the form
individually.
The Difference between HTML and Other Web Presentation Technologies
HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) is a set of markup tags that are inserted into a file so
that it can be displayed in a web browser. These tags indicate text formatting, such as bold or
italic, font size or color, and also references to images and links to other pages. For example,
the tag <em>text</em> would produce the result text in your web browser. The
synchronized web browser enables the floor holder in a LearnLinc class to tell the rest of the
class to follow as he or she navigates HTML links to web pages.
Over the past several years, many other technologies have been developed for presenting
information on the web. CGI scripts, Javascript, VBScript, ASP, Java, and Macromedia
Shockwave presentations are several popular presentation technologies that you have probably
encountered when surfing the webpossibly without even knowing it! These technologies have

385

19 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

been developed to meet the growing need for more sophisticated presentations and higher
levels of interactivity on most web sites.
While you may choose to use some of these technologies to create your web content, you
cannot synchronize these types of content with the synchronized web browser. Since they do
not use HTML links, the synchronized web browser cannot tell the rest of the class to follow
you as you interact with these items. In some cases, this may work to your advantage. For
example, you might use the synchronized web browser to lead your class through a content
unit, the last page of which is a test that was created using ASP. You can lead everyone to the
test page by entering the URL in the browser, or following an HTML link, and then each student
can complete the test and submit his or results independently via the ASP code.

The Difference Between the Internet and an Intranet

The Internet is a worldwide system of computer networks, in which a user on a computer on
one network can get information from any other computer on any other network, assuming he
or she has permission. The Internet is a public resource that is used by millions of people
around the world. Two of the most common uses of the Internet are sending email and
browsing the World Wide Web. The Web is made up of millions of web sites that are connected
through hypertext links. These hypertext links are cross references that visitors can follow
instantly with a simple mouse-click. Often, the pages of a web site are developed using
Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). Using HTML, a web site owner can add text, images, and
hypertext links to page. Using the synchronized web browser, your students can follow you
around the Web as you click on hypertext links.
By contrast, an intranet is a private network or series of networks that is contained within an
organization. Many organizations use their intranets to share company information and
computing resources among their members, including the ability for groups to share
information collaboratively, using tools such as LearnLinc. Intranets typically contain an internal
web site as well. Anyone whose computer is on the intranet can access the internal web site,
but all others are blocked from visiting. In addition, many intranets do provide access to the
Internet for those on the inside through firewalls that have the ability to screen messages in
both directions so that company security is maintained.

386

Synchronizing Web Content 19

What difference does this make to the synchronized web browser?

The type of connection that you and your students have to the Virtual Classroom affects the
types of web content that you can access.
If everyone joins the class from the public Internet, you can navigate any content on the
Internet, but not content stored on an intranet.
If everyone joins the class from your intranet, you can navigate content on your
organizations intranet, but you cannot access the public Internet unless your organization
allows Internet access through a firewall.
If you are on an intranet, and some of your students join class via that intranet while others
join via the Internet, those on the Internet will not be able to see your intranets content. If
your intranet allows for Internet access, you can synchronize Internet web navigation with
everyone in the class.
Differing Connection Speeds Among Students Affects Synchronization
The speed at which each student is connected to the Internet or your network will affect how
quickly they receive your web synchronization. Although all students will receive your
navigation change at the same time, some may not be able to see the page as quickly as others,
due to the speed at which they download the page.
When you navigate to a web page, your web browser must download the page, and each
element on the page, such as graphics, one at a time. When you synchronize web navigation,
each students browser must still download the page individually. If some students have slower
connections, they download the page more slowly than others.
The pace at which you download the page elements depends on your connection speed. For
example, if you are on your office network, which has a very large, dedicated connection to
the Internet you will download a page much more quickly than you might at home with your
28.8 kbps modem. However, if you are sharing your fast network connection with 100 other
users, many of whom are also browsing the web, you may actually have faster speed at home!

Connection speed does not

equal modem speed. In
most cases, when you connect
to the Internet or dial into a
network using a modem, you
do not connect at the fastest
rate your modem is capable
of. For example, if you have a
28.8 kbps modem, you might
get a connection speed of
24.4kbps. If the phone circuits
are out of date, you might
only get a connection of 19.2

387

19 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

If you know that some of your students have slow connections make sure that everyone in the
class has finished downloading the most recent page before you begin your discussion. To
check with your students, you might try either of the following:
Ask your students to raise their hands when they have finished downloading the page.
Change the feedback answer set to Assignment status (Not much progress, Still working,
Almost finished, Completed) and ask students to indicate their progress in feedback as they
receive the page.

Supported Browsers
LearnLinc 4.5 supports the following browsers for synchronization:
Microsoft Internet Explorer versions 4.01 w/service pack 1, and 5.0
Netscape Navigator versions 4.05 and 4.08
Netscape Communicator 4.7x

Frames enable multiple pages

to display at the same time in
a single browser window. For
example, many web sites have
two frames: a navigation frame
on the left or right that contains a table of contents, and
a content frame, that displays
the contents of the site and
takes up the remainder of the
browser window.

388

Synchronizing Navigation in Frames

Although LearnLinc supports both Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator,
synchronizing navigation in frames is handled differently in each browser.
For frames to work properly with Internet Explorer, both the floor holder and the students
must have Internet Explorer. If your content relies heavily on frames, we recommend that
you use Internet Explorer on all LearnLinc computers.
Netscape users cannot view synchronized content containing frames. They will see the
content of one of the frames, and may have multiple windows display on their screens. To
assist a Navigator user when he or she takes the floor, instruct him or her to navigate to the
address of the frame set first, so that all the frames are visible.
The Student View
When you launch the synchronized web browser for the class, each students web browser
opens on his or her computer as well. As you navigate to a web page, each students browser
follows. Remember, however, that they may not receive the page as quickly as you. Once they
have received the page, they are free to scroll, follow links on that page, or navigate to other
sites as desired. Each time you follow a link or navigate to a new page, all students are resynchronized to your new location.

Synchronizing Web Content 19

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks for using the synchronized web
browser in a class, specifically:
Launching the Synchronized Web Browser
Closing the Synchronized Web Browser for Yourself or the Class
Unless otherwise noted, information in the following screen shots is for example only. In some
cases, partial screen shots may be used, which represent part of a larger interface element,
rather than the entire interface. Partial screen shots are represented by jagged, tear off edges.

Launching the Synchronized Web Browser

1. Make sure you are in a class, and you are the current floor holder.
If you are the current floor holder, the red On Air symbol displays at the top of the
LearnLinc palette.

2.

Quick Steps
1. Click the agenda tab on the
LearnLinc palette.
2. Click the synchronized web
browser shortcut.
3. Navigate to the desired web
site.

Click the Agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette.

The Agenda tab is located under the People tab. The Agenda tab contains a list of links
to class resources, and shortcuts to commonly used LearnLinc classroom applications.

389

19 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

4.

Click the synchronized web browser shortcut.

The synchronized web browser launches on your computer, and on each students
computer.
Type a web address in the Address field of your browser and press <Enter>.
Everyone in the class navigates to that address.

As you navigate, the class follows in their own browsers. You can navigate using HTML
links, favorites or bookmarks, or by entering URLs in the Address field.
Quick Steps
1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Select File > Close, from
your browsers menu bar.
3. Select Close All, Close
Mine, or Cancel.

Closing the Synchronized Web Browser for Yourself or the Class

1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Select File > Close, from your browsers menu bar.
The Shared Close dialog displays.

Select:
Close Mine, to close your own browser, but leave everyone elses open.
Close All, to close everyones browsers.
Cancel, to close the dialog and leave all browsers open, including your own.

390

Synchronizing Web Content 19

To Learn More
To learn more about:

Please see:

Creating HTML content for use with

LearnLinc

Converting your Content for LearnLinc on page 151

The Internet and the World Wide Web

Learn the Net at [Link]

NetLearn at [Link]
netlearn/[Link]
The Internet Information Center at
[Link]

Next Steps
The synchronized web browser is only one of several options for delivering synchronized
content to your class. If you would like to use other content delivery options, please see:
Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

391

19 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

392

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

20
Collaborating With Your Students on the
Whiteboard
This chapter explains the benefits and use of the whiteboard, LearnLincs shared workspace.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Use the whiteboard outside of class
Use the whiteboard during class
Update the whiteboard for others
Save and print whiteboard files
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is the whiteboard?
2. Who can use the whiteboard?
3. Where are whiteboard files stored?
4. What do students see?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
the Virtual Classroom

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on page 318.

the LearnLinc palette

The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.

393

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

floor control

The Difference Between Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Audio on page 324.

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using the whiteboard correctly.
Specifically, you need to understand:
What Is the Whiteboard?
Who Can Use the Whiteboard?
Storing Files on your Computer for Use in a LearnLinc Class
Whiteboard Synchronization
The Student View

What Is the Whiteboard?

The whiteboard is a shared work space in which you can present information to and
collaborate with your students. You can use the whiteboard to make notes, draw simple
graphics, import images, and grab screen captures of other applications.
When you place an object on any area of the whiteboard (such as the shared pointer or a
graphic), the students whiteboards scroll to view the new object. This allows you to create

394

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

larger whiteboard images without worrying about whether or not your students will see the
information on which you are focusing.

Who Can Use the Whiteboard?

As with other LearnLinc classroom tools, the floor holder controls the whiteboard. The floor
holder can use all of the whiteboard tools, including the shared pointer, drawing and text tools,
and screen grab. The rest of the class can see the floor holders actions but they cannot use any
of the tools. However, anyone can save or print a copy of the whiteboard at any time.
Additionally, any LearnLinc user can use the whiteboard to create or modify whiteboard files
on their own outside of the Virtual Classroom.
Storing Files on your Computer for Use in a LearnLinc Class
If you create a whiteboard file before class, store it on the computer from which youll be
teaching that class or on a network drive that you will have access to during class.
You can access your whiteboard files during class by opening them in the whiteboard, or
launching them from the agenda. Note, however, that if you create an agenda item for a

395

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

whiteboard file that is stored on your local computer, others in the class will not be able to
access it unless you launch it for them while you have the floor.

Whiteboard Synchronization
When you are in class your whiteboard may be in either of two states: in sync or waiting for
sync.
Those who are in a class and actively receiving whiteboard information are in sync.
Those who have joined a class but are waiting to receive whiteboard information are
waiting for sync.
Anyone who is in sync can update whiteboards that are waiting for sync by clicking Send
Update on the whiteboard toolbar. In sync students and the instructor see an indicator on their
whiteboard status bar when other students are waiting for sync.

The Student View

Students see the exact same whiteboard tools and menus as the instructor and can perform all
the same whiteboard tasks as instructors when they have the floor.
Regardless of whether they have the floor, students can print and save the whiteboard at any
time. Additionally, they can open the whiteboard on their own, outside of class, to create new
whiteboard files and view or modify existing files.

396

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks for using the whiteboard on your
own and during a class, specifically:
Using the Whiteboard on your Own
Saving Whiteboard Files
Printing Whiteboard Files
Launching the Whiteboard for the Class
Opening your Whiteboard Files for the Class
Updating the Whiteboard for Others
Using the Shared Pointer
Adding Text
Drawing Lines, Ellipses, Rectangles, and Freehand Shapes
Changing the Line Weight, Line Color, and Fill Color
Importing a Picture
Grabbing a Screen Shot and Placing it on the Whiteboard
Closing the Whiteboard for the Class

397

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Whiteboard.
2. Use the whiteboard as
desired.

Using the Whiteboard on your Own

1. Make sure you have downloaded and installed the LearnLinc client from the Virtual
Campus web site.
The whiteboard is part of the LearnLinc classroom software. You must have installed the
classroom software to use the whiteboard.
2. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Whiteboard, from the Windows task bar.

3.

398

The whiteboard launches.

Use the whiteboard as desired. You can:
create new whiteboard files
open and modify existing whiteboard files
print the current whiteboard
See the remainder of the topics in this chapter for details on each whiteboard tool.

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Saving Whiteboard Files

1. Select File > Save.

Quick Steps
1. Select File > Save.
2. Name the file and click Save.

The Save as dialog displays.

2.
3.
4.

Select a drive and folder in which to store the whiteboard file.

Enter a name for the file in the File name dialog.
Click Save.

399

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Printing Whiteboard Files

1. Select File > Print.

1. Select File > Print.

2. Choose a printer and
number of copies and click
OK.

The Print dialog displays.

2.
3.

Select the desired printer and number of copies.

Click OK.
Note that the whiteboard printing function automatically scales the
objects on the whiteboard so that they print on one page.

400

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Launching the Whiteboard for the Class

1. Make sure you are the floor holder.
You must be the floor holder to launch an agenda item for the class.
2. Click the Agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette.
The Agenda tab is located in the middle of the palette, under the People tab.

3.

Quick Steps
Click the whiteboard
shortcut on the
Agenda tab.

Click the whiteboard shortcut to open the whiteboard.

Launching a Whiteboard File from the Agenda

1. Make sure you are the floor holder.
You must be the floor holder to launch an agenda item for the class.
2. Click the Agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette.
3. Double click the whiteboard file you wish to launch for the class.
The whiteboard launches on each students computer.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you are the floor
holder.
2. Double-click the desired
item in the Agenda.

401

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you are the floor
holder.
2. Select Run > Library.
3. Double-click on the desired
item.

Launching a Whiteboard File from the Library

1. Make sure you are the floor holder. You must be the floor holder to launch a library item
for the class.
2. Select Run > Library, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar to display the LearnLinc library
dialog.

3.

Double-click Whiteboard Resources to expand the list of whiteboard files.

4.

Locate the desired whiteboard file, click it once and click Open Material to launch it for
the class.
You can only open the whiteboard file if it is stored in an accessible
location. If the whiteboard file is stored on a drive or computer that you
cannot access, you will receive an error message stating that the file
cannot be opened.

402

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Opening your Whiteboard Files for the Class

1. Make sure you are the floor holder.
2. Select File > Open, on the whiteboard menu bar.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you are the floor
holder.
2. Select File >Open.
3. Highlight the file and click
Open.

The Open dialog displays.

3.

Navigate to the desired drive and folder to locate your whiteboard file and click Open.
The whiteboard file you selected opens for you, and is sent to each student. You can work
with the file and save your changes as desired.

403

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
Click Send Update.

Updating the Whiteboard for Others

1. Watch the whiteboard status bar for the waiting for update message.
2. Select Sharing > Send Update, on the whiteboard menu bar.

Everyone who is waiting to be updated receives a copy of your whiteboard contents.

Quick Steps
1. Click Shared Pointer.
2. Click anywhere on the
whiteboard.

Using the Shared Pointer

1. Click Shared pointer on the whiteboard toolbar.

2.

The shared pointer displays on your whiteboard.

Click your mouse to move the shared pointer to the desired location on the whiteboard.
When you click, everyone sees the shared pointer in that location.

Quick Steps

Adding Text
1. Click Text on the whiteboard toolbar.

1. Click Text.
2. Drag to create a text box.
3. Enter the text.

2.
3.

Quick Steps
1. Click Selection Pointer.
2. Click once on the text box.
3. Edit the text.

Editing Text
1. Click Selection pointer on the whiteboard toolbar.
2.
3.

404

The cross-hair cursor displays.

Position the cursor over the whiteboard and drag diagonally to create a text box.
The blinking I-beam cursor indicates the starting point for the text.
Enter the desired text.

Double-click the text to activate its text box.

The I-beam cursor displays.
Position the cursor at the text you wish to change and edit the text as desired.

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Moving or Resizing the Text Box

1. Click Selection pointer.
4.

Click on the text box once.

Square anchors display in each corner once the text box is selected.

Quick Steps
1. Click Selection Pointer.
2. Click once on the text box.
3. Drag the box border to
move it, or an anchor to
resize it.

To move the text box, place the mouse over the text box border and drag while holding
down the left mouse button.
To resize the text field, click on an anchor and drag while holding down the left mouse
button.

405

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Drawing Lines, Ellipses, Rectangles, and Freehand Shapes

1. Click the desired graphic tool.

1. Click a graphic tool.

2. Drag the cursor to create
that type of graphic.

Use the line tool to draw horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines.
Use the ellipse tool to draw ovals and circles.
Use the rectangle tool to draw rectangles and squares.
Use the freehand tool to draw freehand lines.

2.
Quick Steps
1. Click Selection Pointer.
2. Click the graphic once.
3. Drag an anchor to resize the
graphic.

406

The cross-hair cursor displays.

Position the cursor over the whiteboard and drag while holding down the left mouse
button to create a graphic shape.

Moving or Resizing a Graphic

1. Click Selection Pointer.
2.

Click the graphic once.

Square anchors display in each corner.
To move the graphic, place the mouse over the graphic border and drag while holding
down the left mouse button.
To resize the graphic, click on an anchor and drag while holding down the left mouse
button.

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Changing the Line Weight, Line Color, and Fill Color

1. Click Selection Pointer.
2.
3.

Click on the graphic once.

Square anchors display in each corner.
Click Line Weight, Line Color, or Fill Color.
Select a line weight and type from the line selection box.

Quick Steps
1. Click Selection Pointer.
2. Click once on the graphic.
3. Click Line Weight, Line
Color, or Fill Color.
4. Select the desired weight or
color.

Select a line color from the color selection box.

Select a fill color from the color selection box.

Importing a Picture
1. Click Insert picture.
You can insert bitmap (.bmp), jpeg (.jpg), and ping (.png) image files.
The Open dialog displays.

Quick Steps
1. Click Insert Picture.
2. Locate a picture and click
Open.
3. Stamp the picture on the
whiteboard.

407

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.
3.

Select the desired picture and click Open.

The selection pointer and a box the size of the picture display.
Stamp the picture on to the whiteboard by positioning the pointer in the desired location
and clicking once. The picture displays at that location.

Quick Steps

Moving or Cropping a Picture

1. Click Selection Pointer.

1. Click Selection Pointer.

2. Click once on the picture.
3. Drag the picture border to
move it, or an anchor to
resize it.

2.

408

Click on the picture once.

Square anchors display in each corner.
To move the picture, place the cursor over the picture and drag while holding down the
left mouse button.
To crop the picture, position the cursor over one of the anchors and drag while holding
down the left mouse button.

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Grabbing a Screen Shot and Placing it on the Whiteboard

1. Open the application you wish to capture.
Configure the application if necessary.
2. Select Grab > Grab Snapshot, from the whiteboard menu bar.

The whiteboard minimizes and the Select Window dialog displays at the bottom of the
screen.

3.

4.

Quick Steps
1. Select Grab > Grab
Snapshot.
2. Drag the capture tool on to
the application you want to
grab.
3. Stamp the screen capture on
the whiteboard.

Drag the capture tool over the target window and release the mouse button.

The whiteboard window restores and the selection pointer and a box the size of the
picture display.
Stamp the screen capture into the whiteboard by positioning the pointer in the desired
location and clicking once. The screen capture displays at that location.

Closing the Whiteboard for the Class

1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Save the whiteboard if desired.
You may wish to instruct your students to save individual copies of the whiteboard.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you have the
floor.
2. Select File > Exit, and click
Close All.

409

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.

Select File > Exit.

The Shared Close dialog displays.

4.

410

Click Close All to close the whiteboard for everyone in the class.
You have the options of close the whiteboard for yourself or canceling as well.

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard 20

Next Steps
The whiteboard is one of several LearnLinc classroom tools. If you would like to know more
about the other LearnLinc classroom tools, please see:
Chapter 16

Recording Classes

page 341

Chapter 17

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

page 365

Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 21

Sharing Applications With the Class

page 413

Chapter 22

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

page 439

Chapter 23

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

page 445

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

411

20 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

412

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

21
Sharing Applications With the Class
This chapter explains the benefits and use of AppShare and AppViewLearnLincs application
sharing tools.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Launch and close AppShare
Share applications with the class
Let a student use a shared application
Let students share their applications with the class
Launch and close AppView
Show applications to the class
Set AppView to split-screen
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is application sharing?
2. What applications can I share?
3. Why are there two tools for application sharing, and when should I use each?
4. What do students see?

413

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
the Virtual Classroom

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on

page 318.

the LearnLinc palette

The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.

floor control

Floor Control on page 215.

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using AppShare and AppView correctly.
Specifically, you need to understand:
What Is Application Sharing?
What Applications Can I Share?
AppShare
AppView
Deciding Between AppShare and AppView
The Student View

What Is Application Sharing?

Application sharing is the ability of the class instructor to share an application on his or her
computer with students in a LearnLinc class when the students do not have that application
installed on their computers. As the class instructor, you can share any application on your
computer with the class.
Depending on the tool used to share the application you can:
share your actions with the class while you use your applications
enable a student to use the shared applications as the rest of the class watches
enable a student to share his or her own applications with the class
Generally, application sharing is more effective if the instructor talks participants through each
step, and gives them a few seconds to recognize what has changed in their display window.

414

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

What Applications Can I Share?

You can share any application that is installed on your computer. Note that you can only share
16-bit applications by sharing the entire desktop. If an application that is running on your
computer does not display in your application list, even after refreshing the list, it is a 16-bit
application. Share your desktop to share the application with the class.
Neither AppShare nor AppView respect Privacy mode. You may run a
second, private copy of the application you are presenting, as long as that
application allows two copies of itself to run on a single computer.

AppShare
AppShare can be used in any LearnLinc class. AppShare enables you to:
share your actions on any applications with the class
allow a student in the class to use your shared application
allow a student in the class to share his or her own application with the class
allow the floor holder to use another students shared applications
Note that depending on the configuration for your class, AppShare may display either color or
grayscale images. Your instructor or class scheduler can choose the AppShare display settings
based on your class bandwidth availability and the types of applications you plan to share.
Please see Bandwidth on page 217 for more information.
AppView
AppView can only be used in classes that are held on a multicast network. AppView enables
you to show your actions on any application to the class. Students cannot use your shared
application, or share their own applications with AppView.
Tips for Using AppView
AppView uses a consistent amount of bandwidth to broadcast bitmaps. For example, using
AppView to show students a large spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel uses the same amount
of network resources as showing the Windows Calculator. However, it may take longer
for students to receive updates of applications that take up most of the desktop area. Adjust
the pace at which you are teaching according to the display size of the application that you
are broadcasting.

A local or wide area network

(LAN or WAN) is multicast if it
has multicast enabled routers.
Multicast-enabled routers send
data to the computers on their
network more efficiently than
standard routers, so that a lot
of data can be sent without
overloading the network. Multi
cast classes cannot work over
the public Internet. Check with
your system administrator to
see if your network is multicast
enabled.

415

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

You can use AppView to demonstrate the use of Windows Explorer, however, the entire
desktop displays in the AppView window because Windows Explorer is part of the
Windows 95 Operating System.
AppView cannot display an MS-DOS window set to full screen size.

Deciding Between AppShare and AppView

Depending on your network configuration, you may have access to one or both of the
LearnLinc application sharing tools.
For both AppShare and AppView, only the person who is sharing the application has to have it
installed on his or her computereveryone else in the class sees a copy of the application in a
display window.
Although AppShare has additional functionality that enables students to share applications as
well as view them, instructors who are teaching on multicast-enabled networks may choose to
use AppView to conserve bandwidth. Because AppView simply reflects the actions of the
instructor on the application, rather than allowing students to use the shared application, it uses
less bandwidth. Additionally, because AppView is designed to be run on multicast networks, it
sends data from the instructor to the class in an efficient manner.
The Student View
When you launch AppShare or AppView and select an application to share, a display window
launches on each students computer.
For AppShare, multiple applications can be shown in the display window at one time. You can
choose to share any students applications by selecting a student in the AppShare control
dialog, and choosing one or more of their applications. However, the student is always
prompted to allow or deny you access to his or her applications.
For AppView, only one application can be displayed at a time. Students see that application in
the display window. When you switch applications, the previous application is replaced with
the most recently selected application.
The remainder of this chapter is divided into two sections. The first
provides detailed directions for AppShare, and the second for AppView.

416

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

Detailed Directions for AppShare

The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for using AppShare in a class,
specifically:
Sharing Your Applications With the Class
Selecting Other Applications to Share With the Class
Allowing a Student to Share his or her Applications
Closing AppShare
Using AppShare in an Open Discussion Class
Taking Control of AppShare in an Open Discussion Class
Sharing Your Applications With the Class
1. Make sure your monitor is set to display 16 bit color (high color) or higher.
You can check this setting by right-clicking on your desktop and selecting Properties
from the shortcut menu. Your color palette information can be found on the Settings tab.
2. Take the floor.
If you are the current floor holder, the red On Air symbol displays at the top of the
LearnLinc palette.

3.

Make sure each application you wish to share is open and configured properly.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure your monitor is
set to display 16 bit color or
higher.
2. Take the floor holder.
3. Open and configure the
applications you wish to
share.
4. Click the agenda tab on the
LearnLinc palette.
5. Click the AppShare shortcut.
6. Select one or more
applications to share and
click Start.

Try launching and configuring

all of the applications you plan
to share before class starts.
Doing so enables you to make
quick transitions between
applications during class.

417

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

If you are in a multicast class,

4.

Select Run > Application Sharing, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.
The Select Application dialog displays.

5.

Check each application you want to share with the class, or check Desktop to share all
your applications.

the agenda shortcut will

launch AppView instead of
AppShare. You must use the
Run menu to launch
AppShare.

If you are sharing your desktop

and you are concerned about
displaying your palette to your
students consider this alternative. Set up a second LearnLinc
computer, log it in to the class,
and run the applications to be
shared on that computer.
Select it as the presenting
user in AppShare. You can
use its applications in the AppShare window, and keep your
palette information private.

418

If an application that is running on your computer does not display in

your application list, even after refreshing the list, it is a 16-bit
application. You must share your entire desktop to share that application
with the class.
6.

If you plan to allow a student to use the shared applications, check Allow floor holder to
control presented applications.
Checking this option allows students to control your shared applications when you pass
the floor to them.

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

7.

8.

Select the display window placement for the students computers. Choose from the
following options:
Upper half sizes the students display windows to fit the upper half of the content
area. Instruct your students to run their own copy of the application in the lower half of
the content area.
Lower half sizes the students display windows to fit the lower half of the content area.
Instruct your students to run their own copy of the application in the upper half of the
content area.
Full content area sizes the students display windows to fit the entire content area on
their screens.
Click Start.
The LearnLinc AppShare window displays on your computer, with a list of all
applications that are being presented.

Note that regardless of where

you place the students display
window, your applications will
display where they are placed
on your desktop. If you opt to
place the students display windows in the upper half of their
screens, but place the application you are sharing at the
bottom of your screen, the
students will have to use the
scroll bars to find the application in their AppShare
windows.

If you have students with slow

9.

The AppShare display window launches on each students computer, and displays the
selected applications.
Use the applications as desired.
Your actions are reflected in each students display window as you take them.
Do not allow any other windows to overlap the applications you are
sharing. Doing so obscures the view for students.

internet connections, you may

wish to use feedback to
ensure that they have received
the AppShare window and its
contents. Before you click
Start, change your feedback
answer set to Yes/No, and
instruct your students to click
Yes once they see the
shared application.

419

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Open and configure the
applications to share.
2. Click LearnLinc AppShare
on the Windows taskbar.
3. Click Change....
4. Select the applications to
share.
5. Click Start.

420

Selecting Other Applications to Share With the Class

1. Make sure the new applications you wish to share are open and configured properly.
2. If you have minimized the LearnLinc AppShare dialog, click on its taskbar button to
restore it.
3. Click Change....
The Select Application dialog displays.

4.

If the application you wish to share does not display in the list, click Refresh List.

5.

Check each new application you want to share, and clear the checkmarks next to each
application you want to stop sharing.

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

6.

7.

Click Start.
Once the application has been shared, the LearnLinc AppShare window displays on your
computer, with an updated list of all applications that are being presented.

The AppShare display window on each students computer updates to display the
applications in the list.
Use the applications as desired.
Your actions are reflected in each students display window.

421

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Click Configure on the
LearnLinc AppShare dialog.
1. Select a students name from
the Presenting User drop
down box.
2. Click Yes when the warning
dialog displays.
3. Check the applications you
want the student to share.
4. Click Start.

Allowing a Student to Share his or her Applications

1. If you have minimized the LearnLinc AppShare dialog, click its button on the Windows
taskbar to restore it.
2. Click Change....

3.

The Select Application dialog displays.

Select a students name from the Presenting User drop down box.

The LearnLinc AppShare Warning dialog displays.

422

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

4.

Click Yes.
A list of all the applications running on the students computer displays in the list.

5.

Check each application you wish to share, or check Desktop to share the students entire
screen.
Check Allow floor holder to control presented applications if you want other students in
the class to be able to control the students applications.
Select the display window placement for the students computers.
Click Start.
The Waiting for confirmation dialog displays. If you click Cancel at any time the
students applications will not be shared.

6.
7.
8.

423

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The student is prompted to either allow or deny you access to the applications on his or
her computer. The student sees the following dialog:

If the student denies you access to his or her applications, a dialog displays with the
message The student has chosen not to share his or her application with you. You
cannot present his or her applications to the class. The AppShare control dialog displays
again. You can try again, choose another student from the list, or share your own
applications with the class instead.
If the student allows you access to his or her applications, you and the student can
control the shared applications, or you can pass the floor to any student to allow him or
her to control the shared applications.

Updating Students AppShare Windows

If a student joins late, or closes and re-opens his or her AppShare window, the Update
Students warning displays.

If you want to update the student, click Update Now. There may be a delay in the
AppShare session for the entire class while the students computer is updated.
If you want to wait and update the student at a later time, click Update Later. You can
update the student at any time by restoring the LearnLinc AppShare dialog from the
Windows taskbar and clicking Send Update.

424

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

Closing AppShare
1. Take the floor.
2. If you have minimized the LearnLinc AppShare dialog, click on its taskbar button to
restore it.
3. Click Quit.
The LearnLinc AppShare dialog closes and the Shared Close dialog displays.

4.

Quick Steps
1. Take the floor.
2. Click the AppShare button
on the Windows taskbar.
3. Click Quit.
4. Click Close All.

Click Close All to close AppShare for everyone.

Using AppShare in an Open Discussion Class

1. Make sure your monitor is set to display 16 bit color (high color) or higher.
You can check this setting by right-clicking on your desktop and selecting Properties
from the shortcut menu. Your color palette information can be found on the Settings tab.
2. Make sure the applications you wish to share are open and configured properly.
3. Take the floor.
4. Select Run > Application Sharing, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.
The LearnLinc AppShare dialog displays.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure your monitor is
set to display 16 bit color or
higher.
2. Open and configure the
applications you want to
share.
3. Take the floor.
4. Select Run > Application
Sharing, from the LearnLinc
palette menu bar.
5. Click Change....
6. Select the applications to
share.
7. Configure AppShare and
click Start.

425

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

5.

Click Change....
The Select Application dialog displays.

6.

Check each application you want to share with the class, or check Desktop to share all
your applications.
If an application that is running on your computer does not display in
your application list, even after refreshing the list, it is a 16-bit
application. You must share your entire desktop to share that application
with the class.

7.
8.

426

If you want others to use your applications when they have the floor, check Allow floor
holder to control presented applications.
Select Upper half, Lower half, or Full content area for the display window.

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

9.

Click Start.
Once the application has been shared, the LearnLinc AppShare window displays on your
computer, with a list of all applications that are being presented.

The AppShare display window launches on each students computer, and displays the
selected applications.
10. Use the applications as desired.
Your actions are reflected in each students display window as you take them.
Do not allow any other windows to overlap the applications you are
sharing. Doing so obscures the view for students.
Note that if another user takes the floor, you can continue to share your applications, but you
cannot change the applications you are presenting. The floor holder can stop your presentation
and starts his or her own at any time.

427

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Take the floor.
2. Restore the LearnLinc
AppShare dialog.
3. Click Change....
4. Click OK when the warning
dialog displays.
5. Check each application you
wish to share with the class.
6. Configure Appshare and
click Start.

Taking Control of AppShare in an Open Discussion Class

1. Take the floor.
2. If you have minimized the LearnLinc AppShare dialog, click its button on the Windows
taskbar to restore it.
3. Click Change....
The LearnLinc AppShare warning dialog displays.

If you wish to stop the other users presentation and start sharing your own applications
with the class click OK.
If you do not want to stop the other users presentation click No.
The Select Application dialog displays.

428

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

4.

Check each application you want to share with the class, or check Desktop.
If an application that is running on your computer does not display in
your application list, even after refreshing the list, it is a 16-bit
application. You must share your entire desktop to share that application
with the class.

5.
6.
7.

8.

If you want others to use your applications when they have the floor, check Allow floor
holder to control presented applications.
Select Upper half, Lower half, or Full content area for the display window.
Click Start.
Once the application has been shared, the LearnLinc AppShare window displays on your
computer, with a list of all applications that are being presented.

The AppShare display window launches on each students computer, and displays the
selected applications.
Use the applications as desired. Your actions are reflected in each students display
window as you take them.
Do not allow any other windows to overlap the applications you are
sharing. Doing so obscures the view for students.
Note that if another user takes the floor, you can continue to share your applications but
you cannot change the applications you are presenting. The floor holder can stop your
presentation and starts his or her own at any time.

429

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions for AppView

The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for using AppView in a class,
specifically:
Launching AppView
Setting AppView to Split-Screen View
Showing a Different Application to the Class
Closing AppView
Quick Steps
1. Launch and configure the
application you wish to
share.
2. Select Run > Application
Viewing from the LearnLinc
palette menu bar.
3. Click Select Window.
4. Highlight an application and
click OK.

Launching AppView
1. Launch the application you wish to share and configure it as desired.
2. Select Run > Application Viewing, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.

The AppView dialog displays.

430

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

3.

Click Select Window to display the Select window dialog.

4.

Highlight an application from the Select Application list and click OK.
The AppView display window launches on each students computer with the selected
application in it.
Work with the application as desired. The students see your actions in their display
windows.

5.

Do not allow any other windows to overlap the AppView application.

Doing so obscures the view for students.

431

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Click AppView on the
Windows taskbar to restore
it.
2. Click Select Window.
3. Highlight the desired
application and click OK.

Showing a Different Application to the Class

1. Click the AppView button on the Windows taskbar to restore AppView.
2. Click Select Window to display the Select window dialog.

3.
4.

432

Highlight the new application from the Select Application list and click OK to start
sending the applications image to the class.
Work with the application as desired.
The students see your actions in their display windows. The previously shared application
continues to run on your computer, but it is no longer shared with the class.

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

Closing AppView
1. Restore the AppView dialog from the Windows task bar.
The AppView dialog displays.

2.

Click Exit.
The Shared Close dialog displays.

3.

Click Close All to close AppView on all students computers.

Quick Steps
1. Click the AppView button on
the Windows taskbar to
restore it.
2. Click Exit.
3. Click Close All.

433

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc > Administration
Tool.
2. Log-in to the Administration
tool.
3. Select Resource >
Application, from the left
pane.
4. Double-click AppView in the
right pane.
5. Enter -upper or
-lower in the suffix field.
6. Click OK.

Setting AppView to Split-Screen View

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Administration Tool, from the Windows taskbar.

The Administration tool launches on your computer.

Note that you must be an administrator to complete this task, and you
must do so before class begins.

434

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

2.

3.

Enter your LearnLinc server name.

Your server name is the domain name for your LearnLinc server computer. For example,
[Link]. Do not include the virtual directory for your LearnLinc Virtual
Campus.
Enter your account information and click Log-in.
The Administration tool displays.

435

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

436

4.

In the left pane, click the plus box (+) next to the Resource folder to expand it.
The resource folders display in the right pane.

5.

Click the Application folder to display its contents.

Sharing Applications With the Class 21

6.

Double-click the AppView icon to display its property sheet.

7.

In the Suffix Flags field, type either of the following

-upper to display AppView in the upper half of the content area.
-lower to display AppView in the lower half of the content area.
Click OK to save your changes.
When you run AppView in a class, instruct each student to size their application to fill the
remainder of the content area.

8.
9.

437

21 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Next Steps
AppShare and AppView are two of several LearnLinc classroom tools. If you would like to
know more about the other classroom tools, please see:

438

Chapter 16

Recording Classes

page 341

Chapter 17

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

page 365

Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

Chapter 22

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

page 439

Chapter 23

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

page 445

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class 22

22
Getting Instant Feedback from the Class
This chapter explains the benefits and use of feedback., LearnLincs instant polling application.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Ask your students to use feedback to respond to a question
Change the answer set
Share the feedback summary results with the class
Clear the feedback answers
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is feedback?
2. What are the available answer options?
3. What do students see?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a thorough understanding of
the following concepts:
the Virtual Classroom

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on

page 318.

the LearnLinc palette

The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.

439

22 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using feedback correctly. Specifically,
you need to understand:
What Is Feedback?
What Are My Answer Options?
The Student View

What Is Feedback?
Feedback is a polling application that you can use to ask a question, verbally or via text chat,
and see students responses instantly as they select from a pre-defined answer set. While
anyone can ask the class to answer a question with feedback, only the instructor can change
the answer set, share the answer results with the class, and clear the answers. These options
are available in the Tools menu, and by right-clicking to see the feedback shortcut menu.
Feedback is located just below the People tab on the LearnLinc palette. You cannot move or
close the feedback display. You can use feedback at any time during class, and change or reset
the answers throughout class.

Use feedback to encourage student interaction in the class, let students indicate their
satisfaction with the pace of the class, gauge student progress on an assignment, or poll
students for yes/no and true/false responses.
As students select their answers your counters, which are highlighted with the corresponding
colors in the summary pie chart, are automatically updated. When you ask students to respond
to a question via feedback, you see their answers in two formats:
The summary results are continuously updated in the colorful pie chart that is displayed in
the feedback area. You can share the pie chart with the class if you choose.
Students answers are indicated by color-coded circles next to their names in the class list.
Both the pie chart and the class list are continuously updated as the students select and change
their answers.

440

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class 22

What Are My Answer Options?

By default, the Pace answer set is displayed in the feedback area. However, you can choose
from several answer sets, including:
Pace (Faster, Perfect, Slower, Please Review)
Agreement (Strongly Agree, Agree, Disagree, Strongly Disagree)
Assignment status (Not much progress, Still working, Almost finished, Completed)
True / False
Yes / No
A, B, C, D
The Student View
The students feedback area is located just below the People tab on the LearnLinc palette. In
instructor led classes, students see the current answer set with radio selection buttons next to
each answer. Students do not see the summary pie chart unless you choose to share it with
them. Students never see the individual responses in the class list.

In open discussion classes students always see the summary pie chart and the individual
answers in the class list. Students can clear feedback or change the answer set when they have
the floor.

441

22 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe how to use feedback in a class, specifically:
Asking Your Students to Use Feedback to Respond to a Question
Changing the Answer Set
Sharing the Feedback Summary Results with the Class
Clearing Feedback Answers

Asking Your Students to Use Feedback to Respond to a Question

1. Ask a question verbally or in text chat.
2. Ask your students to select an answer from the feedback answer set.
As each student selects an answer, your pie chart and class list are updated.
Quick Steps
1. Right click on the feedback
area.
2. Select an answer set from
the right click menu.

Changing the Answer Set

1. Select Tools > Class > Change Feedback Answer Set, from the LearnLinc palette toolbar.
A list of answer sets displays.

2.

442

Select the desired answer set.

Your feedback area, and each students, is updated with the new answer set immediately.

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class 22

Sharing the Feedback Summary Results with the Class

Select Tools > Class > Show Feedback Summary Results, from the LearnLinc palette toolbar.

Quick Steps
1. Right click on the feedback
area.
2. Select Share Feedback
Summary Results.

The item is checked, to indicate that students can see the pie chart. The pie chart remains on
the student palettes, and is continuously updated, until you choose to stop showing it.
To stop sharing the pie chart, select Tools > Class > Show Feedback Summary Results again.

Clearing Feedback Answers

Select Tools > Class > Clear Feedback Answers, from the LearnLinc palette toolbar.

Quick Steps
1. Right click on the feedback
area.
2. Select Clear Feedback
Answers.

443

22 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Next Steps
Feedback is one of several LearnLinc classroom tools. If you would like to know more about
the other classroom tools, please see:

444

Chapter 16

Recording Classes

page 341

Chapter 17

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

page 365

Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

Chapter 21

Sharing Applications With the Class

page 413

Chapter 23

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

page 445

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

23
Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice
Questions
This chapter explains the benefits and use of Q&A, LearnLincs question and answer tool.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Launch and close Q&A
Work with question lists
Add questions on-the-fly
Ask a question
View the results and share them with the class
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is Q&A?
2. When should I use Q&A?
3. Who can ask questions with Q&A?
4. Where are Q&A question files stored?
5. What do students see?

445

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
the Virtual Classroom

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on

page 318.

the LearnLinc palette

The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.

floor control

The Difference Between Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Audio on

page 324.

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using Q&A correctly during class.
Specifically, you need to understand:
What Is Q&A?
When Should I Use Q&A?
Who Can Ask Questions With Q&A?
Storing Files on your Local Computer to Use in a LearnLinc Class
The Student View

What Is Q&A?
Q&A is LearnLincs question and answer tool. Use Q&A to ask your students a series of
multiple choice questions during a LearnLinc class. You can make up questions before class, or
add them on-the-fly. When you ask a question, students see it and all its possible answers in
their Q&A windows. Each student can select an answer, and can change his or her answer for
as long as the question is available. Your Q&A window updates automatically as students select
their answers.
Use the Q&A question editor to create a series of questions and store them in a question file.
You can open a question file during class and ask any question in the list. In addition, you can
add new questions to that file, or merge that file with another set of questions at any time.

446

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

As your students answer a question, you see a bar chart of their responses. The bar chart is
continually updated as students send and change their answers. You can share the bar chart
with the class, and you can view the answer details to see which students chose each answer.

447

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

When Should I Use Q&A?

Use Q&A to encourage interaction and evaluate your students retention of the content
throughout class. As you finish presenting a topic you can quickly ask a few multiple choice
questions of the class to:
determine if the class has an overall understanding of the current topic
discover which students are unclear on the current topic, and which aspects of the topic
they do not understand
encourage student participation by following up with discussions via conferencing or text
chat
decide whether to move to a new topic or review the topic just presented
Who Can Ask Questions With Q&A?
As with other LearnLinc classroom tools, the floor holder controls Q&A. While you have the
floor, you can open question files, create new questions, ask questions, and view and share the
results with the class. If you pass the floor to an assistant instructor or student control of Q&A
passes to that person as well.
When someone else has the floor, you can answer their questions, and see the answer statistics
if the floor holder chooses to share them. You cannot ask questions until you take the floor
again.
Storing Files on your Local Computer to Use in a LearnLinc Class
You must store Q&A question files on your local computer, or a network drive that you can
access during class. Once you open the question file you can send the questions to everyone
else in the class.
You may choose to access your question files during class by opening them from the Q&A file
menu, or by creating agenda items for them. Note, however, that if you create an agenda item
for a question file that is stored on your local computer, the agenda item will only work for
you. Anyone else who tries to use the agenda item will receive an error because they cannot
access the file from your computer.

448

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

The Student View

When you launch Q&A, your students see the Q&A dialog, with a message informing them that
there is no currently asked question. Once you ask a question, students see only the currently
asked question and its answers. In addition, they may see the answer statistics for the current
question, if you choose to share them.

449

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks for using Q&A, specifically:
Making a Question List Before Class
Removing a Question from the List
Saving Question Sets
Merging Question Sets
Launching Q&A for the Class
Adding Questions on-the-fly During Class
Asking a Question
Sharing the Answer Statistics with the Class
Closing Q&A for the Class
Quick Steps

Making a Question List Before Class

1. Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > Q&A Question Editor, from the Windows taskbar.

1. Select Start > Programs >

LearnLinc > Q&A Question
Editor.
2. Click OK when the Not
logged-in dialog displays.
3. Double-click to open the
question editor.
4. Enter your questions.
5. Select File > Save Question
File.
The Not logged-in - Unable to share dialog displays.

450

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

2.

Click OK to open Q&A.

3.

Double click the line Double-click here to add a question to open the question editor.

4.
5.

Place your cursor in the field Q1 and enter your first question.
Press <Tab> to move the cursor to the field A1 and enter the first answer. Repeat until
you have entered each answer. You must enter at least two answers for each question.
To enter your next question, click Next Question.
To close the Question Editor, click the Close box in the upper right corner of the Q&A
window.
Select File > Save Question File, from the Q&A menu bar.

6.

Reminder! To ask questions in class, you must close Q&A and re-open it
once you join a class.

451

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Highlight the question.
2. Select Question > Delete
Question.

Removing a Question from the List

1. Highlight the question in the Available Questions list.
2. Select Question > Delete Question, from the Q&A menu bar.

Be sure you are ready to delete the question. The selected question is
deleted immediately and cannot be restored.

Quick Steps
1. Select File > Save Question
File.
2. Name the file and click Save.

452

Saving Question Sets

1. Select File > Save Question File..., from the Q&A menu bar.

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

The Save As dialog displays.

2.

Enter a location and file name for the question set and click Save.
All question files must be saved with the .qna extension.

Merging Question Sets

1. Open a question set.
If you have a question set open already, save it.
2. Select File > Merge Question File..., from the Q&A menu bar.

Quick Steps
1. Open a question set.
2. Select File > Merge
Question File.
3. Select a question set and
click Open.

453

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

The Open dialog displays.

3.
4.

454

Select the question set you wish to merge with the current set and click Open.
The questions from the second set are added to the bottom of the current question set.
Select File > Save Question File..., from the Q&A menu bar to save the combined lists as a
new question set.

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

Launching Q&A for the Class

1. Make sure you are the floor holder.
You must be the floor holder to launch an agenda item for the class.
2. Click the Agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette.
The Agenda tab is located in the middle of the palette, under the People tab.

3.

Quick Steps
Click the Q&A shortcut
on the "Agenda" tab.

Click the Q&A shortcut to open the Q&A window.

455

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps
1. Open the question editor.
2. Enter your questions and
their answers.
3. Click the close box.
4. Select File > Save Question
File to save the questions as
a new question set.

Adding Questions on-the-fly During Class

You can add a question to your Available Questions list at any time, but you must be the
floor holder to ask the question.
1. Double click the line Double-click here to add a question in the Available Questions list
to open the Question Editor.

2.
3.

4.

456

Enter your question in the question field.

Enter at least two answers in the answer fields.
If you are the floor holder, you can return to the Available Questions list at any time to
ask your question.
To enter your next question, click Next Question.
To close the Question Editor, click the Close box in the upper right corner of the Q&A
window.
Select File > Save Question File..., from the Q&A menu bar to save your new questions in
a Q&A file.

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

Asking a Question
1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Highlight a question in the Available Questions list.

3.

Quick Steps
1. Make sure you have the
floor.
2. Highlight a question.
3. Click Ask selected question.

Click Ask Selected Question.

All students see the question and its possible answers in their Q&A windows. As each
student selects an answer your answer statistics are updated.
If you pass the floor to a student after you ask a question, your question
remains visible until the student asks a question.

457

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Viewing the Answers

When you ask a question, you can see the students responses in summary and detail formats.
Directions for viewing both formats follow.
Viewing the Answer Statistics in Summary Form
As students submit their answers, you see the answer statistics in percentage format at the
bottom of the Q&A window. The percentages shown are of the total number of students who
have answered the question, not the total number of students in the class.

Viewing the Answer Details

1. Select Answers > Show Answer Details, from the Q&A menu bar.
The Answers menu is only available once you have asked a question.

The Answer Details dialog displays.

2.

458

Click an answer to display a list of all the students who chose that answer.

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions 23

Sharing the Answer Statistics with the Class

To share the answer statistics with the class select Answer > Send Answer Statistics, from the
Q&A menu bar.

Once you share the answer statistics, students see them at the bottom of their Q&A
windows, and they can no longer answer the question.
You cannot share the answer details with the class.

Closing Q&A for the Class

1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Select File > Exit Q&A, from the Q&A menu bar.

Quick Steps
1. Select File > Exit Q&A.
2. Click Close All.

The Shared Close dialog displays.

3.

Click Close All to close Q&A on all students computers.

You have the option of closing Q&A on your machine alone as well.

459

23 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Next Steps
Q&A is one of several LearnLinc classroom tools. If you would like to know more about the
other classroom tools, please see:

460

Chapter 16

Recording Classes

page 341

Chapter 17

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

page 365

Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

Chapter 21

Sharing Applications With the Class

page 413

Chapter 22

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

page 439

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse 24

24
Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse
This chapter explains the benefits and use of glimpse, LearnLincs screen capture utility for
instructors.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Launch and close glimpse
View a students desktop
Refresh the student list
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is glimpse?
2. What do students see?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
the Virtual Classroom

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on

page 318.

the LearnLinc palette

The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.

461

24 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you are using glimpse effectively. Specifically,
you need to understand:
What Is Glimpse?
The Student View

What Is Glimpse?
Glimpse is specialized screen capture tool that you can use to capture any students desktop
during a LearnLinc class. Glimpse is only available to the class instructor. By default, glimpse
captures a thumbnail size image of the chosen students desktop, however, you can choose to
capture a full-size image as well. You can use glimpse to look over the shoulder of the
selected student. With glimpse, you can:
quickly view a students application or document
troubleshoot a student problem
If a student has turned on Privacy, you can not glimpse their desktop.
However, privacy is only available to students in open discussion classes.

462

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse 24

The glimpse window has a student list, and four buttons: Capture Thumbnail, Capture
Screen, Refresh List, and Exit.

The Student View

Students cannot use glimpse, nor are they aware that you have glimpsed their desktops.

463

24 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for using glimpse in a class,
specifically:
Launching Glimpse
Viewing a Students Desktop
Refreshing the student list
Closing Glimpse
Quick Steps
Click Glimpse from
the Agenda shortcuts.

Launching Glimpse
1. Make sure you have the floor.
2. Click the Agenda tab on the LearnLinc palette.
The Agenda tab is located in the middle of the palette, under the People tab.

3.

Click the glimpse shortcut to open the glimpse window.

Only instructors have the glimpse shortcut on the Agenda tab. While everyone can see the
menu item Instructor Glimpse Application under the Run menu, glimpse will only launch
if you are the class instructor.

464

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse 24

Viewing a Students Desktop

1. Launch glimpse.
2. Highlight a student name in the Current Attendees list by clicking on it once.
To capture a quick view of the students desktop click Capture Thumbnail.

To capture a full size, detailed view of the students desktop click Capture Screen.

Quick Steps
Double click on a name in the
Current Attendees list to see
a thumbnail of his or her
desktop.

The screen capture of the students desktop displays in your glimpse window.

Refreshing the student list

Click Refresh List if someone enters or leaves the classroom.

Closing Glimpse
Click Exit to close the glimpse window.

465

24 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Next Steps
Glimpse is one of several LearnLinc classroom tools. If you would like to know more about the
other LearnLinc classroom tools, please see:

466

Chapter 16

Recording Classes

page 341

Chapter 17

Using Text Chat to Communicate With Your Students

page 365

Chapter 18

Using Multimedia Content During Class

page 271

Chapter 19

Synchronizing Web Content

page 383

Chapter 20

Collaborating With Your Students on the Whiteboard

page 393

Chapter 21

Sharing Applications With the Class

page 413

Chapter 22

Getting Instant Feedback from the Class

page 439

Chapter 23

Polling the Class With Q&A Multiple Choice Questions

page 445

Chapter 24

Viewing a Student Desktop With Glimpse

page 271

Chapter 25

Creating Breakout Groups

page 467

Creating Breakout Groups 25

25
Creating Breakout Groups
This chapter explains how you can divide your class into breakout groups, where students can
work collaboratively for a set period of time before returning to the main class.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Create breakout groups
Send latecomers to groups
Join breakout groups
Help your students work effectively in breakout groups.
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is a breakout group?
2. How does open discussion work?
3. What do students see when they are in a breakout group?

A breakout group is an
open discussion classroom
where students meet and
work collaboratively for a
period of time the instructor
specifies.

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:

The LearnLinc palette

The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.

Floor control

Floor control on page 215.

467

25 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to help you use breakout groups effectively. Specifically, you
need to understand:
What is a breakout group?
How does open discussion work?
What do students see while in a breakout group?

What Is a Breakout Group?

A breakout group is an open discussion classroom where you send a small group of students to
work collaboratively for a set period of time. You can assign students to groups randomly or
manually. In the breakout group, students can do anything they can do in the main classroom,
including audio and video conferencing, sharing content, applications, whiteboard files, and
web navigation via the synchronized web browser.
When the breakout group time limit elapses, the students automatically return to the main class
where they can share the work they completed in the group with the rest of the class.
How Does Open Discussion Work?
Breakout groups are open discussion classes. In an open discussion class, anyone can take
the floor from the current floor holder. The instructor has no more control of the floor than any
other student in the class.
Students click the Take Floor icon at the top right corner of the student palette to take the floor:

Note that students use the

Take Floor icon for slightly
different actions in the main
classroom (instructor led
class) and the breakout group
(open discussion class). In the
main classroom, it means
return the floor to the
instructor.

468

Take Floor

When students have the floor, they can talk to the group and control any applications or
content that are in use. They can also open new applications or content.

What Do Students See in a Breakout Group?

A breakout group looks like the main classroom, but has some additional breakout room
features built in:

Creating Breakout Groups 25

Students can return

to the main class at
anytime by clicking
Return to Class.

In a breakout
group, students
see a green
notification bar
above the
people tab.
This will turn
yellow 30
seconds before
the end of the
breakout group.
The clock indicates
how much time is left
before students will
automatically return
to the main
classroom.

The class agenda in

a breakout group is
the same as the
agenda in the main
classroom.

469

25 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the processes for working with breakout
groups, specifically:
Creating Breakout Groups
Sending Latecomers to Groups
Joining Breakout Groups
Helping Your Students Work Effectively in Breakout Groups

Quick Steps
1. In a class, select Tools >
Class > Breakout Groups.
2. Click Auto Assign.
3. Select whether you want the
groups created by number
of groups, or by number of
students in a group.
4. Type the number of minutes
you want students to work
in groups.
5. Click Start Now.

470

Creating Breakout Groups

1. Select Tools > Class > Create Breakout Groups.

Creating Breakout Groups 25

The Create Breakout dialog box appears.

471

25 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

2.

To quickly create and

Assign students to groups. You can assign students to groups automatically or manually:

To assign students . . .

Do this . . .

automatically

a.

Click Auto Assign.

The Auto Assign dialog box appears.

b.

Select the number of groups you would like to

create, or the number of students you would like to
assign to each group, and click OK.
Students are automatically assigned to groups, and
the Create Breakout Groups dialog returns
displaying the new groups.

a.

On the Main Class list, select a student you want to

add to Group 1. To select multiple students, press
the <Control> key on your keyboard and click each
students name.
Click Add.
Click New Group, to create Group 2. Select and add
students for Group 2.
Continue adding groups and students until you
have created all your groups.

customize groups, auto

assign all students to
groups, and then use the
Remove and Add feature
to move students from
group to group.

manually

b.
c.
d.

472

Creating Breakout Groups 25

3.

If you would like to set a time limit for the group, make sure the Limit duration to 15
minutes is selected. Change the number of minutes, if necessary.
The default breakout group time
limit is 15 minutes.

If you do not want to set a time limit for the group, click the Limit duration to 15 minutes
check box to remove the check mark.
If you do not set a time limit for the breakout group, students will have
to click Return to Class when in the group to return to the main
classroom.
4.

Click Start Now to send the students to their breakout groups.

All students assigned to breakout groups leave the main class and join their groups.
Anyone left in the main classroom will remain listed on the Person tab.
While students are working in groups, you can join each group to monitor progress, give
direction, or participate. See Joining Breakout Groups on page 475 for more information.
When the time limit you have set for the group elapses, the students will automatically
return to the class. As they do, they will re-appear on the People tab.
When students return to the main class after a breakout group session,
they will not see any content that is currently open. When all students
return, you will need to re-launch the content to synchronize the entire
class.

473

25 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Quick Steps

Sending Latecomers to Groups

1. Select Tools > Class > Create Breakout Groups.

1. Select Tools > Class >

Create Breakout Groups.
2. Select the group to which
you want to add the
latecomer.
3. Click the latecomers name.
4. Click Add.
5. Select a time limit for the
latecomers participation in
the group.
6. Click Start Now.

The Create Breakout dialog appears, displaying the latecomer in the Main Class list.

2.
3.
4.

5.

474

On the Group list, select the group to which you would like to add the latecomer.
On the Main Class list, select the latecomer, and then click Add.
If the group has a time limit set on it, select a time limit for the latecomers participation in
the group. For example, if you sent students to Group 1 for 15 minutes, and a latecomer
arrives after the group has been active for 5 minutes, you should set the time limit for the
latecomer to 10 minutes.
Click Start Now to send the latecomer to the group.

Creating Breakout Groups 25

Joining Breakout Groups

1. Select Tools > Class > Join Breakout Groups.

Quick Steps
1. Select Tools > Class > Join
Breakout Groups.
2. Select the group you want
to join.
3. Click Join Group.

The Join Breakout dialog opens.

2.
3.

4.

Select the group that you would like to join.

A list of students in that group appears.
Click Join Group.
You enter the selected breakout group. Once in the breakout group, you can participate at
the same level as any other student by raising your hand and taking the floor.
To join another group, repeat steps 1-3.
OR
Click Return to Class to return to the main class.

475

25 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Helping your Students Work Effectively in Breakout Groups

To help students get the most out of breakout groups, provide them with some overview
information before the first group session. You can also join groups to monitor progress and
help students use the classroom tools.
In addition, the following tips may help students work more effectively in breakout groups:
Use the Hand Raise
To avoid interrupting each other, students may want to click the Raise Hand icon to indicate
that they would like to take the floor. The current floor holder can then wrap up whatever he
or she is doing before the new student takes the floor.
Synchronize Latecomers
When latecomers arrive, the current floor holder needs to update any content in use to
synchronize the latecomer with the rest of the group:

476

If the breakout group is using . . .

Then . . .

whiteboard

the latecomer will need to open whiteboard

and the current floor holder will need to click
Send Update on the whiteboard toolbar.

Appshare

the Update Students warning displays

when the latecomer enters the group. The
current floor holder clicks Update Now.

multimedia or PowerPoint content

the current floor holder re-launches the

content for the latecomer.

synchronized web browser

the current floor holder re-launches the

synchronized web browser for the latecomer.

Creating Breakout Groups 25

Save Whiteboard Content

Students should be aware that they need to save any work before the end of the breakout
group or it will be lost when they are sent back to class. This is particularly important when the
group is working collaboratively on a whiteboard file.
When the clock reaches 30 seconds before the end of a breakout group, the green notification
bar turns yellow and the text changes to Save your work. Returning to class soon. At this
point one or more students should save the whiteboard file.
Groups can designate a student to save the whiteboard file to his or her hard drive, or each
student can save the file.

477

25 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

478

Assisting the
Instructor During
Class
The Assisting the Instructor During Class section of this guide contains concepts and tasks
that are important to LearnLinc assistant instructors. If you are a LearnLinc assistant instructor,
please read this section.
Chapter 26

Assisting the Instructor During Class

page 481

In addition, please review the chapters in the previous section, Teaching LearnLinc Classes
for more information about the instructors role in a LearnLinc class.

479

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

480

Assisting the Instructor During Class 26

26
Assisting the Instructor During Class
This chapter explains the role and activities of a LearnLinc assistant instructor.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Communicate with the instructor privately
Respond to private text chat messages
Monitor hand raises and feedback responses
Launch applications for the class
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1. What is my role as an assistant instructor?
2. How do the instructor and I divide our classroom tasks?
3. What do students see?

What You Need to Know Before Reading This Chapter

To benefit from the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the
following concepts:
the Virtual Classroom
the LearnLinc palette
floor control
text chat
feedback

LearnLinc Classes on your Intranet vs. Classes on the Internet on

page 318.
The LearnLinc Palette on page 321.
Floor Control on page 215.
How Do I Get the Classroom Recorder and Player? on page 342.
What Is Feedback? on page 440.

481

26 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Key Concepts
Review the following concepts to ensure that you understand your role as an assistant and can
perform all the necessary tasks. Specifically, you need to understand:
The Role of Assistant Instructor
The Student View

The Role of Assistant Instructor

An assistant instructor is a student who has some additional capabilities within a specific
LearnLinc class. You may be chosen as an assistant instructor for one class and yet participate
as a regular student in other classes. The instructor or scheduler for the class determines who
will be the assistant instructors for each class.
If you are an assistant instructor, you can:
see student hand raises in the class list
see individual feedback responses in the class list
receive private text chat messages from students
send private messages to anyone in the class
With these capabilities you can help the instructor to manage the class, resolve students
questions or technical issues, and alert the instructor to text chat or hand-raises that need his or
her attention. While you are managing these classroom activities, the instructor is free to
concentrate on delivering new content to the class.
It is important to note that the instructor still has all the capabilities outlined above. The
instructor still sees all the indicators in the class list, and can still send private messages in text
chat. With your assistance, however, the students can have a better classroom experience. As
the instructor presents the class content, you can address student questions or issues
individually, or bring important issues to the instructors attention.
The Student View
Students do not see an indication on the palette that there is an assistant in the class. When a
student sends private email, it is delivered to the instructor and any assistants in the class.
Students do see the name of the person who responded to their private message.

482

Assisting the Instructor During Class 26

Detailed Directions
The following step-by-step instructions describe the tasks for acting as an assistant instructor in
a class, specifically:
Responding to Private Text Chat Messages
Monitoring Hand Raises and Feedback Responses
Launching Applications and Resources for the Class

Responding to Private Text Chat Messages

1. Select Tools > Dock My Text Chat, from the LearnLinc palette menu bar.

Quick Steps
1. Undock text chat.
2. Check Private and select a
name from the drop down
list.
3. Type your message and
press <Enter>.

The text chat window displays in the bottom quarter of the content area. You can resize
the window as desired.

2.
3.
4.

You cannot access the Private drop down list and checkbox when text chat is docked.
Check Private to enable the drop down box.
Select a name from drop down box.
Type your message and click Send.
The person you selected in the Private drop down box receives your message in red text,
with your name in bold red text at the beginning.

483

26 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Monitoring Hand Raises and Feedback Responses

As students raise their hands or respond to feedback questions you see the hand raise and
feedback indicators in the class list. You can alert the instructor when he or she should pass the
floor to a student by sending him or her a private text chat message. The instructor sees your
messages in bold, red text.

For example, if the feedback responses indicate that the majority of the class is requesting a
review you can prompt the instructor to go over the content one more time, or take questions.
You can also take note of which students select Please Review so that you or the instructor
can address individual at another time.
Note that although you may be monitoring feedback responses and hand raises, the instructor
still sees these items in his or her class list.

484

Assisting the Instructor During Class 26

Launching Applications and Resources for the Class

1. Make sure you have the floor.
You must have the floor to launch applications for the class.
2. Click the Agenda tab.
The Agenda tab is located under the People tab.

You can launch applications,

or the complete library of
resources, from the Run
menu on the LearnLinc
palette.

To launch an agenda item, double-click an item in the agenda list.

To launch an item from the course contents list, select Course resources from the drop
down box and then double-click the item.
To launch an application, click an application shortcut at the bottom of the tab.

Next Steps
Be sure to review all the instructor information in the Teaching a class section of this guide.

485

26 LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

486

Glossary, Appendices,
and Index
The final section of this guide contains a glossary of LearnLinc related terms, a troubleshooting
appendix, a name service capsule definitions appendix, and an index.
Glossary

page 489

Appendix A: Troubleshooting

page 509

Appendix B: Name Service Capsule Definitions

page 551

Appendix C: Configuring LearnLinc to Work

With SQL Server

page 571

Index

page 575

487

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

488

Glossary
Administrator authority level
Administrators can perform all student, instructor, and author tasks. In addition, administrators
can add, edit, or delete log-in groups and user accounts, groups, and authority levels.
Administration tool
A LearnLinc tool that can only be used by administrators. It displays property information about
LearnLinc courses, classes, resources, user accounts, and authority levels, and enables an
administrator to add, edit, or delete any of these items.
AdvancedMultimedia content installation
The advanced installation contains all the components of the typical install, with the addition of
content synchronization for ToolBook, Authorware, and Director, and the LearnLinc Classroom
Recorder. If you are using synchronized multimedia content in your classes or will be recording
classes, choose this download option.
Agenda
A list of all the resources for the current class, that displays on the LearnLinc palette. Instructors
and students can click on any item in the list to launch it, with the exception of notes (which
cannot be displayed in the Virtual Classroom). Additionally, users can display the course
contents list on the agenda, and run an application from the shortcuts at the bottom of the
agenda tab.
Application
LearnLinc has several classroom tools, or applications, including: Application Sharing,
AppView, Glimpse, Q&A, Streaming Video, Synchronized Web Browser, and Whiteboard.
While you can add any LearnLinc application to a course contents list, most LearnLinc
applications are meant for classroom use only. The exceptions are Q&A, Whiteboard and
Streaming Video, which can be used outside of class to create or view files before class, and
are more likely to be included in a course contents list. The other LearnLinc applications are
more likely to be included in a class agenda, for use during class.

489

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Application sharing
The ability of the instructor to share an application on his or her computer with students in a
LearnLinc class, when the students do not have that application installed on their computers.
The class instructor can share any application on his or her computer. There are two LearnLinc
tools, AppShare and AppView, that can be used to share an application.
AppShare
A classroom tool that enables instructors to share their actions on an application with the class,
and to enable a selected student to use the application as well. In addition, an instructor can
use AppShare to let a student share his or her own application with the class. AppShare can be
used in any LearnLinc class.
AppView
A classroom tool that enables the instructor to use an application on his or her computer, and
show his or her actions to the class. Students do not have to have the application installed on
their computers. Students cannot use the instructors application, nor can they share their own
applications with AppView. AppView can be used in any LearnLinc class that is on a multicast
network.
Assistant instructor
A student in a class who has some extra privileges. These privileges enable the assistant to
manage the background activities of the classroom, such as monitoring text chat, feedback
responses, and hand raises. Assistant instructors enable the instructor to concentrate on
presenting new content to the class. A class can have one, or several, assistant instructors, or
none at all. Assistant instructors are assigned to a class when it is scheduled.
Audio clip
An audio clip is a digital audio file. When a user clicks on an audio clip link in the Virtual
Campus, the clip plays in Windows Media Player. Note: Windows Media Player is installed with
the LearnLinc classroom software. If you have not yet installed the LearnLinc classroom
software, you may or may not have another application installed on your computer that can
play the audio clip.

490

Author authority level

In addition to the student and instructor tasks, authors can add, edit, and delete courses in the
course catalog and any items in any course contents lists or class agenda.
Authority level
A LearnLinc setting that determines what information users can access and edit. Each LearnLinc
user is assigned an authority level as part of his or her user account. The default authority
levels are self register, participant, instructor, author, and administrator.
Auto-register
When an author or administrator creates a course, he or she can choose to automatically
register, or auto-register all LearnLinc users for the course. Courses that have auto-register
turned on do not have individual or group student email lists.
Bandwidth
A measure of the amount of data transmitted or received per unit time, usually measured in bits
per second. Bandwidth is proportional to the complexity of the data that is being transmitted.
For example, it takes more bandwidth to download a photograph in one second than it takes
to download a page of text in one second. Large sound or video files require even more
bandwidth to download.
Book
A multimedia file that contains a combination of text, sound, still and motion pictures,
animations, or other media formats. For LearnLinc these books, created in either Asymetrix
ToolBook or Macromedia Authorware, can be synchronized in LearnLinc classes. You can add
these books to a course contents or agenda list so that students can download them before
class for stand alone use, or so that they can be synchronized during class.
Breakout Groups
A breakout group is an open discussion classroom where an instructor sends a small group of
students to work collaboratively for a set period of time. Students can be assigned to groups
randomly or manually. In the breakout group, students can do anything they can do in the
main classroom, including audio and video conferencing, sharing content, applications,
whiteboard files, and web navigation via the synchronized web browser.

491

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Class
A scheduled event in which two or more LearnLinc users meet online, via the LearnLinc
classroom software. Users can join a class by clicking a link in the Virtual Campus. Once in
class, they can interact with each other using a variety of classroom tools.
Class list
Displays the names of everyone in the class, including the instructor, on the LearnLinc palette.
Hand raise icons display next to each student who has his or her hand raised, as do Feedback
response indicators for each student who has selected a response. The class list has buttons
that enable the instructor to select a student and give the floor to him or her, to put all hands
down, and to dismiss the selected attendee. In addition, the class list has two counters: one for
the total number of attendees, another for the total number of hand raises.
Classroom Player
The LearnLinc classroom player is a standalone application that plays a recorded class file.
Once you install the player, it is accessible on your Start menu. The player is automatically
launched when you play the recorded file from your course contents list or class agenda. The
player streams the recorded file from the server to your computer.
Classroom Recorder
The LearnLinc classroom recorder is an application that records a LearnLinc class on a student
computer. The classroom recorder captures all classroom activity, including audio, video, text
chat, and any actions on the screen. The recorder also uploads the recorded file and adds it to
your course contents list.
Classroom service
A service that connects two or more LearnLinc users in a Virtual Classroom by sharing and
synchronizing data among them in real time. This data includes hand raising, application and
content use, and audio or video conferencing information. The classroom service is part of the
LearnLinc server.
Classroom software
A set of tools that instructors and students use to connect, communicate, and collaborate in
LearnLincs Virtual Classroom. Each LearnLinc user must have the classroom software installed
on his or her computer before attempting to join a LearnLinc class.
492

Client/server architecture
A client/server architecture is one in which computers connect to each other through a central
server computer, rather than connecting directly to one another.
Concurrent user licences
The number of LearnLinc licenses that can be used at one time. This number is equal to the
number of users who can be in LearnLinc classes at one time.
Conferencing window
A window near the top of the LearnLinc palette that displays live video, or still pictures during
LearnLinc classes. If video conferencing is in use, you see and hear the current floor holder in
real time in the conferencing window. If audio conferencing is in use, or no conferencing is in
use, you see a picture of the floor holder, or the default pictures for instructor or student. You
see the location of the floor holder, listed below the conferencing window, as well.
Control panel configuration utilities
LearnLinc has two control panelsone for the server, and one for the client. The server control
panels enable you to change or update LearnLinc server information such as the UDP audio
port for audio conferencing, the server log file, the LearnLinc server address, the Virtual
Campus location. The client control panel enables you to update your location description,
web proxy settings, and your UDP audio conferencing settings.
Content
see book.
Contents list
A list of resources that is contained in a course, including classes, applications, audio clips,
books, notes, PowerPoint presentations, Q&A files, URLs, video clips, and whiteboard files.
Once a resource is added to a contents list, students can access the resource from the Virtual
Campus by registering for the course, and clicking links in the list.
Cookie
A small piece of information that your web browser stores on your hard drive. A web server
may request that your browser save your information in a cookie. It is uniquely yours and can
only be read by the server that gave it to you, preserving your privacy. The LearnLinc Virtual
493

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Campus uses cookies to establish if you are logged in or not. The cookies are only temporary,
and are removed when you close your browser.

Course
A container for classes and resources. Instructors, authors, and administrators can use courses
to group related classes and resources in one location that is accessible to LearnLinc students.
Similar to a college or university, students must register for a course to be able to attend its
classes and access it resources. All LearnLinc users can access courses via the LearnLinc Virtual
Campus.
Course catalog
A web page in the Virtual Campus that lists all available courses. Students can register for
courses from the course catalog, and then access that courses resources and classes. Instructors
can modify courses for which they are registered instructors from the course catalog. Authors
and administrators can add, modify, and delete courses in the course catalog.
Course contents list
see contents list.
Custom installation
In most cases, either the typical or advanced installation options are sufficient. However, if your
organization chooses not to install certain LearnLinc components, you can use the custom
installation to select specific components to install. Be sure to ask your LearnLinc administrator
for detailed instructions concerning which components to select during the installation.
Current speaker indicator
see On Air/current speaker indicator.
Data only
Classes that do not use LearnLinc audio or video conferencing are data only. Some
organizations choose the data only option and supplement it with phone conferencing,
satellite video, or other third party conferencing options.

494

Director movie
A Director movie is a multimedia file that contains a combination of text, sound, still and
motion pictures, animations, and/or other media formats. These movies are created in
Macromedia Director and can be synchronized in LearnLinc classes. Instructors can add these
movies to a course contents or agenda list so that students can download them before class for
standalone use, or so that they can use them in synchronization with their instructor during
class. Director movies are used primarily in class.
Download page
The Virtual Campus download page provides links for downloading and installing the
LearnLinc classroom software. All users must download and install the classroom software
before attempting to join a LearnLinc class. By default the download page lists options for
typical, advanced, or custom installations, however your LearnLinc administrator may choose to
change the options on this page. In addition, administrators can download the LearnLinc
administration tool from the download page.
Feedback
A classroom polling application that instructors can use to quickly poll the class using one of
several predetermined answer sets. Feedback displays a set of answers on the LearnLinc
palette, and a pie chart that shows the percentage of the class that selected each answer. The
instructor and assistants see individual Feedback responses in the class list, next to each
students name.
File service
A service that enables LearnLinc users to display their pictures in the LearnLinc palette. If a user
has uploaded his or her picture to the LearnLinc server, it will be displayed when he or she
takes the floor in a LearnLinc Virtual Classroom. The file service is part of the LearnLinc server.
Firewall
A software program that is run on a server, that protects the information on one network from
users on other networks. An organization with an intranet that allows its users access the
Internet installs a firewall to prevent outsiders from accessing its own private information, and
for controlling what Internet resources its own users can access.

495

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Floor control
Floor control is a format, or style of presentation, that is assigned to a class when it is
scheduled. LearnLinc classes can be in one of two formats: instructor led or open discussion.
For both of these formats, only one person can be the floor holder at a time. The floor holder,
the person who has the floor, can be heard and/or seen if conferencing is in use, and can
launch and synchronize applications for the class.
Floor holder
When a user takes the floor in a LearnLinc class, he or she is the floor holder. The floor holder
is the student, instructor, or assistant who is currently on air during a LearnLinc class. The
floor holder can be heard and/or seen if conferencing is in use, and can launch and
synchronize applications for the class.
Folder
A group of related courses can be grouped in the course catalog in a common container
known as a folder.
Frames
A web page design technique that enables multiple pages to display together in a single
browser window. For example, many web sites have two frames: a navigation frame on the left
or right that contains a table of contents, and a content frame, that displays the contents of
the site and takes up the remainder of the browser window. When a user clicks a link the
navigation frame, the results display in the contents frame.
Full-duplex
A sound card that can send data in two directions at once. Your sound card type determines
whether you see a Mute checkbox or a Talk button displayed on the LearnLinc palette
under the conferencing window. If you see the Mute checkbox, you are in full-duplex mode.
A full-duplex sound card enables you to send your audio and receive someone elses audio at
the same time, as if you were on the telephone. In a LearnLinc class, this happens when the
instructor passes the floor to a student, and both continue to talk. Everyone in the class can
hear both the instructor and the floor holder at all times. If you select headsets when running
the Audio Wizard, LearnLinc will try to use full duplex.

496

Glimpse
A specialized screen capture classroom tool that an instructor can use to capture any students
desktop during a LearnLinc class. Glimpse is only available to the class instructor, and students
are not notified when glimpse is being used.
Group
A group is a container for related user accounts. Use log-in groups to create logical groupings
of users. For example, in a corporate setting, you might group your users by department:
training, human resources, IT, and so forth. In an academic setting, you might group users by
level within a department: freshman biology, senior nursing, and so forth. Users must know
their log-in groups to log-in to the Virtual Campus.
H.323 multicast video
A LearnLinc class that uses video conferencing and is held on a LAN (Local Area Network) or
WAN (Wide Area Network). All users in the class must have either Intel ProShare 500 hardware
to use H.323 multicast video.
Half-duplex
A sound card that can only send data in one direction at a time. Your sound card type
determines whether you see a Mute checkbox or a Talk button displayed on the LearnLinc
palette under the conferencing window. If you see the Talk button, you are in half-duplex
mode. A half-duplex sound card enables you to send audio, and receive it, but not at the same
time, as if you were using a CB-radio. If you select speakers when running the Audio Wizard,
LearnLinc will use half-duplex.
Hand raise button
A button on the top left of the students LearnLinc palette that students can click to
electronically raise their hands. Instructors and assistants see the hand raise indicator flash, and
hand raise icons next to the students names.
Hand raise indicator
An indicator on the top left of the instructors LearnLinc palette that flashes green when a
student or an assistant instructor raises his or her hand.

497

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Help
Online help is available to all users. Online help contains key concepts and detailed directions
for using the LearnLinc Virtual Campus, and for participating in a LearnLinc class.
Home page
When you log-in to the Virtual Campus, you see your home page. The home page is
personalized for each user when he or she logs-in, and displays the courses for which the user
is registered as a student or instructor.
HTML (Hypertext Markup Language)
A set of markup tags that are inserted into a file so that it can be displayed in a web browser.
These tags indicate text formatting, such as bold or italic, font size or color, and also references
to images and links to other pages.
Indeo multicast video
A LearnLinc class that uses video conferencing and is held on a LAN (Local Area Network) or
WAN (Wide Area Network). All users in the class must have either Intel ProShare 150 or 200
hardware to send Indeo multicast video.
Instructor authority level
In addition to the student tasks, instructors can add materials and classes to the course contents
list, edit the course information and display properties, edit classes and class agendas, and
delete items from the course contents list and class agenda in courses for which they are
registered instructors.
Instructor led
In instructor led floor control classes, the instructor takes the floor when he or she joins the
class. The instructor can pass the floor to any student, and take the floor back at any time. The
instructor is always in control of who has the floor. Instructor led floor control works well for
large and/or lecture based classes, or classes that are a combination of lecture and interaction.
Internet
A worldwide system of computer networks, in which a user on a computer on one network
can get information from any other computer on any other network, assuming he or she has

498

permission. The Internet is a public resource that is used by millions of people around the
world.

Intranet
A private network or series of networks that is contained within an organization. Many
organizations use their intranets to share company information and computing resources
among their members, including the ability for groups to share information collaboratively,
using tools such as LearnLinc.
Internet audio
A LearnLinc class that uses audio conferencing and is held on the Internet, or in low bandwidth
classes on your intranet.
Keep alive
A firewall setting that enables a client computer to maintain a TCP connection to the server for
an entire class, rather than having to re-establish a TCP connection every time it sends data.
Using keep alive is more bandwidth efficient, but is not available on all proxy servers. Consult
your proxy server documentation for more information.
kbps
kbps is an acronym for kilobits per second. Your modem speed is measured in kbps, and has
a certain speed associated with it, for example, 28.8 kbps or 56 kbps. However that number
indicates the fastest connection that your modem is capable ofyou may actually connect at a
slower rate. Refer to your modem documentation to determine your connection speed during a
LearnLinc class.
LearnLinc
LearnLinc is an online learning environment. Your organization can use LearnLinc to train
students who are at a distance, including those at other corporate offices or locations, those
who telecommute from home or while traveling, and those who contract with your
organization to receive training.

499

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

LearnLinc aware
Content that has been designed or converted for synchronized use in the LearnLinc Virtual
Classroom is LearnLinc aware. Content created in ToolBook, Authorware, PowerPoint, and
HTML can be converted to be LearnLinc aware.
LearnLinc palette
see palette.
LearnLinc classroom software
see classroom software.
Log-in
When you enter the Virtual Campus, or launch the Administration tool, LearnLinc requires that
you enter your user account ID, group, and password. Your information is then sent to the
LearnLinc Name Service database, where it is compared with the account information in the
database. If the two match, you can enter, or log-in, to LearnLinc.
Log-in group
see group.
Log-out page
The Virtual Campus log-out page enables each user to exit the Virtual Campus and ensure that
his or her account cannot be used by others. As an added security measure, any account that is
inactive for approximately 15 minutes is automatically logged-out. This includes the time spent
in the virtual classroomif a user is in class for more than 15 minutes, he or she is automatically
logged-out of the Virtual Campus.
Multicast
A local or wide area network (LAN or WAN) is multicast if it has multicast enabled routers.
Multicast-enabled routers send data to the computers on their network more efficiently than
standard routers, so that a lot of data can be sent without overloading the network. Multicast
classes cannot work over the public Internet. Check with your system administrator to see if
your network is multicast-enabled.

500

Multicast audio
A LearnLinc class that uses audio conferencing and is held on a Local Area Network (LAN) or
Wide Area Network (WAN).
Multimedia book
see book.
Multimedia content
see book.
Mute
Users who have a full-duplex sound card, see a Mute checkbox below the conferencing
window. They can talk as soon as they are given the floor, and must check the box to silence
their audio and/or video conferencing while they have the floor.
Name service
A database that stores all LearnLinc information, including LearnLinc user account, course,
class, and resource information. In addition, the Name Service also stores system information
that is not visible to most LearnLinc users. The Name Service is part of the LearnLinc server.
Network bandwidth monitor
An indicator on the LearnLinc palette that flashes green, yellow, and red. Green indicates
sufficient bandwidth to participate in class. Yellow indicates that there is not enough bandwidth
for all the LearnLinc information, resulting in poor quality audio or slow text chat, for example.
Red indicates that there is not enough bandwidth to participate in the LearnLinc class at all.
Note
A note is a text item that displays in the Virtual Campus. You can add notes to a course
contents list that contain important information about the course and its contents, or you can
create an HTML link to a web page as the content of your note. You can add a note to a class
agenda, but only the title will display in the Virtual Classroom. Notes are limited to 129
characters.

501

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Open discussion
In open discussion classes, the instructor has no more control of the floor than any other
student in the class. Anyone can take the floor at any time, although using the hand raise
function helps to ensure order for the class. Open discussion floor control works well for small,
highly interactive classes or meetings.
On Air/current speaker indicator
An indicator at the top of the LearnLinc palette that turns red, with the message On Air when
the user has the floor. When another user has the floor, the indicator displays the name of that
person.
Palette
The LearnLinc palette is the main interface element in a LearnLinc class. The palette displays
the most commonly used tools, including conferencing (audio or video), the class list, the
agenda, feedback, and text chat. The palette displays additional information about the class,
and additional tools, for instructors. In addition, palette displays slightly different information
and tools depending on the floor control policy that is in effect.
Participant authority level
see Student authority level.
Q&A
LearnLincs question and answer tool. Use Q&A to ask your students a series of multiple choice
questions during a LearnLinc class. You can make up questions before class, or add them onthe-fly during class. Once you ask a question, students can see the question and all its possible
answers. Each student can select an answer, and can change his or her answer for as long as
the question is available.
Q&A file
A list of multiple choice questions and their answers. The list is created using the Q&A editor,
and is displayed in the Q&A application during class.
Quick tour
All users can take the Virtual Campus quick tour to learn more about using the Virtual Campus,
and joining classes.
502

Register
If a student wishes to participate in a course, he or she must sign-up, or register, for the
course. Doing so enables the student to access all resources and classes stored in the course. In
addition, an instructor, author, or administrator can register students for a course. When a
student is registered for a course, that course is listed on his or her home page.
Resource
A training material that has been added to a LearnLinc course or class. The LearnLinc resource
types are applications, audio and video clips, multimedia books, Director movies, PowerPoint
presentations, notes, and Q&A and Whiteboard files. Any of these resources can be added to a
LearnLinc course contents list, or a class agenda or autostart list. Once added to one of those
lists, students and instructors can access them in the Virtual Campus and Virtual Classroom.
Restricted text chat
When text chat is restricted only the instructor, assistants, and the current floor holder can enter
messages, however, everyone can see the messages in their own text chat windows. Only the
class instructor can restrict text chat.
Self register
By default, users who self register (create their own accounts) can perform the same tasks as
students.
Server information page
Provides you with information about the status of the LearnLinc server, the active classrooms,
and the installed LearnLinc licences. The Server Information page can be accessed from your
web browser. The URL for the page is [Link] where servername
is the name of your LearnLinc server.
Sound card
A piece of hardware that you can add to your computer to play and record audio. For example,
you use your sound card when you listen to music CDs on your computer. You can use your
sound card to send and receive live audio as well as prerecorded audio. LearnLinc requires a
sound card to enable audio or video conferencing during a LearnLinc class.

503

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Start page
When you navigate to the Virtual Campus, the start page displays. By default, the start page has
three options that allow you to log-in to the Virtual Campus, create a new account, or browse
the course catalog.
Streaming media file
Audio, video, or multimedia files that are stored on a web site or other accessible location.
When you access a streamed media file, it begins to play almost immediately, and continues to
download and store the remainder of the file as you are playing it. Using streamed files helps
you to avoid long waits while you download media files.
Streaming video
Streaming video is either a prerecorded video clip or live video that users can view as it is
downloading to their computers. Prerecorded streamed video clips are stored on a web server
or other accessible location. When you access a streamed video file it begins to play almost
immediately, and continues to download and store the remainder of the file as you are playing
it. Using prerecorded streamed video files helps you to avoid long waits while you download
media files. Live streamed video is captured by encoder software on the instructors computer,
sent to a server, and then sent to all the students in the class. Streaming live video is bandwidth
efficient, but is only a one-way video solution.
Student authority level
Students can create their own user accounts, browse the course catalog and user directory,
change their personal profile information and passwords, register for courses, use course and
class materials, email course instructors or students, participate in course discussion lists, and
join classes.
Synchronized content
Content that has been designed or converted to be used in the LearnLinc classroom. When the
floor holder uses the content, his or her actions affect everyones copy of the content. For
example, if the floor holder turns a page in a multimedia book, the page turns on each
students copy of the book as well.

504

Synchronized web browser

An add on to your Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator web browser that
enables the floor holder in a LearnLinc class to lead the class as he or she navigates the World
Wide Web. Each time the floor holder goes to a new URL, or clicks a new link on a web page,
the class follows. In between navigations, each student can browse at his or her own pace.
Take floor
Instructors can click Take floor to regain control of the floor, including conferencing and any
applications or content that are in use at any time during a LearnLinc class. In Open discussion
classes, students have a Take floor button as well.
Talk button
Users who have a half-duplex sound card, must click the Talk button below the conferencing
window after they get the floor, and before they can speak to the class. When they are done
speaking, they must click it again to hear the instructor. Clicking the Talk button does not affect
whether or not a user has the floor.
Text chat
A classroom tool that enables you to send messages to the whole class, or to an individual. Text
chat displays on the LearnLinc palette. Students may choose to send a private message that is
received by the instructor and any assistant instructors in the class. Instructors and assistants
can undock the text chat window and send private messages to any individual in class. The
instructor can restrict text chat to him or herself and the current floor holder.
Threaded discussion
Each course has its own discussion area, in which all users who are registered for that course
can read and post messages to create an on-going discussion. Messages that are entered are
available to everyone in the course, and are listed according to the category, or thread, to
which they pertain.
Typical installation
The typical installation is sufficient for most users. It includes the LearnLinc classroom tools,
sample files, documentation files, audio and video conferencing components, the LearnLinc
Classroom Player, and Microsoft Streaming Media Player.

505

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

The address of a web page or other resource on the Internet, or an intranet. For web pages on
the Internet, a URL might take the form of [Link]
URLLearnLinc resource type
You can create a URL to add a link to a web address to your course contents list, class agenda,
or autostart list. When you click on a URL link, a new web browser window opens and displays
the web page. Note that users who are outside your companys network cannot access content
on your intranet.
User account
A user account is a container for all the available information for one user. A user account
contains the users full name, log-in ID, log-in group, password, personal profile information
(email address, home page, contact information, comments), authority level, and registration
information.
User directory
The Virtual Campus user directory lists all LearnLinc users in your organization. Students,
instructors, and authors can see information for anyone in the directory, and edit their own
information and password. Administrators can add, edit, and delete user accounts and groups
as well.
Video clip
A video clip is a digital video file. When you click on a video clip link in the Virtual Campus,
the clip plays in Windows Media Player. Note: Windows Media Player is installed with the
LearnLinc classroom software. If you have not yet installed the LearnLinc classroom software,
you may or may not have another application installed on your computer that can play the
video clip.
Virtual Campus
The Virtual Campus is a web site that displays LearnLinc information, and provide students and
instructors with a way to access courses and materials, and join classes. Administrators, authors,
and instructors, can use the Virtual Campus to add, edit, and delete LearnLinc information as
well. In addition, the Virtual Campus provides users with links for each class, so that they can
enter a Virtual Classroom.
506

Virtual Classroom
An online meeting space in which students, an instructor, and assistant instructors, can
communicate, interact, and collaborate using a variety of classroom tools. You gain access the
Virtual Classroom by registering for a course in the Virtual Campus. If that course contains any
classes, you can join those classes.
Volume indicators
Indicators on the LearnLinc palette that show the volume level for both the computers
speakers (or headset) and microphone. Green bars indicate an appropriate volume. Red bars
indicate that the volume it too loud.
Web proxy server
A computer that acts as a gate between users on a network and the Internet. Using a web
proxy enables an organization to ensure security, administrative control, and cache Internet
information. Using a web proxy reduces network traffic and speeds the response time of your
web browser by caching, or storing, local copies of each page that its users visit.
Whiteboard
A collaboration tool that students and the instructor can use to share simple drawings, text,
imported pictures, and screen captures during LearnLinc classes. The current floor holder can
add to, edit, or delete the information on the whiteboard. All users can save or print a copy of
the whiteboard. The whiteboard can also be used outside of class to create or edit whiteboard
files.
Whiteboard file
A whiteboard file may contain text, simple graphics, and imported pictures. When you use a
whiteboard file during class, only the floor holder can edit the file.

507

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

508

A
Appendix A: Troubleshooting
This appendix provides additional troubleshooting information for the LearnLinc Virtual
Campus and the LearnLinc classroom. In most cases, the tasks described in this appendix
require a LearnLinc administrator or help from your IS department.
The following issues are addressed in this appendix:
Installation Issues
Virtual Campus Issues
Virtual Classroom Issues
Classroom Tools Issues
Multimedia Content Issues
Administration Issues
Audio Conferencing Troubleshooting
Network Troubleshooting with Ping

Installation Issues
Administration Tool Installation
When I attempt to connect to the LearnLinc Server for the first time, I get the message, Your
log-in cannot be validated. Please check your user name, group, and password and try
again.
LearnLinc passwords are case sensitive. Be sure your user name and group are correct and reenter your password, being careful of capitalization.

509

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Server Installation
I copied my LearnLinc Data and Internet Audio license keys to the server, double clicked on
each one to apply them, and then rebooted my server. When I try to run an Internet audio
class, I receive an error stating that I am not licensed for this conferencing option.
1. Launch a web browser on the server, or another computer.
2. Navigate to [Link] where servername is the name of your
LearnLinc server.
If the Server Information page displays only two licenses, either of the following may be the
case:
You were not logged on to the server as either a local or domain administrator when you
applied the keys. Check your log in, reapply the keys, reboot the server and check the
Server Information page again to verify that the keys are properly installed.
The IP address encoded in the key does not match the current IP address of the server.
Open the key files in a text editor, such as Windows Notepad. Verify that the IP address in
the key matches the IP address of your server. If these addresses do not match, you must
request new license keys from LearnLinc.

510

Virtual Campus Issues

I cant log-in to the Virtual Campus.
First, ensure that you have typed your user name and password correctly, and selected the
correct group.
If you have entered all your user information correctly, the problem may be caused by your
web browser configuration. To log-in to the LearnLinc Virtual Campus, you must enable the use
of cookies for your browser. The procedure for enabling cookies in Internet Explorer and
Navigator follow.
For Internet Explorer 4.x:
1. From the menu bar, select View > Internet Options.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Scroll down to the yellow exclamation icon under Security and select Always accept
cookies.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
For Internet Explorer 5.x
1. From the menu bar, select Tools > Internet Options.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Select Internet or Local Intranet, depending on where your LearnLinc Virtual Campus is
located.
4. Click Custom Level... to display the Security Settings dialog.
5. Scroll down to the Cookies group.
6. Under Allow per-session cookies (not stored) select Enable.
7. Click OK to save your changes.
For Netscape Communicator 4.7x and Netscape Navigator 4.05 and 4.08
1. From the menu bar, select Edit > Preferences.
2. Click Advanced to display the Advanced Options dialog.
3. In the Cookies group select Accept all Cookies.
If your cookies are set properly and you still have trouble logging-in check the following:
Make sure that your LearnLinc administrator has not changed your name, password, or
group.
Check your computer's system time. If it is set for a future date and time, reset it to the
current time.

A cookie is a small piece of

information that your web
browser stores on your hard
drive. A web server may
request your browser to save
your information in a cookie.
It is uniquely yours and can
only be read by the server
that gave it to you, preserving
your privacy. The LearnLinc
Virtual Campus uses temporary cookies to establish if
you are logged in or not.

We suggest that you always

allow cookies. If you choose
to be alerted before saving
cookies, you will be prompted
at every page after you log-in,
and you must accept each
cookie to remain logged-in.

511

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

When logging into the Virtual Campus, I do not see any groups in the Group drop down
list.
The web server is unable to communicate with LearnLincs Name Service database. This
problem has several potential causes. Review the list potential causes and solutions provided
below, keeping in mind that many of these steps involve some technical knowledge of NT
Server and Internet Information Server. If you are not comfortable applying these changes,
please contact your IS professional or call LearnLinc Customer Service.
Have you rebooted since the installation of the LearnLinc server software? If not, reboot
your server and log back in to the Virtual Campus.
Inspect the LearnLinc Server Configuration screen for the proper IP address or server
DNS name. To access the Server Configuration screen, select Start > Programs >
LearnLinc Server, and click the Virtual Campus tab. Check the LearnLinc Main Server
field. If this is set to a DNS name, try putting the numeric IP address of the server, and
then rebooting the server.
Are there multiple IP addresses or network cards on this server PC? Learnlinc installs
itself to the default web site and uses the associated IP address.
If you recently upgraded to LearnLinc 4.5 and replaced the installed LL 4.5 database
with an earlier backed-up version of your database (4.0 or 3.x), LearnLinc will not
function properly. Follow the instructions provided in the Upgrading to LearnLinc 4.5
(included in your product package and on the Customer Support site) and reinstall the
server.
Does the [Link] page work? If not, check the entire LL
virtual directory properties. Is the path correctly mapped to the physical LL directory? Is
the Anonymous User (IUSR_Servername) account used for directory security?
Check that the Server ODBC source is configured correctly. Select Start > Settings >
Control Panel > ODBC, and click the System DSN tab. Find learnLinc40ServerDB and
make sure it is pointing to LearnLincServer\Sysdata\[Link].
Are there other LL or LearnLinc virtual directories of an existing website on this same
server - perhaps from previous installations of LearnLinc? Try removing these other LL
pointers, leaving only one LL virtual directory pointing to newly created
LearnLincServer/Bin directory.
If applying some of the fixes suggested here does not resolve the problem, please contact
LearnLinc Customer Service, or access LearnLincs support site at [Link]

512

I selected a user with the authority level of student to be the instructor for a course. Now,
that student can add and delete classes and resources in that course. What can I do?
We strongly recommend that you do not assign users with lower authority levels (student and
self register) as instructors for courses. Doing so will enable them to access the edit functions
for any course in which they are instructors. When you create user accounts, we recommend
that you give instructor or greater authority to anyone who should be teaching or managing
courses, and only assign those users as instructors.
When I created my account, I used more than one space in a row in my log-in ID (or
name). Now, I still have to enter all the spaces to log-in, but I only see one space when my ID
or Name displays in the Virtual Campus. Which should I use?
You should always use the exact characters, including spaces, that you entered when creating
your account. Because of the limitations of HTML, the language used to create web pages, the
Virtual Campus cannot display more than one space, but your user information is stored
exactly as you entered it.

513

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Virtual Classroom Issues

Trouble Joining a Class
When I click on Join Class I get a message that says: Internet Explorer cannot download
from the Internet site... What's wrong?
This message is often due to running a version of Internet Explorer that is not compatible with
LearnLinc. If you are using Internet Explorer 4.01, you must apply Service Pack 1 for it to work
with LearnLinc. Otherwise, your browser will be unable to work with Active Server Pages (ASP)
or Internet Information Server 4.0 (IIS), both of which are used by LearnLinc.
The Learnlinc client CD includes Internet Explorer 5.0, which fixes this problem. Install IE 5.0
from the LearnLinc CD or go to Microsoft's web page and download and install either Internet
Explorer 4.01 SP1 or SP2 or Internet Explorer 5.
Im using Netscape, and when I click on a join link, I get a message that asks me whether
I want to open or save a file called [Link]. What should I do?
When you click join, your computer should download the file [Link] and launch LearnLinc,
so that you can join class. Your computer does not have the proper registry entries to launch
Learnlinc when you click join.
In most cases, if you select Open it, Learnlinc will launch. If the option is available, select Do
not show this dialog again to make sure that LearnLinc launches automatically every time you
click join.
When I click join, I get a message that asks me what program I want to use to open the file
[Link]. What do I do?
The Learnlinc classroom software is either not installed or is not installed properly. Reinstall the
classroom software by downloading it from the Virtual Campus or installing it from the
Learnlinc client CD.

514

When I click on Join Class, I get a message that says that all current licenses are in use.
What's wrong?
The Learnlinc keys for the server may have expired, are not installed properly, do not contain
the correct IP address for the server, or you need to purchase more licenses because they are
all in use.
First, check your LearnLinc server licensing through the troubleshooting page at
[Link] where servername is the name of your
LearnLinc server and virtualdirectory is the name of the virtual directory in which your Virtual
Campus is stored. If your keys have expired or the server IP address has changed, contact
LearnLinc Customer Service to obtain new keys.
You can also try reappling your current keys by logging on to the Server computer as an
administrator, copying the files to the server, double-clicking on each file, and then restarting
the server.
When I click Join Class, I get the following message:, You cannot connect to the LearnLinc
server. What should I do?
Your computer cannot connect to the Learnlinc server to join the class.
1. Be sure that:
the LearnLinc service is actually running on the server
you have TCP/IP connectivity to the server
To check for TCP/IP connectivity, try pinging the server (for information on how to ping
a server, see Network Troubleshooting with Ping on page 546).
If you can ping the server, but still get this message when trying to join a class, you may
be prevented from joining class by a firewall. The firewall may be preventing Learnlinc
information from travelling across the network to your computer. Contact your
Information Systems department for further help.
If you cannot ping your LearnLinc server, check to be sure all of your network cables
are connected properly, restart your computer and try it again. If you still cannot ping
the server, then contact your Information Systems department for further help.
2. Have your LearnLinc administrator check the address of the server as it is reported in the
error message. If that address is not correct, your LearnLinc administrator must to run the

515

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Server Configuration Control Panel on the Learnlinc Server to make the appropriate
changes.

When a I try to join a class which has beginning and ending times set, I get a message
saying that it is either too early for the class or that the class has ended. I am trying to join
at the appropriate time. Whats wrong?
The LearnLinc classroom software uses the local time settings on the your computer to
determine if it is the correct time to join the class. When the beginning and ending times are
sent to the LearnLinc server, they are converted to Greenwich Mean Time and are then
converted back to the appropriate time zone for the computer that is joining the class. Make
sure that the date, time, and time zone for your computer are correct for your location.
Students are allowed to join the class beginning 30 minutes before the scheduled start time.
When I try to join a class, one of the following happens to me:
I get into the class and see the student palette, but only for about 20 seconds.
The Learnlinc splash screen progress indicator hangs on Joining the class
Why is this happening?
You may need to enable some of the additional connection options included in the 4.5 client
software. Try the following:
1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel and double click on the LearnLinc Client icon.
The Learnlinc Client Configuration dialog opens.
2. Under Web Proxy, select Force HTTP Polling.
3. Click Apply, and then OK.
4. Try to join class again (there is no need to reboot your computer).
5. If you still encounter the problem, return to the Client Configuration dialog and select
Force all Requests to Use the Proxy Server, click Apply and OK, and try to join the class
again.
6. If you still encounter the problem, return to the Client Configuration dialog and under
Internet Options, deselect the attempt to use UDP audio option, click Apply and OK, and
try to join the class again.
If, with both of these options enabled and UDP disabled, you still cannot join the class, please
contact Learnlinc Customer Service.

516

When I click Join, I get one of the following errors:

Unable to connect to the Learnlinc Server... The end of the error message displays HTTP
status code 407 or HTTP status code 401.
Unable to access User Info on LL server".
What does this mean?

Most likely your web proxy uses a type of authentication that LearnLinc does not support.
Authentication is used to control where internal network users can go on the Internet.
Internal network users who want to go out to the Internet must first authenticate to the
proxy server.
Some authentication schemes, such as Challenge-Response (NTLM) authentication, are not
supported by LearnLinc. Search for article QL9JD0000509 on the LearnLinc Customer Service
Support Site for details and possible solutions.
You can also try the troubleshooting steps outlined in response to the question When I try to
join a class, one of the following happens to me . . . on page 516 of this appendix
document or call LearnLinc Customer Service for assistance.
Audio Issues
When I join a class, no one in the class can hear me and/or I can't hear anyone else. What
might be wrong?
There are a few possible answers to this question. Consult the Audio Troubleshooting steps in
Audio Conferencing Troubleshooting on page 537 to resolve the most common audio
problems.

517

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

When I talk during a class, most students can hear me but some cannot. What might be the
problem?
In situations where some students can hear your audio, and others cannot, the problem is with
either the audio hardware on those computers in question or the network.
Use text chat to ask the students what color their network indicators are. They may not have
enough bandwidth for good audio transmission.
If they have yellow or red network indicators, there is not enough bandwidth for clear
audio. Use less bandwidth intensive content or applications, and pause after you take an
action, to allow the students computers to update before you begin speaking again.
If their indicators are green, ask the students who cannot hear you consult Audio
Conferencing Troubleshooting on page 537 to resolve any problems with their audio
hardware. If a student goes through Audio Conferencing Troubleshooting, has his or her
audio working properly, but still cannot hear you, then contact LearnLinc Customer Service.
When I talk, everyone can hear me but they say the my audio is breaking up or is
choppy. What might be wrong?
There are three possibilities:
1. Bandwidth. If some or all of your students are on dial-up connections, using modems,
they may not have enough bandwidth to receive a smooth stream of audio. When you do
other things in a class (such as launch the Synchronized Web Browser or other content),
there is even less bandwidth available to transport audio.
The bandwidth monitor in Learnlinc should help you monitor the available bandwidth.
The bandwidth monitor is located underneath the conferencing window and is
represented by two computers with an arrow between them.
If this monitor is green, then you have enough bandwidth.
If the monitor turns red, bandwidth has dropped below acceptable levels. Pause for a
moment, and do not try to speak again until everyone's monitor returns to green (or at
least to yellow).

518

2.

3.

As an instructor, there are several things you can do to make the audio smoother:
Do not talk while you are launching or changing content pages.
Click the Mute button whenever you launch content.
Try to use less bandwidth intensive content (fewer graphics, etc.).
Processor interrupts. If the content you are using in a class is processor-intensivethat is,
when it opens it contains lots of graphics that take a little while to display on screenyour
audio may break up. When your computer has to display a graphic on screen, it interrupts
the processor to ask it to do so. As it does this, the processor momentarily stops playing
the audio stream, and the result is choppy audio. To resolve this problem:
Don't talk while you are launching or changing content pages (pause until the graphic
displays).
Use less graphic intensive resources in class.
Have your students upgrade their processors.
You are overdriving your microphone. Some microphones are very sensitive. If you talk
into a sensitive microphoneeven at a normal volumeit picks up too much noise for the
sound card to deliver smoothly. This can result in choppy sounding audio. Try turning
down your microphone volume in the Learnlinc Audio Wizard or in the volume control on
your computer.
Select Tools > Local > Audio Wizard, on the LearnLinc palette menu bar to run the
Audio Wizard.
Double-click on the speaker icon in the lower right of your Windows taskbar to launch
the Windows volume control panel.

When I have the floor, other participants complain that they hear a loud hissing sound.
Whats wrong?
Either extremely sensitive or low-quality microphones can cause hissing sounds. Typically,
turning down the microphone volume will reduce the hiss, but may not remove the problem. If
the problem continues, try using a different microphone.

519

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

When one or more participants talk during a class, some people hear an echo. They hear
what the person said again about 2-3 seconds after they heard it initially. What is wrong?
Echoes are caused by one of two situations:
1. Someone is using external speakers and a microphone. When they have the floor, other
people's voices come out of their speakers and go back in through their microphone, thus
causing the echo.
Ask the participant who has the external speakers to use a headset instead.
If the participant does not have access to a headset, he or she must run the LearnLinc
Audio Wizard and select Speakers when prompted. This will give the student a Talk
button on the LearnLinc palette, which he or she must click to talk once he or she gets
the floor. When the student is done talking, he or she must click the Talk button again
to listen. This half-duplex audio configuration resolves the echo problem by turning
off the students speakers when they are using their microphone.
2. A participants audio drivers are causing the echo. If one participant seems to be the cause
of the echo (i.e.; it only happens when they have the floor) but the participant is using
either the Talk button scenario described above or is using a headset, he or she may
need to update the computers audio drivers. Instruct them visit the Learnlinc Audio
Update web page for assistance ([Link]
Even though my sound card is capable of full-duplex sound, I get a Talk button in a
Learnlinc class. Why?
If you are sure you have a full-duplex sound card, either of the following may have happened:
You selected speakers in the Learnlinc Audio Wizard. This would force the Talk
button to show up even if your sound card is full-duplex capable. This setting helps to
prevent audio echoes from participants who use external speakers during LearnLinc
classes.
To remove the Talk button, select Tools > Local > Audio Wizard, on the LearnLinc
palette menu bar to run the Audio Wizard. When prompted, select Headsets instead.
Your sound cards drivers are being detected as half-duplex, even though they are full
duplex. Update your audio drivers by visiting the LearnLinc Audio Update web page for
assistance ([Link] or your computer or sound card
manufacturer's web page. Download the latest audio drivers, install them, and restart
your computer. Run the LearnLinc audio wizard again, making sure to select Headset
when prompted.
520

Video Issues
Why do some people in the class have video conferencing, while I only have audio
conferencing?
LearnLinc video conferencing comes in two types: Indeo and Multicast, each of which has its
own hardware requirements. The table below outlines the type of conferencing you will have
in classes that use video conferencing, based on your hardware.
In all cases everyone in the class can hear you, even if they cannot see you.
In a class that uses: If you have:

you will use:

Indeo video
conferencing

Intel ProShare 150, 200, or 400

hardware and software

video conferencingeveryone in class can

see you. When someone else has the floor
you can hear their audio but you can only
see them if they have ProShare 200 or 400
hardware and software.

Multicast video
conferencing

Intel ProShare 200 hardware

and software

audio conferencingeveryone in class can

hear you but not see you. When someone
else has the floor you can hear their audio,
but you cannot see them.

Multicast video
conferencing

Intel ProShare IBVC or 500

hardware and software

video conferencingeveryone in class can

hear you, only others with ProShare IBVC
or 500 can see you. When someone else
has the floor you can hear their audio, but
you can only see them if they have
ProShare 400 hardware and software.

To determine what type of conferencing your class uses locate the class in the Virtual Campus
by logging-in, clicking the course name on your home page, and then clicking the class name
in the courses contents list. The conferencing type is listed on the class details page under
Audio/Video.
To determine what type of ProShare hardware you are using consult your ProShare
documentation or your IS department.

521

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Some students seem to take a long time to receive streaming video clips or a live video feed.
Why?
Streaming video is designed to work over lower bandwidth connections effectivelybut it may
take longer to do so. If some students have more available bandwidth than others, they may
receive and view clips faster than others. This is normal. To improve performance, students
need a faster connection to the server and/or the Internet.
LearnLinc Palette Issues
The list of students in a class is either incomplete or contains multiple entries for some
students. Whats wrong?
The student list in the LearnLinc palette is refreshed periodically and may take some time to
synchronize for to all the computers in a class. If someone has left and reentered a class, his or
her name may appear twice for a short period of time. Alternately, if a new student enters the
class, it may take some time for his or her name to show up on everyone's list. Generally, after
a minute or two, the list will return to normal.

Classroom Tools Issues

Synchronized Web Browser
Sometimes, multiple windows launch in the synchronized web browser. Why?
1. LearnLinc support for frames differs for Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet
Explorer. The method by which the synchronized web browser connects to each browser
differs, and Netscape Navigator does not provide a way to communicate frames
information to the synchronized web browser.
Netscape users will not be able to view synchronized content containing frames
properly.

522

2.

3.

For frames to work properly with Internet Explorer, both the floor holder and the
students must have Internet Explorer. We recommend that you use Internet Explorer on
all LearnLinc computers if your content contains frames.
Web pages that contain frames or complex uses of VBScript or JavaScript can cause the
synchronized web browser to launch multiple windows as well. (Simple uses of JavaScript
are usually safe.)
If you are authoring your own HTML content, avoid using VBScript or JavaScript to
create iteration loops, page redirection, browser spawning, or other scripts that hold up
the CPU for a long time.
If you are browsing sites on the public Internet, test them with the synchronized web
browser before using them in class to see if there are multiple window issues.
Some web sites contain scripts that launch a second browser window automatically when
you navigate to a page on the site. Test the site by viewing it with your regular web
browser first, to see whether it is launching second windows for you.

When I launch the Synchronized Web Browser, students with Netscape do not get a new
browser window.
When the instructor launches the Synchronized Web Browser and Netscape is already running
on a students computer, a new Netscape window will not open. The Synchronized Web
Browser will take control of the existing Netscape window. If Netscape is minimized, the
student must click Netscape on the task bar to restore the window.
Internet Explorer users will see a new browser window open when the instructor launches the
synchronized web browser.
When I type a URL into the Synchronized Web Browser, some students receive the page
instantly, while others have to wait for the page to load.
Many organizations use web proxy servers that cache web pages on their networks. When one
person accesses that page, the page is saved on the server. When other users access the page,
they are retrieving the cached page, rather than the original. Retrieving a cached page usually
occurs quickly.
If you have some students who are on a network with a web proxy server, and others who are
not, those who are not will have to retrieve the page from its source, which may take longer.

523

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

When I type a URL into the Synchronized Web Browser, some students receive errors in their
browsers, informing them that they cannot access the page.
If you are accessing pages on your intranet, and some of your students are outside your
organizations firewall, they may not have access to those pages. Many organizations choose
not to grant outside access to intranet pages to persons outside the firewall, for reasons of
confidentiality or security.
When I close the Synchronized Web Browser, Netscape crashes.
This is a known problem with Netscape Navigator 4.04. LearnLinc supports Netscape Navigator
4.05 or higher, Netscape Communicator 4.5 and higher and Internet Explorer 4.01/sp1 and
higher. Please upgrade your browser to a supported version.
A student closed his or her web browser while we were using the Synchronized Web
Browser. How do I get them back in sync with the rest of the class?
Click the agenda tab on your LearnLinc palette. Next, click the Synchronized Web Browser
icon. Doing so will re-launch the students browser. Once the students browser is open, click
the Refresh or Reload button on your browser to force all of the browsers in the class to resync
with yours.
I clicked on a link on a web page and now my students are telling me that the web page is
flashing continuously on their screens. It looks fine to me. Whats wrong?
or
Someone in the class clicked on a link on a web page and now the web page is flashing
continuously on my screen Whats wrong?
If the floor holder clicks on a link in a banner ad, or a link that gets redirected after it is clicked
(for example, a link that gets redirected to a secure server so that the url protocol changes from
http to https after it is clicked) the floor holder will follow the link properly, but everyone
else in class will see the page flash or flicker continuously in their browsers. To stop the
flashing, the floor holder can click on another link that does not redirect.
We recommend that you do not create content that contains banner ads or redirect links.

524

When I am the instructor and launch a URL agenda item, one of my students gets an error
message Unable to invoke Internet Explorer.
LearnLinc web synchronization attempts to open the default web browser. If no default is set,
you may get this error. The definition of a default browser is the browser that automatically
opens when you click on a URL in any Windows application. To specify a default browser,
follow the instructions below for the browser you have installed on your computer. If this does
not work, try reinstalling your browser.
Internet Explorer 4.x
1. Open Internet Explorer 4.x.
2. Select Tools > Internet Options.
3. On the Programs tab, click the Internet Explorer should check to see whether it is the
default check box.
4. Close all browser windows.
5. Open Internet Explorer again.
A dialog displays, asking if you want to make Internet Explorer the default browser.
6. Click Yes.
Internet Explorer 5.x
1. Open Internet Explorer 5.x.
2. Select View > Internet Options.
3. On the Programs tab, click the Internet Explorer should check to see whether it is the
default check box.
4. Close all browser windows.
5. Open Internet Explorer again.
A dialog displays, asking if you want to make Internet Explorer the default browser.
6. Click Yes.

525

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Netscape Navigator or Communicator

1. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > Notepad, to open Notepad. You will use Notepad
to edit your Netscape preferences file.
2. In Notepad, select File > Open, and browse to C:\Program
Files\Netscape\Users\[USERID], where USERID is your windows user profile ID.
For example: C:\Program Files\Netscape\Users\jonathanm
3. Change 'Files of type:' to 'All Files'
4. Select [Link].
You will receive a Do Not Edit This File message, which you can ignore.
5. Change the following line:
From:
user_pref("[Link].ignore_def_check", true)
To:
user_pref("[Link].ignore_def_check", false)
6. Select File > Exit, and then Yes to save changes.
7. Open your Netscape browser.
A message appears asking if you want to make it the default browser.
8. Click Yes.

Text Chat
I want to send a private text chat message to a student, but the private option is not
available.
Text Chat must be undocked from the LearnLinc palette for private chat to become available.
Right click on the text chat area and click Dock my text chat window from the shortcut menu
to clear its checkmark and undock text chat. Students cannot send private text chat messages
to each other.
Whiteboard
When I open up a Whiteboard file it takes a long time for the file to display on the student's
computers. And sometimes my audio gets choppy while the file is loading. What can I do?
Launching whiteboard files may take some time over a slow dial-up connection, and will use
up some bandwidthso that the audio data may not get to the student in time. This can cause
audio to sound choppy in a low bandwidth situation. As a workaround, pause when you

526

launch a whiteboard file, and do not begin speaking again until the whiteboard status bar says
synchronized.

When I try to launch the Whiteboard, it does not launch on my students computers. Why?
Be sure you have the floor before you launch synchronized applications like the Whiteboard. If
you do not have the floor, you will not be able to launch or close the Whiteboard on your
students computers.
When I launch a Whiteboard file from the agenda, I get a message that says, Failed to
open document. What's wrong?
The Whiteboard can not locate the file that is specified in the agenda item. The file may be
located on another computer or on a network drive that you cannot access. Complete the
following steps to check the path in the Whiteboard resource to find out where the file is
located.
1. Return to the Virtual Campus.
2. Locate the course you are taking and click its name.
The courses contents list displays.
3. Click on the class name for the class you are taking.
The class details tab displays.
4. Click the Agenda tab.
The agenda list displays.
5. Click the tile of the whiteboard file with which you are having trouble.
The whiteboard files details page displays.
6. Check the location of the file.
If the file is located on a local drive, such as C:\ or D:\, you must have the file
stored in that same location on your computer to use the agenda item.
If the file is stored on a network drive, you must have access to that drive to use the
agenda item.

527

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Application Sharing
When I launch an application, some of my students can only see part of itthe rest is off the
screen. Why?
You are running your monitor at a higher resolution than your students (such as 1024x768
versus 800x600). This gives you more room on your screen than your students, so that part of
the program is off screen for them. To resolve this issue:
Lower your monitor resolution to match your students.
Ask your students to increase their monitor resolution to match yours.
Resize the program or content window so that your students can better see the resources.
Have students use the scroll bar that surrounds the Appshare window. This will allow them
to view different areas of the application.
When I am teaching a class, sometimes I don't seem to control the student's computers. They
don't synchronize correctly in the content window, or their applications don't shut down
when I close mine. Why?
You must have the floor whenever you want to synchronize your actions with the class.
Without the floor, you will not be in control of the student's computers. Look for the red OnAir indicator at the top of your LearnLinc palette before attempting to perform synchronous
activities such as shutting down shared applications, advancing to new screens in synchronous
content, or launching shared content (such as Question and Answer files, HTML files or
multimedia content).
When using Application Sharing, the students see the screen flicker and blink often, and some or
all of them are disconnected from class.
The instructor or presenting users PC color depth setting is probably set incorrectly for
Appsharing. Appshare requires that the PC that is presenting the application has a color setting
above 256 colors (at least 16-bit color).
To change your color settings:
1. Right click on the Desktop, and select Properties.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. Under Color Palette, select 65,536 or one of the higher options.
When I try to run AppShare by clicking on the shortcut icon on the Agenda tab, I get AppView
instead. Why?
528

If you are in a LearnLinc Multicast Audio or Multicast Video class the AppShare/AppView icon
will only launch AppView. You can run AppShare by selecting Run > Application Sharing from
the LearnLinc palette menu bar.

I installed LearnLinc on both sides of my dual boot (Windows 95/98 and Windows NT)
computer. I uninstalled LearnLinc from one of my drives, and now AppShare wont work.
Regardless of where you choose to install LearnLinc the OpSession engine, which is necessary
for AppShare to run, is installed to C:\Program Files\Common Files\OpSession. If you
uninstall either copy of LearnLinc, AppShare will stop working with the remaining copy. To fix
this problem, reinstall LearnLinc on the drive on which you want to run LearnLinc.
One of my students joined class late, and now that student doesnt see my cursor as I use the
shared applications in AppShare. Why not?
This is a known limitation of LearnLinc 4.0. To resolve this issue you must stop the AppShare
session for the entire class and then restart it. When a latecomer joins your AppShare session
you have the option to update them immediately, or wait until later. We recommend that you
choose to update later and finish the current task, then stop AppShare for the class and restart
it for everyone, so that the latecomer can see all the AppShare activity.
I was sharing my desktop with the class, and when I tried to switch to just one or two
applications, the students never got them. What should I do?
If you encounter this situation, click Send Update in the LearnLinc AppShare window.
Doing so will update everyone in the class, so that they see the new applications you have
shared. You may want to set Feedback to Yes/No and ask your students to click Yes when
they see the shared applications.

529

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

I want to stop sharing the current application, but there are no other applications in the list.
How do I stop sharing it?
If you are done with AppShare, click Exit in the LearnLinc AppShare dialog to stop
sharing the application and close Appshare.
If you want to share another application, launch and configure that application on your
computer. When you are ready, click Change on the LearnLinc AppShare dialog. When
the Select Application dialog displays, click Refresh List. Clear the check mark next to
the current application and check the new application. Configure AppShare and click Start
to begin sharing the new application.
AppView
When I launch AppView and attempt to send the application to the students, they only see a
white window and not the application itself.
AppView only works on networks that use IP Multicasting. IP Multicasting is not currently
enabled on your network, or you are attempting to use AppView over the Internet, which does
not support IP Multicasting. As an alternative, use AppShare, or contact your network
administrator to discuss adding IP Multicasting to your network.
When I launch AppView on my Windows NT Workstation and send the application out to
the students, they see my entire desktop.
This is a limitation of the AppView application in the Windows NT environment. This does not
occur under Windows 95 or 98.

530

Glimpse
When I click Capture Screen in glimpse, it takes a very long time to see the screen capture
and/or I cant participate in class while Im waiting for the screen capture to display.
When you use Capture Screen to view a students desktop, you are requesting a large amount
of data to be transferred from the students computer to your computer. If you have a slow
connection, it may take several minutes for the entire screen capture to display in your glimpse
window. Additionally, the transfer of glimpse data may affect the quality of your audio
conferencing or other bandwidth intensive LearnLinc applications.
If you have a slow internet connection, for example a 26.4 kbps connection, use Capture
Thumbnail to conserve bandwidth.
If you have a slow connection and you must capture a full screen, warn your students that
they may not be able to hear or interact with you for several minutes.
One or more of my students are not in the Current Attendees list.
The Current Attendees list in glimpse lists everyone who was in the class when glimpse was
launched. Click Refresh List to update the list if students join class after you launch glimpse. If
no students are in the list, make sure you have the floor, and then re-launch glimpse.
When I glimpse a student's screen, the image that I get is small and difficult to read. How
can I get a better screen image?
By default, the Glimpse application takes a thumbnail size picture of the student's screen.
This improves the speed of the screen capture, and is designed for the overall viewto see
what programs are open on a student's screen, for example. To see a more detailed view of a
student's screen, highlight his or her name in the Current Attendees list and click Capture
Screen. A much larger and more detailed image of the student's screen displays. Note that the
larger image takes longer to display. It may take as much as 30 seconds over a slow dial-up
connection.
When I glimpse a student's screen, it takes much too long. How can I get a quicker image of
the students screen?
To get a less detailed, but much faster image of a student's screen, use the Capture Thumbnail
button. Highlight the student's name in the Current Attendee list and click Capture
Thumbnail button. Using Capture Thumbnail produces a smaller, less detailed image of the
student's screenbut the image displays much faster than the Capture Screen option.
531

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Multimedia Content Issues

When I launch a Toolbook or Authorware multimedia resource, some or all students get the
error message LearnLinc cannot invoke presentation name Whats wrong?
Learnlinc is trying to locate and open the appropriate file, but can not find it. Usually, this is
because the file is not stored in the same directory on every students computer. Multimedia
files, due to their large size, must be distributed ahead of time to every students computer in
the same path and folder.
When the instructor launches a multimedia file, the instructor's computer simply tells all the
other computers in the class to go find its copy of the multimedia file in the same directory,
and open it up. If the file does not exist in that directory, the Unable to Invoke error will
display. For example, if the instructor launches the file [Link], which is stored in
C:\content\hr, his or her computer tells each students computer to look in C:\content\hr
and open the file [Link]. If the file is not stored there on a students computer, he or she will
get the Unable to Invoke error.
There are two other less likely possible causes for this message:
You are running the file from a network drive and directory, but not everyone in the class
has that drive mapped to the same drive. To correct this problem, be sure that everyone has
the drive mapped exactly the same, so that when anyone in the class clicks on My
Computer they see the same drive letter mapped to the same network drive. If this is not
possible, you must either distribute the file locally and recreate the resource in the Agenda.
The file is being shared but is not marked as read only. If the file is not read only, the
first user to get to the file locks itand no other users can open it. To correct this problem,
ask the user who does have the file open to close it. Locate the file on the server, right click
on it, and select Properties from the right click menu. Check the read only option, and
click OK. Try running the resource again.

532

When I launch a multimedia file, it opens up on my computer, but does not open up any of
the students' computers. Why not?
To launch applications on other computers in a LearnLinc class, you must have the floor. If the
red On-Air indicator displays at the top of your LearnLinc palette, you have the floor. If you
do not see the On Air indicator, click the Take Floor icon on the upper right of the palette to
take the floor back (only the class instructor has the Take Floor icon).
When I play a multimedia file that has an audio clip embedded in it, no one can hear the
embedded clip play. Why not?
This may occur because the sound card is still being used by LearnLinc audio or video
conferencing.
1. Close the embedded media clip.
2. Select Tools > Class > Suspend Audio/Video from the LearnLinc palette menu bar. (This
option is only available to the class instructor.
Doing so will release the sound card, so that other applications can use it. Try playing the
embedded clip again. When the clip is done playing, select Tools > Class > Suspend Audio/
Video again to restart LearnLinc audio or video conferencing.
After I have played an audio or video clip, no one can hear me. What might be wrong?
Be sure that you have unsuspended audio/video after you finish the clip. When the clip is
done playing, select Tools > Class > Suspend Audio/Video, making sure that the check mark is
cleared from Suspend Audio/Video to restart LearnLinc audio or video conferencing.
When I try to run the Powerpoint to Toolbook converter, I get prompted to select the
instance of LearnLinc that I want to use. But nothing is listed in the screen. What Should I
do?
To use the PowerPoint to ToolBook converter, you must first open a blank ToolBook template.
The converter creates a bitmap for each slide in your PowerPoint file, and pastes them into the
blank template.
1. Exit the PowerPoint to ToolBook converter by clicking Cancel.
2. Open a template by selecting Start > Programs > Learnlinc Utilities, and then clicking on
one of the available LearnLinc templates. Choose the template based on the monitor
resolution that your students computers use.

533

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

3.
4.
5.
6.

When you see the message stating that you are not logged in to LearnLinc, click OK.
The template opens, and displays a blank gray screen.
Run the PowerPoint to ToolBook converter.
Select your Powerpoint presentation on the first screen
The second screen displays, with the message Select LearnLinc Content from this screen
Make sure the template you opened in step 2 is highlighted and click Next to continue
with the conversion process.

When I launch a LearnLinc ToolBook template from the LearnLinc utilities program group,
I get the following message: You are not logged-in to LearnLinc. You will not be able to use
LearnLinc resources until you log-in. What should I do?
Click OK. This is a notification message that will not affect your ability to convert your
PowerPoint content. The Template will open and you will then be able to launch and use the
PowerPoint to Toolbook converter.
When I launch a PointPlus presentation in the synchronized web browser, the PointPlus
logo displays but the presentation does not display and the middle of the screen is blank.
What is wrong?
There are a few possibilities:
The HTML file that was created by the PointPlus converter does not have the proper
embed command in it, or does not have the application= line in it. Open the HTML file
in NotePad, and look for the following lines:
<EMBED SRC="[Link]">
Where filename is the name of your PointPlus presentation file. Be sure this line actually
contains the extension .css after the filename. If it is not there, add it and save the file.
Now run the file again in your web browser.
If it does not work, edit the file to add the following line after the embed command:
TYPE="application/x-ilinc-PointPlus"
So that the line reads as follows:
<EMBED SRC="[Link]" TYPE="application/x-ilinc-PointPlus">
Add the line, save the file, and try it again.
If the problem persists, the Pointplus plug-ins may not be installed properly on your
computer. Make sure you have administrative rights to the computer (if it is an NT
computer) and reinstall the Learnlinc client using the Custom installation. Select all the
534

available options when prompted. After reinstalling LearnLinc, be sure that the following
files exist in your Plugins directory: [Link], [Link] and [Link] (The
location of the plug-ins directory will be different depending upon the Operating System
you are using and the browser you are using. Generally it can be located by searching for
the directory called Plugins.)

When I try to launch a PowerPoint presentation that I converted to HTML or to a PointPlus

presentation, I can open the file, but some or all of my students get an error message that
the file can not be found. What could be wrong?
A common mistake is to try to view HTML files or PointPlus files in the synchronized web
browser from a local or network drive, rather than from a web server. When you use the
synchronized web browser to view the file, your computer tells the other computers in the
class to locate and open the file from the same location. If that location is a local or network
drive that you can get to, but that some or all of the students cannot get to (for example,
c:\myfiles\[Link]), then the students will not be able to open the file and will get error
messages such as 404 error file not found. If you move your presentation files to a web
server, or other location that all your students can access, you will be able to use them
successfully during a LearnLinc class.
Place the HTML and/or .css files in a virtual directory on a web server (the LearnLinc server is a
web server) in the Inetpub\WWWroot folder). Use the synchronized web browser to view the
file by entering the files new location. For example, [Link] where
servername is the domain name of your server and filename is the name of the first HTML file
in your presentation.

535

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

After uploading and converting my PowerPoint file using the upload feature (QuickLinc), the
agenda item does not work. I notice that [Link] (three slashes) shows in the URL location of

my browser when I run the item. Also, the view and description do not work when looking
at the agenda items information in the Virtual Campus.
The URL pointing to your converted PowerPoint slide may have more than 135 characters. The
URL is automatically created during the upload process using the course and folder name, as
well as the PowerPoint file name.
For example, if you are uploading How to make a [Link] to the course Basket Weaving
101 which is in the virtual campus course folder Arts and Crafts Courses, then the URL will
be:
[Link]
how_to_make_a_basket/[Link]
(Note that the underscores in the URL count as characters)
Try shortening the file name before uploading, or shorten the name of the course that will
contain the PowerPoint URL agenda item, and then re-upload the file.

Administration Issues
I created an account with some punctuation in it (such as a period) and now I am having
trouble using the account. Whats the problem?
The LearnLinc Name Service database, where user names are stored, uses periods to separate
objects. When you use a period in a users log-in ID, or a course, class, or resource name, it
corrupts the object in the Name Service. Delete the account and recreate it without
punctuation.
I gave a user some additional rights by assigning them a higher authority level (such as
instructor), but they can not log in to the Administration tool to work with their course and
classes. Whats wrong?
To run the Learnlinc Administration tool, users must have Administrator level authority. For all
other authority levels, users are restricted to using the Web based administration utilities in the
Virtual Campus.

536

Audio Conferencing Troubleshooting

Use this section to troubleshoot your audio problems. Follow the steps in order. Note that in
some cases, you may be asked to repeat certain steps. Where that is true, the instructions will
prompt you to move to a different Step if you have already completed a particular step once.

Step 1
Select Start > Programs > LearnLinc > LearnLinc Audio Wizard, from the Windows taskbar.
Step 2
1. Click Next.
You may see a message stating that there are known problems with your audio drivers. If
you get this message, note this and click OK to continue.
2. Click Next and move to Step 3.
Step 3
1. Select either Speakers or Headset, depending upon what type of hardware is currently
attached to your computer.
Turn on the speakers, or put on your headset. If your headset has a microphone button
make sure it is not muted.
2. Click Next.
Step 4
Do you see a message stating that your computer is unable to play the file [Link]?
If yes, exit the LearnLinc Audio wizard and move to Step 10.
If no, click Next, and move to Step 5.
Step 5
Click the Play button. You should hear the following message: Adjust the volume until you
can hear this message comfortably.
If you hear the message, move the volume slider until you are satisfied with the volume.
Click Next and move to Step 6.
If you do not hear the message, move to Step 12.

537

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Step 6
1. Click on Record and talk into the microphone for several seconds.
2. When you are done, click on Playback.
If you hear the recording play back, move to Step 7.
If you do not hear the recording play back, move to Step 16.
Step 7
Click on Finish. You have successfully completed the audio wizard. Now join a LearnLinc class.
(See Joining a Class on page 329 for details.)
When you are in a class, you will see either a Mute checkbox or a Talk button underneath
the conferencing window on the LearnLinc palette. The following diagram highlights the
difference between the Mute checkbox and the Talk button.

If you see a Talk button (right diagram), move to step 18.

If you do see a Mute checkbox (left diagram), move to Step 8.

538

Step 8
Exit the class you are in and join the LearnLinc Audio Test site on [Link].
1. Launch your web browser and navigate to [Link]
2. Click Im a LearnLinc user and Id like to log-in.
3. Enter the following account information and click Login.
Log-in ID: student
Group: sample
Password: leave this field blank.
4. Scroll down, locate the course Internet Audio Test Class and click Join.
Once you join the class, you should hear the LearnLinc audio message, stating that your
computer is properly configured to receive audio.
If you did not hear the audio test voice, contact your system administrator or LearnLinc
Customer Service.
Step 9
Make the appropriate adjustments to your hardware. Plug the cables into the correct ports,
make sure the power is on, turn the volume control knob up, and return to Step 5.
Step 10
If this is the first time you have been directed to Step 10, complete the tasks below.
If this is the second time you have been directed to Step 10, skip this step and move to Step
11.
If this is the third time you have been directed to Step 10, contact your system administrator
or LearnLinc Customer Service assistance.
Reinstall the LearnLinc classroom software with the Custom installation option. When
prompted, select all components for installation. Doing so will force the replacement of several
key files, and should resolve the problem.
When you have completed the Custom install of LearnLinc, return to Step 1.
Step 11
If this is the first time you have been directed to Step 11, then proceed with the directions
below.

539

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

If this is the second time you have been directed to Step 11, contact your system
administrator or LearnLinc Customer Service for assistance.
Your audio drivers (the software that tells your computer how to talk to your sound card) most
likely need to be updated. Updated drivers are available from either your computer
manufacturer your sound card manufacturer of your sound card. Generally, you should start by
visiting the web page for your computer manufacturer (such as Dell, IBM, or Compaq). Most
manufacturers have the correct audio drivers for the sound cards they distribute available on
their web sites. Follow the instructions with the drivers to update them.
If you need assistance updating your drivers, visit the LearnLinc Audio driver update page at
[Link] When you have successfully updated your audio drivers,
restart your computer, and return to Step 1 of the Audio conferencing troubleshooting section.

Step 12
1. With the LearnLinc Audio Wizard still open, double-click on the speaker icon in the bottom
right of the Window task bar.
The Volume control panel displays. Note that your Volume control panel may look slightly
different, based on the type of sound card you have.

540

2.

Check to be sure that none of the Mute checkboxes are selected, except for Mic. In
particular, be sure that Mute All is not checked and that the Mute selection underneath
Wave is not checked.
If any items are muted, move to Step 13.
If nothing is muted, move to Step 14.

Step 13
1. Clear selected Mute checkboxes, except for the Mic. Mute checkbox, in the Volume
control panel by clicking on the checkbox to remove the checkmark.
2. Select Options > Exit, from the Volume control panel menu bar.
3. Return to the LearnLinc Audio Wizard, and click Play again.
If you hear the file play, return to Step 6.
If you still do not hear the file play, move to Step 14.
Step 14
With the LearnLinc Audio Wizard still open, check your audio hardware. If you are using
external speakers, be sure they are plugged into the correct ports on your computer and that
the speakers' power is turned on. Also be sure the volume control knob on the speaker itself is
turned up. If you are using headsets, be sure that they are plugged in correctly, and that any
volume control knobs are turned up. Also be sure that any mute buttons on the headsets
themselves are not set to Mute.
Was anything turned off, turned down, or muted? If so, return to Step 9.
If nothing was turned off, turned down, or muted, move to Step 15.

541

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Step 15
1. Exit the LearnLinc Audio Wizard.
2. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > Multimedia > Sound Recorder, from the Windows
taskbar.
The Sound Recorder displays.

3.
4.
5.

542

Click Record, and talk into the microphone.

When you have finished speaking, click Stop.
Click Play to try to play back the recording.
If you can record and play back a sound using the Sound Recorder, move to Step 10.
If you can not record and play back a sound using the Sound Recorder, move to Step
11.

Step 16
1. With the LearnLinc Audio Wizard still open, double-click on the speaker icon in the bottom
right of the Window task bar.
The Volume control panel displays. Note that your Volume control panel may have a
different name, and may look slightly different, based on the type of sound card you have.

2.

Select Options > Properties, from the Volume control panel menu bar.

543

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

544

3.

Select Recording and click OK.

The Recording control panel displays. Note that your Recording control panel may have a
different name, and may look slightly different, based on the type of sound card you have
and your operating system.

4.
5.

Make sure that the Mute checkboxes are cleared for Line In or Mic.
If you see Select checkboxes on this screen, click on the Select checkbox for the input
port that your microphone uses. In most cases, this is either Line In or Mic.
If one input port is selected and your system is not working, clear it and try selecting the
other.
If any options were muted or set incorrectly in the Master Record settings, return to
Step 6.
If everything in the Master Record settings was set correctly, move to Step 17.

Step 17
1. Check your microphone hardware to be sure your microphone is plugged in to the proper
port on your computer and that any mute buttons on the microphone itself are not muted.
When you have checked your hardware, try using the Sound Recorder to record and play
back your voice.
2. Exit the LearnLinc Audio Wizard.
3. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > Multimedia > Sound Recorder.
The Sound Recorder displays.

4.
5.
6.

Click Record, and speak into the microphone.

When you are finished speaking, click Stop.
Click Play to play back your recording.
If you can record and play back sound using the Sound Recorder, move to Step 10.
If you can not record and play back sound using the Sound Recorder, contact your
system administrator, or LearnLinc Customer Service.

Step 18
Recall that when you ran the LearnLinc Audio Wizard in Step 1, you selected either Speakers
or Headset.
If you selected speakers, move to Step 8 and remember that:
To be able to talk in a LearnLinc class you must click the Talk button. (So that it appears
pushed in.)
To be able to hear in a LearnLinc class, click the Talk button again. (So that it appears
pushed out.)
If you selected Headset then move the Step 19.

545

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Step 19
You sound card may not support full duplex audio, or your drivers may need to be updated.
Check you sound card specifications or contact your system administrator to find out whether
your sound card is a half-duplex or a full duplex.
If the card is a half-duplex then you can use LearnLinc, but you must click the Talk button
to speak. The alternative is to purchase and install a full duplex sound card.
If your card is half duplex and you want to use LearnLinc with the Talk button, move to
Step 8.
If your card is full duplex, move to Step 11.

Network Troubleshooting with Ping

Ping is a useful program for testing your connection to your LearnLinc server when you are
encountering problems during class.
You can use Ping to send a few packets of data from a client computer across the network to
the server computer to see if the connection to the server is functioning properly.
You can also track Ping results during class and save them to a text file. The text file can then
be used by your IT staff or LearnLinc Customer Service to identify your problem. Descriptions
for both processes are provided below.
How to Ping your server to see if the connection to the server is functioning properly:
1. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > MS DOS Prompt (or Command Prompt), from the
Windows taskbar.
Windows 95 and 98 have MS DOS Prompt, Windows NT has Command Prompt.
2. Type Ping ###.###.###.###" in the DOS window, where ###.###.###.### is the IP address
for the server.
3. Press <Enter>.
You will see either of two responses. Each response is described in detail, below.

546

Example 1: Pinging the server results in a Reply from the server.

In this case, the server with the IP address of [Link] received the ping test packets
and sent a reply. The reply got back to the original computer very quickly (1-10 ms as
indicated by the time=1ms indicator). The TCP/IP connection to the server is functioning
properly.

547

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Example 2: Pinging the server results in a Request Timed Out response.

In this case, the Ping test packets did not get to the server with the address [Link].
When the computer that sent the packets realized this (after the TTL or Time to Live
expired) it displayed the message Request Timed Out. In this case, the TCP/IP
connection to the server is not functioning correctly. Contact your network technicians to
continue troubleshooting the problem.

548

How to track ping results during class and save them to a text file:
1. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > MS DOS Prompt (or Command Prompt), from the
Windows taskbar.
Windows 95 and 98 have MS DOS Prompt, Windows NT has Command Prompt.
2. Type Ping ###.###.###.### -t >c:\[Link]" in the DOS window, where ###.###.###.###
is the IP address for the server.
3. Press <Enter>.
The DOS screen displays a blinking cursor.

4.
5.
6.

Minimize the DOS window and continue with your class.

When class is over, close the DOS window and go to the c:/ drive and locate the
[Link] file. This should contain all the ping responses received during class.
Send this file to your IT staff or to LearnLinc Customer Service.

549

A LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

550

B
Appendix B: Name Service Capsule Definitions
LearnLinc supports the following capsule types in its database:

Resource related
User related
Virtual classroom
Application
Authority
Course
Audioclip
Persona
Session (i.e., Class)
Base Path
Book
Director Movie
Help
Navigator
Note
Qna
Recorded Class
Template
Url
Videoclip
Whiteboard
Directory (i.e., Group or Folder))
Each capsule type is described in detail below. Capsule types are listed in alphabetic order.
Review the recommended location and the properties and values for each capsule type.
551

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

552

Capsule-specific information (information the you provide) appears in italics.

Application

refers to a LearnLinc or third party application

Recommended location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Application

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Executable

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Creator

[Link] name

Prefix Flags

see note1

Suffix Flags

see note1

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

Audioclip

refers to stored, streamed, or live audio

Recommended location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Audioclip

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Preferred App

[Link]-application

Download

a URL including the protocol prefix, such as [Link]

or [Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

553

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

554

Authority Level

stores the attributes of a user authority level

Required location

[Link] level

Property

Value

Resource Type

Authority

Longname

Descriptive text

Creator

[Link] name

Can Administrate

True or False

Can Author

True or False

Can Change Password

True or False

Can Join Session

True or False

Can Register

True or False

Can Schedule Session

True or False

Base Path Resource

base folder and sub-folders in which a file is stored

Recommended location

[Link]-path-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Base Path

Longname

Descriptive text

Pathname

UNC Path name

Creator

[Link] name

555

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

556

Book

ToolBook and Authorware multimedia content

Recommended location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Book

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Preferred App

[Link]-application

Download

URL, including the protocol prefix, such as

ftp: //[Link], or [Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

Class

see Session.

Course

Stores information about a course,

including resources and classes stored in the course

Required location

[Link]-nam

Property

Value

Resource Type

Course

Longname

Descriptive text

Creator

[Link] name

Home Page

URL for the courses home page without the protocol prefix.
This is assumed to be http.

Visible

True or False, specifies whether the course is visible in the

Course Catalog.

Autostartx2,3

[Link]-name

CourseStudentx3

[Link] name

CourseInstructorx3

[Link] name

Download

A URL including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or file://
\\server\content\[Link]

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

[Link]-name
[Link]-name

557

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

558

Director Movie

SDirector Multimedia Content

Recommended location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Director

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC filename or relative filename

Preferred App

[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

Help

Refers to help files

Recommended location

[Link]-capsule-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Help

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Preferred Application

[Link]-application

Download

URL, including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

559

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

560

Navigator

Refers to a pre-made navigation tool for ToolBook content

Required location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Navigator

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Download

URL including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

Note

Stores and displays text messages in courses

Recommended location

[Link]-capsule-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Note

Longname

Descriptive text (title of the note)

Contents

Descriptive text (contents of the note)

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

561

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Persona

User Account

Required location

[Link] name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Persona

Longname

Full name of the user

Creator

[Link] name

Authority

Authority level (descriptive name)

Password

encrypted string

Last Login Time

The last time the user logged-in

Contact

Contact information for the user

EMail

email address

Home Page

Web home page of the user, without the protocol prefix ([Link]
Additional information entered by administrator or user

Comments
Registrationx

562

[Link]-name

StudentForCoursex3

[Link]-name

InstructorForCoursex3

[Link]-name

Pref: AllOnTopDisabled

True or False

Pref: AutoRegister

True or False

Pref:
HideDesktopOnJoin

True or False

Qna

Pre-made question and answer files

Recommended location

[Link]-capsule-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Qna

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Preferred App

[Link].Q&A

Download

URL, including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

563

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

564

Recorded Class

Recorded Classroom File

Recommended location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Recording

Course

[Link]-name

Longname

descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative path

ServerFileName

Name of file on LearnLinc server

FileSize

size of file in bytes

Creator

[Link]-name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

Session

A class. The name Session is only seen in the Advanced

Properties tab.

Required location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Session

Longname

Descriptive text

Start Time 2

The time is stored as the string representation of a double

floating point. This maps to an actual date and time according
to the OLE Date/Time rules

End Time 2

The time is stored as the string representation of a double

floating point. This maps to an actual date and time according
to the OLE Date/Time rules

Autostartx2,3

[Link]-name
[Link]-name

Agendax5

[Link]-name
[Link]-name

Floor Control

Floor control policy type, Instructor Led or Open

Discussion.

Instructor

[Link] name

Session ID

numeric string

Conf: Type

None, Audio, A/V, MCAudio, MCVideo

Conf: Frame Rate

if type = MCVideo or A/V, then number between 1-30

Conf: Version

1 (one) for prior versions of LearnLinc, 4 for LearnLinc 3.0 and

higher

565

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

566

Session

A class. The name Session is only seen in the Advanced

Properties tab.

Required location

[Link]-name

Conf: Video Address

if type = MCVideo or A/V then multicast IP address, port

Conf: Audio Address

if type = MCVideo or A/V or MCAudio then multicast IP address,

port

Conf: Bandwidth

if type = MCVideo, then Low, Standard, or High

Creator

[Link] name

Description

Descriptive text

Joining String

Descriptive text or blank

Session Password

encrypted string or blank

Is Multicast

True or False

Obsolete properties

The following properties are obsolete in LearnLinc 3.0 and

higher:
Give Shortcuts to All
Session Address
Use Session Palette
Start Time
End Time

Template

Pre-made template for multimedia content

Required location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Template

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Download

a URL including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

567

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

568

Url

Refers to web content

Recommended location

[Link]-capsule-name

Resource Type

Url

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

URL including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Preferred App

[Link] web browser

Download

URL including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

Videoclip

Use for stored, streamed, or live video/audio

Recommended location

[Link]-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Videoclip

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Preferred App

[Link]-application

Download

a URL including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

569

B LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

Whiteboard

Whiteboard files

Recommended location

[Link]-capsule-name

Property

Value

Resource Type

Whiteboard

Longname

Descriptive text

Base Path Resource

[Link]-path-resource

Filename

UNC Filename or relative Filename

Preferred App

[Link]

Download

a URL including the protocol prefix, such as

[Link] or
[Link]

Creator

[Link] name

Version

Descriptive text

Copyright

Descriptive text

Publisher

Descriptive text

Author

Descriptive text

Description

Descriptive text

The complete command line to run an application is: Executable PrefixFlags Filename SuffixFlags,
where the filename is the name of the document to start, if one is specified.

Autostart capsules are the materials and sessions contained in the course

Each autostart and registration property must have a unique name, indicated by a unique suffix
number. When these materials and classes are presented to the user, they are ordered by those
numbers.

4Childname
5

570

is the name of the child folder relative to the parent folder in which it resides.

Agenda list values have the same restrictions as autostart resources.

C
Appendix C: Configuring LearnLinc to Work
With SQL Server
If you choose to store your LearnLinc Name Service data on an SQL Server, you will need to
configure the SQL Server to work with LearnLinc. To configure the server, install SQL Server
version 7.0 and LearnLinc Server to the server machine, and then follow the instructions below.

Step One: Add the LearnLinc Database to the SQL Server

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

On the Start menu, select Microsoft SQL Server 7.0, and then click Enterprise Manager.
On the tree in the left pane, select your server, server group, and server machine, and then
click the Databases folder.
On the Action menu, select New Database...
The Database Properties dialog opens.
In the Name field, type LearnLinc40.
Under Database Files, click the Initial Size (MB) cell and type 20.
Leave the remaining default settings and click the Transaction Log tab.
Under Translation Log files, click the Initial Size (MB) cell and type 5.
Click OK and close Enterprise Manager.

Step Two: Run the Initialize Name Service SQL Script

1.
2.
3.

On the Start menu, select Microsoft SQL Server 7.0, and then click Query Analyzer.
Check that the Query Analyzer is set to connect to the server you are using. If you need to
select a server, click the browse button and select the server.
Click OK.

571

C LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

The Query Analyzer window opens.

In the DB: list on the toolbar, select LearnLinc 40.
On the File menu, click Open, and locate the [Link] file. This file is installed in
your LearnLinc Server/bin directory.
Click Open.
The SQL script opens in the Query Analyzer window.
On the Query menu, select Execute. You will receive one error stating that it Cannot drop
the table ResourcePropertyValue because it does not exist in the system catalog.
This error is OK. If you get any additional errors, please call LearnLinc Customer Service.
Close the script and then close Query Analyzer.

Step Three: Configure the ODBC Data Source

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

13.

572

On the Windows Control Panel, double-click ODBC Data Sources.

The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog appears.
Click the System DSN tab.
Select LearnLinc40ServerDB and click Remove.
A message appears asking if you are sure you want to remove the database. Click Yes.
Click Add.
The Create New Data Source dialog opens.
Select SQL Server and click Finish.
The Create a New Data Source to SQL Server dialog opens.
In the Name field, type LearnLinc40ServerDB (the same name that you deleted in step
3 of this section).
In the Description field, type LearnLinc 4 Name Service Database.
On the Server list, select the name of the SQL server.
Click Next.
Accept the defaults for authentication (unless you have a reason to change them) and click
Next.
Click the Change the default database to: check box, and then select LearnLinc40 from
the drop down list. Leave the remaining default settings.
Click Next, and then click Finish.
An ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup dialog appears, notifying you that a new ODBC
data source will be configured.
Click OK.

The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog appears.

14. Click OK to finish.
15. Reboot your server.
LearnLinc is now configured to use SQL Server.

573

C LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

574

Index
A
a,b,c,d 441
about button 114
activity
logging on server 56
activity logs
server 47
add
application to list 251
audio clip to list 248
authority level 138, 264
book to list 248
class to course contents list 221
course 196
Director movie 248
folder 193
large number of users 144
log-in group 129
note to list 253
pictures to LearnLinc palette 118
Q&A file to list 248
Q&A questions on-the-fly 456
resource to agenda or autostart list 243
resource to course 209
resource to course contents list 238
resource to course or class
who can 237
text to whiteboard 404
URL to list 250
user 133

video clip to list 248

whiteboard file to list 248
add button 114
add/remove button 114
additional materials 3
administration
troubleshooting 536
administration tool 14, 45, 489
add, edit, delete authority level 138, 264
adding large number of users 144
installing 62
managing users 128
some users cannot log-in to 536
administrator
authority level 126
default password 77
permissions in virtual campus 273
administrator authority level 489
advanced
choosing installation option 307
advancedmultimedia content
removing option from download page 105
advancedmultimedia content installation 489
agenda 489
adding application 251
adding audio clip 248
adding book 248
adding Director movie 248
adding note 253
adding Q&A file 248

575

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

adding resource to 243

adding URL 250
adding video clip 248
adding whiteboard file 248
launching multimedia content from 378
launching whiteboard from 401
LearnLinc palette 323
removing resource from list 262
agenda list
editing resource 256
agenda tab 114
agreement 441
all hands down 336
answer
details for Q&A 458
statistics for Q&A 458
answer menu
send answer statistics 459
answer set
changing feedback default 121
changing in feedback 442
answer sets
feedback 441
answer statistics
share with class 459
answers
clearing in feedback 443
answers menu
show answer details 458
appendix a
troubleshooting 509
application 489
adding to list 251
assistant launching for class 485
capsule 552

576

changing in appview 432

controlling during class 528
resource 234
students see only part when floor holder launches 528
application sharing 413437, 490
appshare 415
appview 415
what can be shared 415
what is 414
application sharing. See also, appshare, appview
applications
troubleshooting in the virtual classroom 522
appshare 13, 415, 490
bandwidth required for 217
launching 417
shortcut launches appview instead 528
split-screen 419, 423, 426, 429
using students shared application 422, 428
what can be shared 415
what is application sharing 414
appview 13, 415, 490
changing applications 432
closing 433
launch 430
obscuring shared windows 431
split-screen 434
students see entire desktop 530
students see white window, not application 530
tips for use 415
troubleshooting 530
what can be shared 415
what is application sharing 414
ask
a question with Q&A 457
assignment status 441

assistant instructor 220, 481485, 490

launch applications and resources for class 485
monitoring hand raises and feedback 484
responding to private messages 483
role 482
select for class 227
student view 482
assistants tab 114
attendee list
refreshing in glimpse 465
students not in glimpse list 531
audio
full vs. half-duplex 324
Internet conferencing 216
making sure the class can hear you 333
multicast conferencing 216
audio clip 375, 490
adding to list 248
close 381
in multimedia file
cannot hear 533
launching from agenda 378
launching from library 379
resource 234
suspend conferencing for 377
audio conferencing. See conferencing
audio wizard 333
unable to play [Link] 509
audioclip
capsule 553
author 491
authority level 126
permissions in virtual campus 273
authority level 491
add, edit, delete 138, 264

capsule 554
table of permissions 127
what is 126
authority levels 272
and the virtual campus 272
Authorware 375
converting for LearnLinc 153
doesnt open on students computers 533
error, cannot invoke file 532
supported versions 374
auto register 191
auto register button 115
auto update 330
auto-register 491
autostart
adding application 251
adding book 248
adding note 253
adding Q&A file 248
adding URL 250
adding video 248
adding whiteboard file 248
autostart list
adding audio clip 248
adding resource to 243
editing resource 256

B
bandwidth 40, 491
setting for conferencing 217
system requirements 18
bandwidth monitor. See network bandwidth monitor
base path

577

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

capsule, defined 555

bitmap
converting for LearnLinc 153
book 491
adding to list 248
capsule 556
resource 234, 235
border graphics
changing in virtual campus 113
Breakout Groups
description of 468
breakout groups
creating 470
joining 470
browse
the web during class 383
button
changing in virtual campus 113
list of graphics 114

C
campus. See virtual campus
cancel button 115
capsule
application 552
audioclip 553
authority level 554
base path
defined 555
book 556
course 557, 558
help 559
navigator 560

578

note 561
persona 562
qna 563, 564
recorded class 564
session capsule
class 565
template 567
URL 568
videoclip 569
whiteboard 570
capsule file 65, 66
importing into name service 66
capture
screen shot in whiteboard 409
thumbnail or screen in glimpse 465
capture screen
takes a long time 531
catalog. See course catalog
CBT 152
change
application in appview 432
feedback answer set 442
font size in text chat 370
location description in palette 314
virtual campus location 57
chapter
organization 2
checklist
deploying LearnLinc 38
checklist, installation 44
circle
draw in whiteboard 406
class 290, 492
add to course contents list 221
adding resource to agenda or autostart list 243

agenda
removing resource from list 262
sorting list 260
asking a question during 457
assistant instructor 220
assistant launching applications and resources for 485
audio and video conferencing 215
cannot join 514
close whiteboard for 409
communicating in, overview 33
data only 215
deleting powerpoint presentation 165
dismissing student from 338
H.323 multicast video 216
indeo multicast video 216
internet audio 216
joining 329
joining, overview 32
leaving 338
making sure they can hear you 333
multicast audio 216
on Internet vs. intranet 318
open whiteboard for 403
opening Q&A for 455
recording 345
rehearsing, overview 31
scheduling 213231
security 220
select assistant instructors 227
sending email to 301
setting bandwidth for 217
setting entering message 220
setting password 220
streaming video 220
talking to 334

the student view 220

troubleshooting 339
class agenda
hiding resource in 254
class list 492
difference between instructor and student 327
in glimpse 465
incomplete or displays multiple entries for some names 522
LearnLinc palette 323
not updated in glimpse 531
classroom 33
classroom log file 48
classroom service 9, 492
classroom service licences
checking 53, 75
classroom software 492
about 306
allowing users to install 69
changing web proxy settings 315
components installed 49
configuring for firewalls and web proxies 70
customizing installation 123
download and install 309
installing on user computers 68
system requirements 19
classroom tools
troubleshooting 522
classroom. See virtual classroom.
clear
feedback 443
client
about 306
allowing users to install 69
changing web proxy settings 315
components installed 49

579

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

configure 70
customizing installation 123
download and install 309
installing on user computers 68
system requirements 19
client configuration 314
client/server architecture 7, 40, 493
close
appview 433
glimpse 465
Q&A for class 459
synchronized web browser 390
whiteboard for class 409
color
changing in whiteboard change
line weight and color in whiteboard 407
concurrent user licence model 39
concurrent user licences 493
conferencing
audio and video types 215
audio cannot hear or be heard during class 517
audio choppy or breaking up 518
audio has an echo 520
audio has loud hissing sound 519
bandwidth required for 217
data only 215
full duplex sound card with talk button 520
internet audio 216
licensing error 510
multicast audio 216
multicast video 216
mute checkbox or talk button 322
mute microphone 335
no one can hear floor holder 533
some have video others have audio only 521

580

some students cannot hear 518

suspend audio/video 377
talking to the class 334
troubleshooting audio 537
troubleshooting video 521
volume indicators 323
conferencing window 322, 493
configure
classroom software 70, 314
LearnLinc palette 331
virtual campus 58
web proxy settings for classroom software 315
connection speed
affects synchronization 375
affects synchronized web browser 387
vs. modem speed 375, 387
content 493
adding to course and class, overview 30
choosing conversion option 154
conversion options 152
convert PowerPoint to ToolBook 172
converting 151183
creating, overview 30
LearnLinc is different than other content 152
make available to students 157
navigator 175
PowerPoint upload 159
storage 157
content author
role on LearnLinc team 27
contents
adding application 251
adding audio clip 248
adding book 248
adding Director movie 248

adding note 253

adding Q&A file 248
adding URL 250
adding video clip 248
adding whiteboard file 248
contents list 493
add class 221
adding resource to 238
removing resource from list 262
sorting 260
contents tab 115
contents, toolbook navigator 380
control panel
changing location description for palette 314
changing web proxy settings 315
client 314
logging server activity 56
updating virtual campus configuration 58
control panel configuration utilities 493
conventions in this guide 3
convert
choosing option 154
content for use in LearnLinc classes 151
content options 152
storing content 157
tips for converting PowerPoint to ToolBook 174
cookie 493
defined 511
cookies
always allow 511
cookies not enabled 511
course 494
accessing information 294
adding resource 209
adding to course catalog 196

capsule 557, 558

class 290
contents list
add class 221
adding resource to 238
editing resource 256
removing resource 262
sorting 260
deleting powerpoint presentation 165
grouping related in folder 193
opening resource 297
people 291, 299
registering for or dropping 285
registering for, overview 32
registering instructors 199
registering students for 204
sending email to class 301
student view 192, 293
students register for 190
threaded discussion 292
what is 189
who can manage 290
working with 289304
course catalog 188, 494
accessing information 294
adding course 196
adding folder 193
course catalog button 115
course contents
hiding resource in 254
course contents list 494
opening resource 297
create
authority level 138, 264
large number of users 144

581

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

log-in group 129

new virtual directory 57
resource 233267
user 133
create new 133
crop
picture in whiteboard 408
current speaker indicator 494
current speaker/on air indicator 322
custom
choosing installation option 307
removing option from download page 107
custom installation 494
customize
client installation 123
features that can be 99
localization 99
process for virtual campus 100
streaming video 98
virtual classroom
distributing customizations 100
virtual classroom, features that can be 100
why 98
customize LearnLinc 97124

D
data only 215, 494
bandwidth 18
database
exporting name service 63
import capsule file 66
name service 8
default 77

582

administrator password 77
changing desktop bitmap 120
changing feedback answer set 121
changing synchronized web browser page 120
default pictures
changing 119
delete
authority level 138, 264
log-in group 136
powerpoint presentation 165
question 452
question from Q&A list 452
resource 262
user 136
desktop
viewing students in glimpse 465
desktop bitmap
changing default 120
[Link] 120
details
answers for Q&A 458
details tab 115
Director movies
adding 248
description of 235
directory, virtual 57
discussion tab 115
discussion, threaded. See threaded discussion
dismiss student 338
display
location description in palette 307
picture in LearnLinc palette 315
pictures in LearnLinc palette 118
distribute
virtual classroom customizations 100

dock
text chat 370
documentation update policy 4
download
allowing users to, classroom software 69
classroom software 309
process 307
recorded class 356
download button 115, 116
download page 188, 495
draw
shapes in whiteboard 406
draw tool, toolbook navigator 380
drop
course 285
duplex
full vs. half audio 324

error
not licensed for conferencing option 510
not logged-in to LearnLinc 534
unable to play [Link] for audio wizard 509
your log-in cannot be validated 509
[Link] 110
Excel
converting for LearnLinc 153
exit
class 338
class, overview 33
glimpse 465
export
entire name service 65
name service 63
selected information from name service 65

F
E
edit
authority level 138, 264
password 281
resource 256
text in whiteboard 404
user profile 281
edit tab 116
ellipse
draw in whiteboard 406
email
sending to class 301
enable
server licences 52
entering message 220

feedback 439444, 495

answer sets 441
ask students to use 442
assistant, monitoring 484
changing answer set 442
changing default answer set 121
clearing 443
difference between instructor and student 327
LearnLinc palette 324
open discussion 441
sharing summary with class 443
student view 441
what is 440
[Link] 121
file

583

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

printing from whiteboard 400

saving in whiteboard 399
file menu
Q&A
exit Q&A 459
merge question file 453
save question file 452, 454, 456
file service 9, 495
files
storing locally for Q&A 448
storing whiteboard locally 395
fill
changing color in whiteboard 407
find
virtual campus 274
firewall 495
configuring classroom software to use 70
considerations for LearnLinc 41
floor
pass to a student 337
privacy 337
take during class 322
taking from a student 337
floor control 215, 324, 496
floor holder 9, 496
folder 496
adding to course catalog 193
font
changing size in text chat 370
frames 496
defined 388
in synchronized web browser 388
freehand
draw in whiteboard 406
full-duplex 324, 496

584

G
glimpse 13, 461466, 497
attendee list not updated 531
cant participate while waiting for glimpse 531
closing 465
image is small 531
image takes too long 531
launching 464
refreshing student list 465
selecting a student 465
student view 463
troubleshooting 531
what is 462
grab
screen shot in whiteboard 409
graphic
moving in whiteboard 406
resizing in whiteboard 406
graphics
changing buttons 113
changing in the virtual campus 112
changing on welcome page 112
changing virtual campus borders 113
list of tab and button 114
group 497
group. See log-in group
guest course catalog
removing access to 103
guide
chapter
organization 2
conventions 3
organization 1
who should read 1

H
H.323 multicast video 216, 497
half-duplex 324, 497
hand raise 325
all hands down 336
assistant, monitoring 484
difference between instructor and student 327
responding 336
hand raise button 497
hand raise indicator 322, 497
hardware and software
planning 28
help 189, 498
capsule 559
how to get 4
help button 116
hide
a resource 254
resource in course contents or class agenda 236
home button 116
home page 188, 498
HTML 498
converting for LearnLinc 153
frames, defined 388
vs. other web presentation technologies 385
when to use 385

I
ili file 172
image file
converting for LearnLinc 153
images
changing in virtual campus 112

list of tab and button 114

import
name service capsule file 66
picture in whiteboard 407
indeo multicast video 216, 498
indicator
hand raise 322
network bandwidth monitor
volume 323
information
accessing for a course 294
information page, server 46
install
administration tool 62
allowing users to, classroom software 69
classroom software 68, 309
classroom software, overview 30
server 51
server software, overview 29
install from the web 307
[Link] 69
installation
choosing option 306
customizing client 123
installation checklist 44
installations
troubleshooting 71
instructor
authority level 126
LearnLinc palette diagram 11
list in course student
list in course 299
permissions in virtual campus 273
registering for course 199
role on LearnLinc team 27

585

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

instructor authority level 498

instructor led 324, 498
instructor led floor control 215
instructor picture
changing default 119
instructor pictures
adding to LearnLinc server 118
instructor, assistant 220
select for class 227
[Link] 119
interface component
administration tool 14
appshare and appview 13
glimpse 13
Q&A 13
whiteboard 13
interface components
LearnLinc palette 10
virtual campus 9
Internet
LearnLinc classes on 318
vs. intranet 386
internet 498
Internet audio 216
internet audio 499
Internet Explorer
frames in synchronized web browser 388
Internet vs. intranet 318
intranet 499
LearnLinc classes on 318
vs. Internet 386
intranet vs. Internet 318
IS support person
role on LearnLinc team 26

586

J
join
a class 329
cannot connect to server when joining class 515
cannot join class 514
class, overview 32
prompted to download file when clicking 514
prompted to select program to open [Link] 514
join button 116
[Link] 514
jpeg
converting for LearnLinc 153

K
kbps 217, 499
keep alive 41, 499
key
checking licence keys 53, 75
enabling on server 52
keys
error 510

L
language button 117
latecomers
sending to breakout groups 470
launch
applications and resources for the class, assistant 485
appshare 417
appview 430
glimpse 464

Q&A for class 455

synchronized web browser 389
whiteboard file from agenda 401
whiteboard file from library 402
whiteboard from agenda shortcut 401
launching
audio or video clip from agenda 378
audio or video clip from library 379
multimedia book from agenda 378
multimedia book from library 379
LearnLinc 499
bandwidth use 40
customizing 97
deployment checklist 38
ensure all hardware and software in place 42
using, overview 32
what is it 7
LearnLinc administrator
role on LearnLinc team 27
LearnLinc aware 500
LearnLinc classroom software 500
LearnLinc information
required for testing 74
LearnLinc menu
set navigator 175
LearnLinc palette 10, 321, 500
agenda 323
changing default pictures for student and instructor 119
changing location description 314
class list 323
conferencing window 322
configure 331
displaying location description in 307
enabling users to show their pictures 118
feedback 324

hand raise indicator 322

instructor diagram 11
location 322
making your picture display in 315
mute 322
network bandwidth monitor 323
on air/current speaker indicator 322
student diagram 12
student view 325
take floor 322
talk button 322
text chat 324
volume indicators 323
LearnLinc server
adding streaming video 101
system requirements 16
LearnLinc team, overview 26
leave
class 338
class, overview 33
library
launching multimedia content from 379
launching whiteboard from 402
licence
concurrent user model 39
licenses
error 510
line
changing weight and color in whiteboard 407
draw in whiteboard 406
list. See class list
local
storing Q&A files 448
localize
parts of LearnLinc 99

587

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

virtual campus text 109

location 314
changing virtual campus 57
displaying description in palette 307
on LearnLinc palette 322
log
server activity 56
log file
for server activity 56
log-in 500
cannot 511
error
cannot be validated 509
error, not logged-in to LearnLinc 534
to virtual campus 275
to virtual campus, overview 32
log-in group 500
creating 129
delete 136
not displayed on log-in screen 512
what is 127
log-in groups
not displayed on log-in page 512
log-in page
no groups 512
no groups in list 512
no password field 512
logout button 116
log-out page 500
logout page 188
logs
server 47
lower
raised hands 336

588

M
[Link] 69
merge
question set 453
message
assistant responding to private 483
entering, for class 220
private text chat 367
restricting text chat 343, 367
sending private text chat 371
sending text chat 369
microphone
mute 335
modem speed
vs. connection speed 375, 387
monitor
hand raises and feedback responses for assistant 484
network status 332
monitor, network bandwidth 323
move
graphics in whiteboard 406
picture in whiteboard 408
text box in whiteboard 405
multicast 415, 500
multicast audio 216, 501
system requirements 21
multicast video 216
bandwidth 18
multimedia book 501
launching from agenda 378
launching from library 379
ToolBook 380
multimedia content 373382, 501
cannot hear audio clip 533

choosing installation option 307

doesnt open on students computers 533
error, cannot invoke file 532
student view 376
supported versions 374
troubleshooting 532
types that can be synchronized 374
what is 374
multiple choice questions. See Q&A
multiple servers
maintaining data on 49
multiple sites
testing 74
mute 322, 335, 501
mute checkbox 324

N
name service 8, 501
exporting 63
exporting entire 65
exporting selected information from 65
importing capsule file 66
navigator 175, 380
adding to ToolBook book 175
capsule 560
Netscape Navigator
frames in synchronized web browser 388
network
planning 28
troubleshooting with ping 546
network bandwidth monitor 501
LearnLinc palette 323
network status monitor 332

in text chat 367

note 501
adding to list 253
capsule 561
resource 235
notes, toolbook navigator 380

O
office documents
converting for LearnLinc 153
on air/current speaker indicator 322, 502
one-way video 220
online help
overview 32, 33
open
glimpse 464
port for UDP audio 41
resource 297
whiteboard file for the class 403
open discussion 324, 502
and breakout groups 468
open discussion floor control 215
overview
creating a LearnLinc environment 26

P
pace 441
packing list 66
packing list file 65
page forward, toolbook navigator 381
page history, toolbook navigator 380
palette 502

589

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

displaying location description in 307

troubleshooting 528
palette. See LearnLinc palette
participant
authority level 126
participant authority level 502
pass floor 337
password
default administrator 77
editing 281
field not displayed on log-in page 512
setting for class 220
pausing
class recorder 347
people 291
course 299
people list
incomplete or displays multiple entries for some names 522
people tab 117
permissions
in virtual campus 272
persona
capsule 562
picture
display in LearnLinc palette 315
importing in whiteboard 407
moving or cropping in whiteboard 408
student and instructor
changing defaults in LearnLinc palette 119
pictures
displaying in LearnLinc palette 118
pie chart 443
pilot class
planning 29
ping

590

saving results in text file 549

troubleshooting the network 546
plan your environment, overview 28
playing
downloaded recorded classes 361
recorded classes from the server 354
png
converting for LearnLinc 153
pointer, shared 404
PointPlus
presentation doesnt display in synchronized web browser 534
PowerPoint
convert to ToolBook 172
converting for LearnLinc 153
resource 235
some students cannot open converted presentation 535
tips for converting to ToolBook 174
upload in Virtual Campus 159
powerpoint
deleting presentation 165
PowerPoint to ToolBook converter 172
select the instance of LearnLinc message 533
presentation
deleting powerpoint 165
print
toolbook navigator 380
whiteboard file 400
privacy
when you have the floor 337
private
making a resource 254
resource 236
sending text chat message 371
text chat message 367
text chat option not available 526

private messages
assistant responding to 483
project manager
role on LearnLinc team 26
proxy. See web proxy
punctuation
in user accounts 536

Q
Q&A 13, 445459, 502
adding questions on-the-fly 456
answer statistics 458
asking a question 457
capsule 563, 564
closing for class 459
launching for class 455
making question list before class 450
merging question sets 453
question editor 456
removing question from list 452
saving question sets 452
sharing answer statistics 459
storing files locally 448
student view 449
what is 446
when to use 448
who can ask questions with 448
Q&A file 502
adding to list 248
resource 235
question
asking with Q&A 457
question editor 451, 456

question list
making before class 450
removing question 452
question menu
delete question 452
question set
merging 453
saving 452
questions
adding on-the-fly 456
quick tour 502
quick tutorial 188
quick tutorial button 117

R
Recording 341
recording
classes 345
rectangle
draw in whiteboard 406
refresh
student list in glimpse 465
register 503
for course 285
for course, overview 32
instructor for course 199
students for course 204
who is for course 299
registration information 4
registry file
checking 53
enabling server licences 52
release

591

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

sound card 377

remove
access to virtual campus functions 102
question from Q&A list 452
resource 262
Required elements for testing
LearnLinc information 74
software 74
required elements for testing 74
resize
graphics in whiteboard 406
text box in whiteboard 405
resource 503
adding to class agenda or autostart list 243
adding to course 209
adding to course contents list 238
application 234
assistant launching for class 485
audio clip 234
book 234, 235
creating 233267
Director movie 235
editing 256
making private 254
note 235
opening from course contents list 297
PowerPoint 235
private, who can see 236
Q&A file 235
recorded class 235
removing from list 262
sorting in list 260
URL 236
video clip 236
what is 234

592

whiteboard file 236

who can add to course or class 237
restrict
text chat 343, 367, 371
restricted text chat 503
results
sharing feedback with class 443
resync class, toolbook navigator 381
return button 117
return floor
difference between instructor and student 327
role
of assistant instructor 482
run
appshare 417
appview 430
run menu
appview 430
library 379
run. See launch

S
save
question set 452
whiteboard file 399
save button 117
schedule
planning 28
schedule a class 213231
scheduling
courses and classes, overview 30
screen shot
converting for LearnLinc 153

grabbing in whiteboard 409

security 220
select
assistants for class 227
select color, toolbook navigator 380
self register 503
permissions in virtual campus 272
self-register
authority level 126
send
email to all in course 301
text chat message 369
server
activity logs 47
cannot connect to when joining class 515
client/server architecture 7
components installed with 45
creating new virtual directory 57
deleting powerpoint presentation from 165
enabling licences 52
error
not licensed for conferencing option 510
installing 51
installing other software 45
licences
checking 53, 75
logging activity 56
maintaining data on multiple 49
troubleshooting page 46
server components
classroom service 9
file service 9
name service 8
server configuration control panel 46
logging server activity 56

server information page 46, 503

checking server licences 53, 75
server log file 48
server, SQL 8
server. See LearnLinc server
ServerInfo 53, 75
service
classroom 9
file 9
name 8
session
capsule 565
session. See also Class
set
bandwidth 217
entering message for class 220
share
feedback summary results 443
Q&A answer statistics with class 459
your applications with the class 417
shared close
toolbook 381
shared pointer 404
toolbook navigator 380
sharing. See application sharing
shortcut
whiteboard 401
software
installing other on LearnLinc server 45
required for testing 74
sound card 324, 503
release 377
split-screen
appshare 419, 423, 426, 429
appview 434

593

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

SQL Server
configuring to work with LearnLinc 571
using with LearnLinc 49
SQL server 8
square
draw in whiteboard 406
start page 187, 504
statistics
answers for Q&A 458
share Q&A with class 459
store
Q&A files locally 448
whiteboard files locally 395
streaming media 376
streaming media file 504
streaming video 504
adding to LearnLinc server 101
bandwidth 18
customizing LearnLinc with 98
in a class 220
students take a long time to see 522
student
authority level 126
dismissing from class 338
LearnLinc palette diagram 12
passing floor to 337
registering for course 204
taking floor from 337
view of LearnLinc palette 325
viewing desktop in glimpse 465
student authority level 504
student list
refreshing in glimpse 465
student picture
changing default 119

594

student pictures
adding to LearnLinc server 118
student view
class 220
course 192, 293
multimedia content 376
Q&A 449
synchronized web browser 388
whiteboard 396
[Link] 119
suggestions
how to submit 4
summary results
feedback 443
[Link] 120
synchronization
connection speeds affect 375
in the synchronized web browser 385
multimedia content 374
multimedia content types 374
updating the whiteboard 404
whiteboard 396
synchronized content 504
synchronized web browser 383391, 505
affected by connection speed 387
changing default page 120
closing for the class 390
frames 388
Internet vs. intranet 387
launching 389
multiple windows 522
netscape crashes on close 524
netscape users do not get new window 523
PointPlus presentation doesnt display 534
some students cannot see page 524

student closed on own 524

student view 388
students wait a long time to see page 523
supported browsers 388
what is 384
what is synchronized 385
when to use 385
system
authority level capsule 554
system requirements
bandwidth 18
client 19
LearnLinc server 16

T
tab
list of graphics 114
take floor 322, 337, 505
talk
to the class 334
talk button 322, 324, 505
teach
LearnLinc class 317340
template
capsule 567
[Link]
unable to play error 509
testing
change the system administrator account password 78
instructor, join a class in the Sample Course 84
instructor, launch the synchronized web browser and navigate
to a URL 91
instructor, pass the floor 89

instructor, take the floor back 91

instructor, talk to the class 88
instructor, use AppShare 93
log-in as an administrator 76
log-out, and log-in again as sample instructor 83
multiple sites 74
required elements 74
student, join the same class on another LearnLinc computer 86
student, raise hand 89
student, talk to the class 90
testing the LearnLinc environment 7396
testing the LearnLinc environment, overview 30
text
adding to whiteboard 404
changing in virtual campus 110
editing in whiteboard 404
localizing virtual campus 109
text box
moving or resizing in whiteboard 405
text chat 365371, 505
assistant instructors and 368
changing font size 370
difference between instructor and student 327
docking 370
LearnLinc palette 324
private message 367
private option not available 526
restricting 343, 367, 371
sending a message 369
sending private message 371
the student view 368
troubleshooting 526
undocking 348, 351, 370
what is 342, 366
This 461

595

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

threaded discussion 292, 505

tips
converting PowerPoint to ToolBook 174
ToolBook 375
adding navigator 175
close for class 381
convert PowerPoint to 172
converting for LearnLinc 153
default navigator 380
doesnt open on students computers 533
error, cannot invoke file 532
error, not logged-in to LearnLinc 534
supported versions 374
tips for converting PowerPoint to 174
tools menu
changing feedback answer set 442
clearing feedback answers 443
restrict text chat 371
show feedback summary results 443
suspend audio/video 377
undocking text chat 348, 351, 370
translate
parts of LearnLinc 99
virtual campus text 109
troubleshooting
administration 536
appendix 509
audio conferencing 537
classroom tools 522
installation issues 509
installations 71
multimedia content 532
network 546
virtual campus issues 511
virtual classroom 339, 514

596

troubleshooting page 46
true/false 441
typical
choosing installation option 307
removing option from download page 106
typical installation 505

U
UDP port
opening for LearnLinc audio 41
undock
text chat 348, 351, 370
unicast audio
bandwidth
multicast audio
bandwidth 18
system requirements 20
unregister
course 285
update
student list in glimpse 465
upgrade
a translated virtual campus 110
upload
recorded class to server 348
saved class recording to server 353
URL 506
adding to list 250
capsule 568
defined 384
resource 236
use
whiteboard on own 398

user 133
adding large number of 144
administration options 128
authority level 126
default administrator password 77
delete 136
locating information about 278
log-in group 127
new authority level for 138, 264
user account 506
created with punctuation 536
gave additional rights but cannot use administration tool 536
persona capsule 562
what is 126
user account creation
removing access to 102
user directory 188, 506
create new user 133
creating a log-in group 129
delete user 136
locating information about a user 278
removing access to 104
user directory button 115
user profile
editing 281
users
adding, overview 30
managing 125147

V
video
multicast conferencing 216
streaming

students take a long time to see 522

video clip 375, 506
adding to list 248
close 381
in multimedia file
cannot hear 533
launching from agenda 378
launching from library 379
resource 236
suspending conferencing for 377
video conferencing. See conferencing
video, streaming
adding to LearnLinc server 101
customizing LearnLinc with 98
videoclip
capsule 569
view
Q&A answers 458
Virtual Campus
managing users 128
virtual campus 9, 271287, 506
accessing course information 294
adding folder to course catalog 193
authority levels 272
changing border graphics 113
changing button graphics 113
changing graphics 112
changing location 57
changing password 281
course catalog 188
download page 188
editing user profile 281
error
cannot log-in 511
finding 274

597

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

help 189
home page 188
list of tab and button graphics 114
localizing text 109
locating information about a user 278
logging-in 275
logout page 188
log-out, overview 33
make available to students, overview 31
making changes to text 110
modifying download page
download page
modifying in virtual campus 104
opening resource 297
process for customizing 100
quick tutorial 188
registering for or dropping a course 285
removing access to functions 102
start page 187
the student view 273
updating configuration 58
upgrading when translated 110
upload PowerPoint 159
user directory 188
create new user 133
creating a log-in group 129
delete user 136
welcome page
changing graphic 112
what is 74
where is 189
who is registered for course 299
virtual classroom 214, 318, 507
distributing customizations 100
features that can be customized 100

598

troubleshooting 339, 514

virtual directory
creating new on server 57
volume indicators 507
LearnLinc palette 323

W
waiting for update 404
WBT 152
web
install from 307
web address. See URL
web browser, synchronized. See synchronized web browser
web content 383
when to use 385
web pages
converting for LearnLinc 153
web proxy
changing settings in control panel 315
configuring classroom software to use 70
specifying in LearnLinc 308
web proxy server 308, 507
web site
virtual campus 9
welcome page
changing graphic 112
whiteboard 13, 393410, 507
adding text 404
cannot open file from agenda 527
capsule 570
changing fill color 407
changing line weight and color 407
close for the class 409

doesnt launch on others computers 527

drawing 406
editing text 404
file takes a long time to load 526
grabbing a screen shot 409
importing a picture 407
launching a whiteboard file from the agenda 401
launching from agenda shortcut 401
launching from the library 402
moving graphics 406
moving or cropping picture 408
moving or resizing text box 405
opening file for the class 403
printing a file 400
resizing graphics 406
saving a file 399
shared pointer 404
storing files locally 395
student view 396
synchronization 396
troubleshooting 526
updating for others 404
using on own 398
what is 394
who can use 395
whiteboard file 507
adding to list 248
resource 236
Word
converting for LearnLinc 153
[Link] 109
[Link] 109, 110

Y
yes/no 441

599

LearnLinc Advanced Users Guide

600